Adi Mission Pdfs

CURRICULUM – 2020
(C-20)
DIPLOMA IN
CIVIL ENGINEERING
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING
ANDHRA PRADESH :: VIJAYAWADA

CIVIL ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM- 2020 (C-20)
INDEX
S.No Contents Page No.
1. Preamble 03
2. High lights of Curriculum ( C-20) 04
3. Acknowledgements 05
4. Rules and Regulations 06
5. 25
Scheme of Instructions and Examinations –Ist Year
6. 26
Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -III Sem
7. 27
Scheme of Instructions and Examinations- IV Sem
8. 28
Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -V Sem
9. 29
Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -VI Sem
10. 30
Ist Year Syllabus
11. 117
III Sem Syllabus
12. 188
IV Sem Syllabus
13. 252
V Sem Syllabus
14. 314
VI Sem Syllabus
PREAMBLE
The proposed programme intends to develop a skilled technician to support the
industries both nationally or globally. It also helps to kindle the spirit of
entrepreneurship with necessary skills and theoretical inputs aligning with the
National policy of ‘Make in India’. The programme also provides for accomplishing
higher education goals for those who wish to enrich their theoretical concepts further.
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been
offering Diploma programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake
holders: industries, students, academia, parents and the society at large. As such, it
has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to keep the curriculum abreast with the
advances in technology through systematic and scientific analysis of current
curriculum and bring out an updated revised version at regular intervals. Accordingly
the SBTET, AP under the aegis of the Department of Technical Education, Andhra
Pradesh in its 57th Board Meeting held on 05-02-2019 (vide item no: 18) resolved to
update the Polytechnic Curriculum C-16 with the guidance of National Institute of
Technical Teachers Training & Research (NITTTR), Extension Centre, Vijayawada
(ECV), to be implemented with effect from the academic year ‘20-21.
Analysis of Curriculum C-16 (SWOT analysis) started in the month of June-2019.

Feedback was collected from all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior
Lecturers, Head of Sections and Principals for all programmes for this purpose. A
series of workshops with subject experts followed in the subsequent weeks and the
draft curricula were prepared for every programme. Finally, an interactive session
with representatives from industries, academia and subject experts was held on
04.01.2020 for thorough perusal and critique of draft curricula; and the suggestions
received thus received from Industrialists and academia have been recorded,
validated by another set of experienced subject teachers from the Department of
Technical education for incorporation into the Curriculum C-20.
The design of new Curricula for the different diploma programmes has thus been
finalised with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the
Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh, and duly reviewed by Expert Committee constituted
of academicians and representatives from industries. Thus, the primary objective of
the curriculum change is to produce employable technicians in the country by
correlating the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic input.
The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed

throughout the design of this curriculum is designed to meet the requirements of NBA
Accreditation, too.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2020 (C-20) is approved by BoG of

SBTET for its implementation with effect from 2020-21.
Highlights of Curriculum C-20:
1. Duration of course for regular Diploma and for sandwich Diploma is 3 years
and 3½ years respectively.
2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is
maintained as Year-wise pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses
and 1-year Industrial Training is introduced for 3 ½ years Sandwich Diploma
courses.
4. Updated subjects relevant to the industry are introduced in all the Diploma
courses.
5. CISCO course content has been incorporated into the ECE and CME
programmes for certification from CISCO in lieu of industrial training when
students are unable to get Industrial Training placement in any industry.
6. The policy decisions taken at the State and 1Central level with regard to
environmental science are implemented by including relevant topics in
Chemistry. This is also in accordance with the Supreme Court guidelines
issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
7. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills which is playing a
major role in the success of Diploma Level students in the industries, emphasis
is given for learning and acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills
in English. Further as emphasized in the meetings, Communication Skills lab
and Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
8. CAD specific to the branch has been given emphasis in the curriculum.
Preparing drawings using CAD software has been given more importance.
9. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, it is found that the theory content
is found to have more Weightage than the Practical content. In C-20
curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical content in Laboratories and
Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills.
10. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course
content in all the subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome
based than the conventional procedure based.
11. Curricula of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based
on the suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization
of the equipment available in the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that
are chosen for the practical sessions are identified to confirm to the field
requirements of industry.
12. An exclusive section for assessing Higher order Thinking skills (HOTS) has
been introduced in summative evaluation.
Acknowledgements:
It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum

C-20.
A series of workshops in three phases were conducted by NITTTR, AP Extension Centre,
Vijayawada involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges & Industries
to analyze the Previous C-16 Curriculum and to design C-20 Curriculum under the guidance
of Dr C. R. Nagendra Rao, Professor & Head, NITTTR-ECV. The efforts & support
extended by NITTTR to bring out final Curriculum C-20 by incorporating needs, aspiration &
expectations of all stake holders is highly appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.
The Secretary, SBTET AP extends its gratitude and congratulate all the staff members
who are involved and the subject experts of various branches who have contributed their
services in designing this C-20 curriculum book.
The Secretary, SBTET AP is very much thankful to Dr. Pola Bhaskar I.A.S.,
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman,SBTET, AP for his valuable
guidance to bring out this curriculum book.
The Secretary, SBTET AP is grateful to Sri M.M. Nayak, I.A.S., the then Special
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman,SBTET, AP. for their guidance and
valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying, updating and bring it for implementing
the Curriculum C-20 from 2020-21 academic year.
The Secretary, SBTET AP acknowledge with thanks the guidance & inspiration
provided by Sri. V.S. Dutt, the then Secretary, SBTET, Andhra Pradesh, and other
officials of State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh, experts from industry,
academia from the Universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity
from the Polytechnics who are directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the curriculum.
K.VIJAYA BHASKAR
Secretary ( FAC)
SBTET AP
.
RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-20 CURRICULUM
1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES

All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3
years or 3½ years duration of academic instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on year wise pattern in the first year, and the
remaining two or two & half years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of
few courses like Diploma in Bio-Medical course, the training will be in the
seventh semester. Run-through system is adopted for all the Diploma
Courses, subject to eligibility conditions.
2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down
in this regard from time to time.
a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will
have to appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into
Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by the State Board of Technical
Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh, Vijayawada.
Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible
to appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET).
b) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C
examination, conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra
Pradesh or equivalent examination thereto, at the time of applying for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In
case of candidates whose results of their Qualifying Examinations is
pending, their selection shall be subject to production of proof of their
passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally at
the time of admission.
c) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common
Entrance Test (POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the
Government of Andhra Pradesh from time to time.
d) For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry
qualification is 10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A
separate notification will be issued for admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii). D. Pharmacy
3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks
secured in sessional work and end examination of each year for determining
the eligibility for promotion etc.., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will
be allotted to each admitted candidate to maintain academic records.
5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER / YEAR:
a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with
theAcademic Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be
90 / 180 days excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is
not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements shall be made to
conduct classes to complete the syllabus.
6 ELIGIBILITY (ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION)
a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all
subjects, if he or she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days
during the year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and
above and below 75%) in each semester or 1 st year may be granted on
medical grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage
ofattendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester /
1st year and not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take
their end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand
cancelled. They may seek re-admission for that semester / 1st year when
offered in the next subsequent academic semester/year.
f) For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of
90%attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial
training,the student shall reappear for 6 months industrial training.
7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/
Regional Joint Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester
(Except Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial
training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including
D. Pharmacy course or first year course in Engineering and Non-
Engineering Diploma streams).
Otherwise, such cases shall not be considered for readmission for that
semester / year and are advised to seek readmission in the next
subsequent eligible academic year.
The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be
calculated from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that
year / Semester, as officially announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the
day on which he/she has actually reported to the class work.
8 SCHEME OF Evaluation
a) First Year
THEORY Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with
examination of 3 hours duration, along with internal assessment for
Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional marks). However, there are no
minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.
Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40 Marks for internal assessment
i.e., sessional marks for each practical Course with an end examination of
3 hours duration carrying 60 marks. However, there are no minimum
marks prescribed for sessionals.
b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

THEORY Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration
and for a maximum of 80 marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3hours duration
40/20 sessional marks.
9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME

a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding
sessional marks on the dates specified. Three-unit tests shall be
conducted for I year students and two Unit Tests for semester
students.
Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum
of 40 marks. For each test the average of marks of all the test, reduced to
20 shall be taken as final sessional in any case.
b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:
The award of sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as
givenin the following table:
Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks
First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)
Max:20 Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks

Marks
From the From the Average of From the Average From the Average of
Average of Assessment of of TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular
THREE Unit Regular Class work Class work Exercises.
Tests. Exercises.
All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further
scrutiny by a competent authority
(ii) Laboratory Courses:

Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed
during the year/ semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on
Drawing) here after shall be task/competency based as delineated in
the Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and
posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in AP, SBTET
website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based
and shall be prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of
theory courses be prepared as per SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc.., during
the course of study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded
by the concerned Teacher.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two
examiners. External examiner shall be appointed by the principal in
consultation with respective Head of Section preferably choosing a
qualified person from the following in the order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL,
APSRTC, APSEB etc..,
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoDs from Govt. Polytechnics/Sr. Lecturers/L3ecturers
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal
assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held along with
all theory papers in respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover (the
experiments / exercise prescribed) to test various skills like handling,
manipulating, testing, trouble shooting, repair, assembling and dismantling
etc.., from more than one experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and
practical Courses are to be maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal
Assessment and Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in
the following table:
Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
12 weeks 120
1
1. The faculty Learning outcomes as
20-22 concerned and given in the scheme of
2 120
weeks 2. Training assessment, for
Mentor of the Industrial Training
industry
1. The faculty 1.Demonstration of
member any one of the skills
30
concerned, listed in learning
3.Final
23-24 2. HoD outcomes
summative
weeks concerned 2.Training Report 20
Evaluation
and
3. An external 3.Viva Voce 10
examiner
TOTAL 300
10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

THEORY EXAMINATION:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in
end examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end
examination marks put together.
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:
For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50%
in end examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and
practical end examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass
mark for typewriting and short hand is 45% in the end examination. There are
no sessional marks for typewriting and Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.
INDUSTRIAL ASSESSMENT:
Pass mark is 50% in Formative assessment at Industry (I and II assessments
put together) and in final summative assessment at institution put together.
11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT

Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from
First Year to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.

b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too
within the succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma.
However, the duration including Improvement examination shall not exceed
FIVE years from the year of first admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or
Industrial Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s)
is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous
Examinations hold good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished
under Mal-practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification
issued by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance
shall deposit the original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also
original Diploma Certificate to the Board. If there is improvement in
performance of the current examination, the revised Memorandum of marks
and Original Diploma Certificate will be issued, else the submitted originals will
be returned.
12. RULES OF PROMOTION FROM 1ST YEAR TO 3,rd, 4,th 5 th ,6 th and 7th
SEMESTERS:
A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination
provided he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on
medical grounds up to 10%) i.e., attendance after condonation on medical
grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first-year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training, AP from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4 th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3 rd semester exam
fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training AP from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 th semester examination if
he/she
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th
semester
b) Should not have failed in more than four Courses in 1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester
examination if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 4th semester
b) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester
examination if he/she clears at least two Courses in third
semester.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4 th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
he/she
semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4 th Semester examination.
The first backlog exam in 5th semester will be conducted only in
instant/supplementary diploma examination.
For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:
semester
v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce)
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training.
b) should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/

CHOT/ TT):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination
medical grounds up to 10%) i.e., attendance after condonation on
medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination
fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 1st year and pays the
examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 1st year
examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
commencement of 3rd semester.
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester
exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she
a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

b). Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st
year.
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training
provided he / she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th
semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate, who could not
pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of
Industrial Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance, which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance
and attends for the VIVA-VOCE examination at the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided
he/she has successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th
semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th semester Examination.

semester
b) Should not have failed more than four backlog Courses of 3rd
Semester
C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):
The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for
this course. The industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to
one semester (6 months) after the 6th semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination
medical grounds up to 10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on
Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination
fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the
examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the first-year
examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
commencement of 3rd semester.
examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 3rd semester
he/she
semester
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of
1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
he/she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th
semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5 th semester exam if
he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th
semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
semester.
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of
3rd Semester.
v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in

examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5 th semester examination fee, has to
pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 6th
semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6 th semester
and
b) should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in

the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee prescribed by SBTET
from time to time before commencement of the 7th semester (Industrial
Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial
Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in
7thsemester Industrial Training
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th
semester Industrial Training.
Important Note:
Seminar/Viva-voce should not be conducted for Not-Eligible Candidates,
till the candidate gets eligibility. However, the record of internal
Assessment for Industrial Training for 260 marks shall be maintained at
Institution Level for all candidates and the data is to be uploaded only for
eligible candidates. For not eligible candidates the data is to be uploaded
as and when the candidate gets eligibility.
OTHER DETAILS
a) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial
training, he / she will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
b) The First spell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after the
completion of the last theory examination of 4th Semester.
c) The Second spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10 days
after the completion of first spell of Industrial training.
13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following
divisions of pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure
an overall aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate
of 60% marks and above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with
anoverall aggregate of below 60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken
for computing overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of
3rd and subsequent Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly
into diploma course at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the
aggregate of (100%) marks secured at the 3rd and subsequent
semesters of study shall be taken into consideration for determining the
overall percentage of marks secured by the candidates for award of
class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the
Diploma in the regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent
examinations, from the year of first admission.
14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time.
15. STRUCTURE OF EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three-unit tests for first year and two-unit tests for semesters shall be
conducted with a duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of
40. It consists of part A and Part B.
Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five
questions first question consists of four objective items like one word or
phrase answer/filling-in the blanks/true or false etc. with one mark for each
question. The other four questions are short answer questions and carry
three marks each.
Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice
i.e., Either/Or type, and each question carries 8 marks.
The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters shall be
reduced to 20 marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.
b) For drawing Courses:
For I year:
Three unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40
marks shall be conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.
Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question
carries four marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).
Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while

the student shall answer any three questions out of these five questions.
Each question in this part carries a maximum marks of 8, (3×8 marks=24
marks).
The sum of marks obtained in 3 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20

marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are
awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performance during
regular class exercise.
For semester: Two unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum
marks of 40 marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2 unit
test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional
marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based on
the student’s performance during regular class exercise
c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be
awarded based on continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/
workshop classes and the remaining 50% shall be based on the sum of the
marks obtained by the students in two tests.
II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that
the Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular
Course be considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.
a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.
Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions.
All questions are to be answered and each carries 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 =
30.
Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 40 contains 5 essay type questions
including Numerical questions (without any divisions in the question), with
internal choice (Either/or type), each carrying 8 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5
x 8 = 40.
Section ‘C’ with Max marks of 10 contains single essay type, Higher
order Thinking skills question (HoTs)including Numerical questions,
without choice (without any divisions in the question),
Thus, the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.
b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and

section ‘B’.
Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All
questions in section ‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5
marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.
Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The
student shall answer any four (4) questions out of the above six questions
and each question carries 10 Marks, ie. 4 x 10 = 40.
c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, each student has to
pick up a question paper distributed by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be
distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be
informed sufficiently in advance to the candidates.
d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the

course on Drawing) hereafter shall be task/competency based
as delineated in the Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP
and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of
task/s performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory
sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared
as per SBTET rules in vogue.
16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS
All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued
memorandum of marks without any payment of fee. However, candidates who
lose the original memorandum of marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the
Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P. for each
duplicate memo from time to time.
17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:
Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of
the course from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention
and discontinuation of studies by student etc.) failing which they will have
toforfeit the claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma (They will not be
permitted to appear for examinations after that date). This rule applies for all
Diploma courses of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-engineering
courses.
18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the

following academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½
academicyears & not more than 6 / 7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit
their seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic

years & not more than 4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of
the Diploma within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall
forfeit their seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.
19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING&

REVERIFICATION:
A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer
script/s should apply within prescribed date from the date of the
declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory
Courses and Drawing Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the
concerned candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by
post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.
B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE

VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT
i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer
script should apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration
of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory
Courses’ and Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary,
SBTETAP with Course experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount
them in the already valued answer script. The variations if any will be
recorded separately, without making any changes on the already
valued answer script. The marks awarded in the original answer script
are maintained (hidden).
II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of
the answer script(s) placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than
12% of maximum marks, and if there is no change in the
STATUS in the result of the candidate, such cases will not be
referred to the next level i.e., for 2-Tier evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more
than 12% of maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier
evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than
12% of maximum marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than
12% of the maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation
is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification and secured pass marks on
re-verification, then the status of the candidate changes to
PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification and if the marks secured on
re-verification are still less than the minimum pass marks, the
status of the candidate remain FAIL only.
(vi) After Re-verification of valued answer script, the same or change if any
therein on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(vii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are
revised, the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the
candidate has to forfeit the fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued
answer script would be entertained from a candidate who is reported
to have resorted to Malpractice in that examination.
20. MALPRACTICE CASES:
If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be
booked and the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and
regulations in vogue.
21. DISCREPANCIES/ PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc.., shall be represented to the
SBTETAP within one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no
such cases shall be entertained in any manner.
22. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA
If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a
duplicate to be issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect.
He / she may obtain a duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical
Education and Training, A.P., on payment of prescribed fee and on production
of an affidavit signed before a First-Class Magistrate (Judicial) and non-
traceable certificate from the Department of Police. In case of damage of
original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by
surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of prescribed fee to
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year
from the date of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty
prescribed by the SBTET AP from time to time.
23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the
candidates who intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
24. The following specific changes are discussed and incorporated:
All the courses in earlier curricula are reviewed and the following specific
changes are discussed and incorporated.
i) The topic of “Advanced Surveying using GIS & GPS” was introduced in
“Surveying-II (C-304)” at III semester level.
ii) In “Surveying-II practice & plotting (C-308)”, a survey camp of 6-days
duration is introduced to acquaint the student with the use and integration
of skills already acquired by him with different surveying instruments. This
survey camp is made mandatory for formative assessment.
iii) The need for having a topic on “Planning & Orientation of Buildings” is felt
& suggested by industry people in the Visakhapatnam workshop. As such it
is incorporated as one of the topics in the course “Construction Practice (C-
306)”
iv) The course Quantity Surveying in C-16 curriculum is now divided into two
courses, as “Quantity Surveying-I (C-403)” & “Quantity Surveying-II (C-
503)” to accommodate more exercises on various topics.
v) A new laboratory course “Surveying-III Practice (C-409)” is introduced at IV
semester level with topics on Field exercises in Total Station, GPS &
digitization of Maps. A two days camp of 14 hours duration is made
mandatory under this course for formative assessment.
vi) The topics on ‘Tests on Concrete’, ‘Tests on Soils’ are shifted from
‘Material Testing Lab’ and included in the newly introduced course,
“Concrete & Soil Testing Practice (C-509)”. Tests on aggregates
appropriate to Highway construction and NDT on Concrete are also
included in the new course.
vii) Two new courses, viz., “Construction failures, repairs & maintenance (C-
504)”, “Quality Control & Safety in Construction (C-505)” are introduced at
V semester, keeping in view the increasing need of supervisory
functioning.
viii) The course “Project Management for Construction” in C-16 curriculum is
appropriately renamed as “Construction Management &
Entrepreneurship(C-506)”, and hence the topic ‘Concrete Technology’ is
shifted to the course on “Construction Materials (C-305)”.
ix) In “CAD Practice-II (C-510)”, structural engineering drawings are included
in addition to the existing drawings of irrigation, public health, culverts &
bridges.
x) The question paper pattern for summative assessment for drawing
Subjects except for ‘Engineering Drawing’ in I year is changed as
mentioned in the blue print given for each drawing subject.
xi) The pattern of formative and summative assessment for “Industrial Training
(C-601) is modified, assessing all the skills and competencies needed and
acquired by the student during his training in industry.
25. GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations
or syllabi at any time and the changes or amendments made shall be
applicable to all the students, for whom it is intended, with effect from
the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education
and Training, AP are within the jurisdiction of Vijayawada.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules,
thedecision of the Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.
C-20 Curriculum for DCE

With Industrial training (In-house) in Semester VI
VISION
Develop Civil Engineering professionals competent to face the global challenges in a

progressive environment conducive to learn technical knowledge, skills blended with
ethics and values, to serve the society and to better it for a happy and comfortable
living.
MISSION
M1 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need based

curriculum designed in collaboration with industry, conducive for high quality
education emphasising on transfer of knowledge and skill development
essential for the profession and the society as well.
M2 To nurture higher order leadership qualities and ethics and values in students
to enable them to be leaders in their chosen professions while maintaining
the highest level of ethics.
M3 To encourage the spirit of inquisition to promote innovation and
entrepreneurship strengthened with life skills to sustain the stress.
M4 To foster effective interactions and networking with all the stake holders so
as to work towards the growth and sustainability of the society and
environment.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
1. Basic and discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic

mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals and engineering
specialization to solve the engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering
problemsusing codified standard methods.
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined
technical problems and assist with the design of systems components
orprocesses to meet specified needs.
4. Engineering tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern
engineering tools and appropriate technique to conduct standard tests
andmeasurements.
5. Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment:
Apply appropriate technology in context of society, sustainability,
environment and ethical practices.
6. Project Management: Use engineering management principles
individually, as a team member or a leader to manage projects
andeffectively communicate about well-defined engineering
activities.
7. Life-long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engaging
updating in the context of technological changes.
PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)
1. An ability to apply disciplines - specific knowledge to solve core and/or applied

Civil Engineering problems.
2. An ability to plan and perform experiments and practices and to use the results
to solve Civil Engineering problems.
3. Apply appropriate technologies and tools with an understanding of the
limitations.
DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING
FIRST YEAR
Instruction
Periods/ Total Scheme Of Examination
Week Perio
Sub
Name of the Subject ds
Code
Theor Practi Per Durati Sessio End Total
Year on nal Exam Mark s
y cal
(hrs) Marks Marks
THEORY
C-101 English 3 90 3 20 80 100
C-102 Engineering 5 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics –
I
C-103 Engineering Physics 4 120 3 20 80 100
C-104 Engineering 4 120 3 20 80 100
Chemistry and
Environmental studies
C-105 Engineering 5 150 3 20 80 100
Mechanics
C-106 Surveying-I 3 90 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
C-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100
C-108 Surveying - I Practice - 4+2 180 3 40 60 100
& Plotting
C-109 Physics Laboratory - 3 45 1½ 20 30 50
C-110 Chemistry Laboratory - 3 45 1½ 20 30 50
C-111 Computer - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Fundamentals
Practice
Total 24 18 1260 280 720 100
0
THIRD SEMESTER
Instruction
Total Scheme Of Examination
Periods/Week
Sub Name of Periods
End
Code the Subject Per Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practical Exam
Year (hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering 3 20 80 100
Mathematics
C-301 –II 4 60
C-302 Mechanics
of Solids &
5 75 3 20 80 100
Theory of
Structures
C-303 Hydraulics 5 75 3 20 80 100
C-304 Surveying-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
Construction 3 20 80 100
C-305 Materials 4 60
Construction 3 20 80 100
C-306 Practice 4 60
PRACTICAL
Civil - 3 40 60 100
Engineering
C-307 Drawing-I 6 90
Surveying - - 3 40 60 100
II Practice &
C-308 Plotting 4 60
Material - 3 40 60 100
Testing
C-309 Practice 3 45
Hydraulics - 3 40 60 100
C-310 Practice 3 45
Total 26 16 630 280 720 1000
FOURTH SEMESTER
Instruction
Periods/Week
Sub Name of the Periods
End
Code Subject Per Duration Sessional Total
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
C-401 3 45 3 20 80 100
Mathematics-III
Design and
C-402 Detailing of 5 75 3 20 80 100
R.C.Structures
Quantity
C-403 5 75 3 20 80 100
Surveying-I
Transportation
C-404 5 75 3 20 80 100
Engineering
Irrigation
C-405 4 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering
PRACTICAL
Civil
C-406 Engineering 6 90 3 40 60 100
Drawing-II
Concrete & Soil
C-407 Testing 4 60 3 40 60 100
Practice
Communication
C-408 3 45 3 40 60 100
Skills
Surveying-III
C-409 3 45 3 40 60 100
Practice
C-410 CAD Practice-I 4 60 3 40 60 100
Total 22 20 630 300 700 1000
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION AND MODEL BLUE PRINT FOR EVALUATION
CURRICULUM-2020
FIFTH SEMESTER
Instruction
Periods/Week
End
Marks
THEORY
C-501 Steel Structures 4 60 3 20 80 100
C-502 Environmental 5 75 3 20 80 100
Engineering
C-503 Quantity 4 60 3 20 80 100
Surveying-II
C-504 Construction 3 45 3 20 80 100
Failures, Repairs
& Maintenance
C-505 Quality Control 4 60 3 20 80 100
and Safety in
Construction
C-506 Construction 3 45 3 20 80 100
Management &
Entrepreneurship
PRACTICAL
Structural
Engineering 3 45 3 40 60 100
C-507 Drawing
C-508 Life Skills 3 45 3 40 60 100
C-509 Field Practices 7 105 3 40 60 100
C-510 CAD Practice-II 6 90 3 40 60 100
Total 23 19 630 280 720 1000
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTION AND MODEL BLUE PRINT FOR EVALUATION
CURRICULUM-2020
SIXTH SEMESTER
SI. Scheme of evaluation

No Subject Duration Max.
. Item Nature
Marks
1.First Assessment at Assessment of Learning

Industry outcomes by both the
120
faculty and training
(After 12 Weeks) Mentor of the industry
2.Second Assessment of Learning

Assessment at the outcomes by both the
Industri Industry 120
faculty and training
1 al 6 months
(After 22 weeks) Mentor of the industry
Training
Final Summative Training Report 20
assessment at
institution l Demonstration of any 30
one of the skills listed in
(After 24 weeks) learning outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300
 The Industrial Training shall carry 300 marks and pass mark is 50% in
assessment at industry (first and second assessment put together) and in final
summative assessment at institution put together
 If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at
institution level, the student shall reappear for final summative assessment, in the
subsequent board examination.
 During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial
training, the student should reappear for 6 months industrial training.
FIRST YEAR
FIRST YEAR
Instruction
Periods/ Scheme Of Examination
Total
Week
Perio
Sub
Name of the Subject ds Per Dur Tota
Code ation Sessio End
Theo Pract Year l
(hrs nal Exam
ry ical Mar
) Marks Marks
ks
THEORY
C-101 English 3 90 3 20 80 100
C-102 Engineering 5 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics – I
C-103 Engineering Physics 4 120 3 20 80 100
C-104 Engineering 4 120 3 20 80 100
Chemistry and
Environmental studies
C-105 Engineering 5 150 3 20 80 100
Mechanics
C-106 Surveying-I 3 90 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
C-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100
C-108 Surveying - I Practice - 4+2 180 3 40 60 100
& Plotting
C-109 CE-109(A) : Physics - 1½ 20 30 50
3 45
Laboratory
C-110 CE-109(B): - 1½ 20 30 50
3 45
Chemistry Laboratory
C-111 Computer - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Fundamentals
Practice
Total 24 18 1260 280 720 100
0
English
Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for
Code Title Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
C-101 English 3 90 20 80
S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
Total Periods 90
To improve the skills of English Language use by enriching

vocabulary and learning accurate structures for effective
Course communication.
Objectives
To comprehend themes for value based living in professional
and personal settings.
CO No. Course Outcomes
CO1 Applies perceptions of themes related to societal responsibility of

adolescents towards their surroundings.
CO2 Demonstrates knowledge of form and function of ‘grammar items’ and use
them in both academic and everyday situations.
CO3 Demonstrates effective English communication skills with competence in
listening, speaking, reading and writing in academic, professional and
everyday contexts.
CO4 Displays positivity and values of harmonious living in personal and
professional spheres as reflected through communication.
Blue Print of Question Paper:

S. Name of the Unit Perio Weigh Marks Wise Question Wise CO's
No. ds tage Distribution of Distribution of Mappe
Alloc Alloca Weightage Weightage d
ated ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
CO1,
English for CO2,
1 8 3
Employability 1 CO3,
CO4
CO1,
CO2,
2 Living in Harmony 8 17 3
1 1 CO3,
8*
* 1* CO4
CO1,
Connect with CO2,
3 8 3
Care CO3,
CO4
CO1,
Humour for CO2,
4 8 3
Happiness 1 CO3,
CO4
14
8* 1* CO1,
Never Ever Give CO2,
5 8 3
Up! 1 CO3,
CO4
CO1,
Preserve or CO2,
6 9 3
Perish CO3,
1 1 CO4
14 8*
* CO1,
The Rainbow of 10* CO2,
7 8 3
Diversity CO3,
1 CO4
New Challenges - 8*+ 1 CO1,
8 8 35 8* 4
Newer Ideas 3+3 * CO2,
+3 CO3,
1* CO4
CO1,
The End Point CO2,
9 8
First! CO3,
CO4
CO1,
CO2,
10 The Equal Halves 8
CO3,
CO4
Dealing with 9 CO1,
Disasters CO2,
11
CO3,
CO4
TOTAL 90 80 6 30 34 10 2 5 8 1
PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 All Questions are compulsory :

Marks 60 minutes
PART-B: 5 Questions 8 marks each =40 Internal choice :
Marks 90 minutes
Part-C: 1 Question 10 marks =10
Marks No choice, one compulsory question : 30
(Higher Order Question) minutes
NOTE: * indicates questions can be given from any of the corresponding lessons
in the blue print.
Question Paper Pattern for Unit Tests
Part A: 16 marks: 4 questions with 1 mark each (FIB, True/false, one

word/phrase, etc..)
4 questions with 3 marks each (short answer/ descriptive/ applicative
questions)
Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions 8 marks each with internal choice
Learning Outcomes
1. English for Employability
1.1. Explain the need for improving communication in English for
employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences
2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually
3. Connect with Care
3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues for everyday situations
4. Humour for Happiness
4.1. Explain the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Display reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Explain the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas
as a preliminary step for writing a good paragraph.
5. Never Ever Give Up!
5.1. Practice to deal with failures in life.
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative
functions such as speaking and writing about routines,
professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary.
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills.
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Describe the ecological challenges that we face today and act to
savethe environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events.
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment.
6.4. Write e-mails.
7. The Rainbow of Diversity
7.1. Illustrate and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural
workspace
7.2. Use different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations
8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas
8.1. Explain the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive
Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. List the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Explain latest innovations and get motivated
9. The End Point First!
9.1. Illustrate the importance of setting a goal in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and
comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life
10. The Equal Halves
10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short
essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing
11. Dealing with Disasters

11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept
ofdisaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it
insentences
11.3. Analyse an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Write different kinds of reports
Textbook: INTERACT (A Textbook for I Year English) - Published by SBTET, AP
Reference Books:
Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised by N.D.V. Prasad Rao)
: English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT Books,
S. Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan
Engineering Mathematics-I
Course Course Title No. of Total No. Marks for Marks for
Code Periods/week of periods FA SA
Engineering
C-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I
S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped
1 Algebra 31 CO1
2 Trigonometry 44 CO2
3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3
4 Differential Calculus 33 CO4
5 Applications of Differentiation 19 CO4, CO5
Total Periods 150
(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-

Ordinate Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
Course
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of
Objectives
Differential Calculus in engineering applications.
CO1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and

solve problems on matrices.
Course
CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric
Outcomes
functions, their inverses and complex numbers.
CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles

and conic sections in coordinate system.
CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
CO5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using

differentiation.
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
Learning Outcomes
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems
on matrices.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pairs and Cartesian product - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.
1.4 Classify types of functions (into, many-to-one, one-one, onto and
bijective).
1.5 Define inverse functions - examples.
1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned
below into partial fractions
f (x) f (x)
i) ii)
(ax b)(cx d ) (ax b)2 (cx d )
f (x) f (x)
iii) 2
iv)
(x a2 )(bx 2
(x a2 )(x2 b2
c) )
1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order
square matrices).
1.10 Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as associative, distributive,
commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.
1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties;
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of a symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices
and provide examples.
1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix, minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3
matrix using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of
determinants to solve problems.
1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative
inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint
and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
1.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule
and matrix inversion method.
UNIT - II
C.O.2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their
inverses and complex numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle.
2.2 List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified values.
2.3 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions.
2.4 Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.5 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),
tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).
2.6 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc..
2.7 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc..
2.8 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.9 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc. and sub multiple
anglesA/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.10 Derive useful allied formulas like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc..
2.11 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed
2.12 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two
trigonometric ratios into a product and vice versa, examples on these formulae.
2.13 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or
product of three or more terms.
2.14 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting
an
appropriate domain and range.
2.15 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains
andranges.
2.16 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A=
sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions with
examples.
2.17 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and
identitieslike
sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc..
2
1 1 1
x
2.18 Apply formulae like tan x tan y tan where x 0, y 0, xy etc..,
y 1
,
 
1 xy
to solve Simple problems.
2.19 Explain what is meant by solutions of trigonometric equations and find
thegeneral solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate
examples.
2.20 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0, a cos x + b sin
x=cetc.., and problems using simple transformations.
2.21 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
2.22 Explain the formulae for sin A/2, cos A/2, tan A/2 and cot A/2 in terms
ofsemi-perimeter s and sides a,b,c and solve problems.
2.23 List various formulae for the area of a triangle.
2.24 Solve problems using the above formulae.
2.25 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
2.26 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
2.27 Define complex number, its modulus, conjugate and list their properties.
2.28 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.29 Define amplitude of a complex number.
2.30 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.
2.31 Write DeMoivre’s theorem (without proof) and illustrate with
simpleexamples.
UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry
C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic
sections in coordinate system.
L.O. 3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope
form,slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form
orperpendicular
form.
3.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms.
3.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines,
intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel
lines.
3.4 Define locus of a point and define a circle.
3.5 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
3.6 Find the equation of a circle given (i) centre and radius, (ii) two ends of a
diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points.
3.7. Define a conic section.
3.8 Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of
aconic with
illustrations.
3.9 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity
aregiven.
3.10 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in
standard forms
whose axes are along co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on
above.
Syllabus for Unit test-II
completed
C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f (x) and state the
x a
l
properties of limits.
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim f and lim f (x)
(x)
x l g(x) x g(x)
xn an ax
1
4.3 Mention the Standard limits lim , lim sin x lim tan x lim ,
, ,
x a x a x 0 x 0 x 0 x
x x
x 1
1 x
e 1
lim , lim (1 x) x lim 1 (without proof) and solve the problems
,
x 0 x x 0 x x
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an
interval with some examples whether a given function is continuous or
not.
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first
principle
as
f (x h) f
lim and also provide standard notations to denote the
h 0 (x) h
derivative of a function.
4.6 State the significance of derivative in scientific and
engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos
x,
tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
4.8 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.11 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and
examplesusing the
Trigonometric transformations.
4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another
function and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.13 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
4.14 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function
withexamples.
4.15 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some
functionswith
examples like [f(x)]g(x).
4.16 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second
andthird order
with examples.
4.17 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial
derivativesand difference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.18 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n.
4.19 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications
tosimple problems.
C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.
L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of
the tangent to the
curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
5.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and
to find the
equation of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
5.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any
point on
the curve y=f(x).
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find
the velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.5 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where
thequantities like volumes, areas vary with respect to time-
illustrative examples.
5.6 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
5.7 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing
or decreasing with illustrative examples.
5.8 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a
function of single variable- simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
5.9 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas,
volumes etc..
5.10 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in
simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES

COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Relations and Functions:
Define Set, Ordered pairs, Cartesian product, Relations, functions, domain &
range of functions. Describe types of functions (in-to, many-to-one, one-one, onto
and bijective) and inverse functions – examples.
2. Partial Fractions:
Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational

fractions
in to their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.
f (x) f (x)
i) (ax b)(cx ii)
ii) (ax b)2 (cx
d)
d)
f (x) f (x)
iii)
iii) (x2 a2 )(bx iv) (x2 a2 )(x2
c) b2 )
3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of
two matrices, sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a
matrix-Symmetric, skew symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-
Determinant of a square matrix-Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants.
Singular and non-singular matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square
matrix- examples-System of linear equations in 3 variables-Solutions by
Crammer’s rule and Matrix inversion method-examples.
Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at
specified values, draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of
trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B), cot(A±B), and related identities with
problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multiple
angles A/2 with problems.
7. Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa
simpleproblems
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric
equations:
sinx =k ,cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic
equations, equations involving usage of transformations- problems.
10. Properties of triangles:
Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent
rule and projection rule-area of a triangle- problems.
11. Hyperbolic functions:
Definitions of hyperbolic functions, identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse
hyperbolic
functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
12. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex
number,Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitue
(polar) form, Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number- Problems.
DeMoivre’s theorem.
UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
13 Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular
distance from a point, distance between parallel lines-examples.
14. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and
radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non
collinear points - general equation of a circle – finding centre, radius.
15. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and
eccentricity
are given. properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.
UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus:
16. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple
Problems-Continuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.
17. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives
of elementary functions- problems. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse
trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with respect to another function,
derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit functions,
logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives -
examples – functions of several variables - partial differentiation, Euler’s
theorem-simple problems.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives:
18. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a
curve at any point. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and subnormal to the
curveat any point - problems.
19. Physical applications of the derivative – velocity, acceleration, derivative as
arate measure –Problems.
20. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and
decreasing functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems
leadingto applications of maxima and minima.
21. Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the
absoluteerror, relative and percentage errors and approximate values due to
errors in measuring.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared &
prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand &Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4 th
Edition, Schaum’s Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus,
Schaum’sSeries
Engineering Mathematics – I
Blue print
S. Chapter/ No of Weig Marks wise Question COs

No Periods htag distribution of map
Unit title wise
e weightage ped
distribution
Allott
ed of weightage
Unit - I : The Prac R U Ap An R U Ap An

Algebra ory tice
1 Relations and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO
Functions 1
2 Partial 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO
Fractions 1
3 Matrices and 10 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO
Determinants 1
Unit - II: Trigonometry
4 Trigonometric 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Ratios
5 Compound 3 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Angles
6 Multiple and 4 4 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2

Submultiple
angles
7 Transformatio 3 3 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
ns
8 Inverse 3 2
Trigonometric
Functions
9 Trigonometric 3 2 8 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 CO2
Equations
10 Properties of 3 2
triangles
11 Hyperbolic 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Functions
12 Complex 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Numbers
Unit III: Co-ordinate Geometry
13 Straight 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO3
Lines
14 Circle 3 2 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO3
15 Conic 8 4
Sections
Unit – IV: Differential Calculus
16 Limits and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO4
Continuity
17 Differentiatio 17 10 14 3 11 0 0 1 2 0 0 CO4
n
Unit - V: Applications of
Differentiation
18 Geometrical 3 2 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 CO5
Applications 0
19 Physical 2 2
Applications
20 Maxima and 3 4
Minima
21 Errors and 2 1
Approximatio
ns
Total 89 61 80 15 39 1 1 5 8 2 1
6 0
R: Remembering Type : 15 Marks

U: understanding Type : 39 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 16 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 10 Marks
Engineering Mathematics – I
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.11
Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.12 to L.O. 3.10
Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.10

Engineering Physics
Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

code Title Periods per Periods FA SA
week
Engineering
C-103 4 120 20 80
Physics
S. No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped
1 Units and Dimensions 08 CO1

2 Elements of Vectors 12 CO1
3 Dynamics 12 CO2
4 Friction 10 CO2
5 Work, Power and Energy 12 CO3
6 Simple harmonic motion 12 CO3
7 Heat and Thermodynamics 12 CO4
8 Sound 10 CO4
9 Properties of matter 10 CO5
10 Electricity and Magnetism 12 CO5
11 Modern physics 10 CO5
Total 120
Course Title: Engineering Physics
Course Objectives 1. To familiarize with the concepts of Physics involved in

the process of various Engineering, Industrial and Daily
life Applications.
2. To understand and apply the basic principles of physics
in the field of engineering and technology to familiarize
certain natural phenomenon occurring in the day-to-day
life
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting
relevant experiments/exercises
Explain S.I units and dimensions of different physical
CO1
quantities, basic operations among vector quantities.
Explain the motion of objects moving in one dimension and

CO2 two dimensions, the causes of motion and hindrance to the
motion of the objects especially with respect to friction.
Explain the mechanical energy of bodies like PE, KE and

CO3 conservation law of energy, the properties of simple harmonic
motion.
Explain gas laws, ideal gas equation, Isothermal and adiabatic

Course processes, Specific heats, to study the laws of
Outcomes CO4 thermodynamics. Causes, consequences and methods to
minimise noise pollution, explain beats, Doppler effect,
Reverberation, echoes.
Explain certain properties of solids, liquids like elastic

properties, viscosity and surface tension. Explain Ohm’s law,
to study Kirchoff’s laws, to study the principle of Wheatstone’s
bridge and its application to meter bridge. To study the
CO5
magnetic force and understand magnetic field. To compute
magnetic field strength on axial and equatorial lines of a bar
magnet. To familiarise with modern topics like photoelectric
effect, optical fibres, superconductivity and nanotechnology.
Learning Outcomes
1.0 Concept of Units and dimensions

1.1 Explain the concept of Units, Physical quantity,
F u n d a me n t a l physical quantities and d erive d physical quantities
1.2 Define unit, fundamental units and derived units, State SI units with
symbols
1.3 State Multiples and submultiples in SI system, State Rules of writing
S.I. units, State advantages of SI units
1.4 Define Dimensions, W r i te Dimensional formulae of physical
quantities
1.5 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities
1.6 State the principle of homogeneity of dimensions
1.7 State the applications and limitations of dimensional analysis
1.8 Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error,
significant figures
1.9 Solve problems
2.0 Concept of Elements of Vectors
2.1 Explain the concept of scalars, Vectors and give examples
2.2 Represent vectors graphically, Classify the Vectors, Resolve the vectors
2.3 Determine the resultant of a vector by component method, represent a
vector in space using unit vectors (i, j, k)
2.4 State and explain triangle law, parallelogram law, and polygon law of
addition of Vectors
2.5 Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work done, Power),
mention the Properties of dot product
2.6 Define cross product of two vectors with examples (Torque, Linear
velocity) Mention the properties of Cross product.
2.7 Solve the r e l ated numer i cal problems
3.0 Concept of Dynamics

3.1 Write the equations of motion in a straight line. Explain the acceleration
due to Gravity.
3.2 Explain vertical motion of a body and derive expressions for a)
Maximum Height, b) Time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of flight
3.3 Derive height of a tower when a body projected vertically upwards from
the top of a tower.
3.4 Explain projectile motion with examples
3.5 Explain horizontal projection and derive an expression for the path of a
projectile in horizontal projection
3.6 Explain oblique projection and derive an expression for it. Derive
formulae for a) Maximum Height b) time of ascent c) time of descent and d) time of
flight e) Horizontal Range, f) Maximum range
3.7 Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular velocity,
angular acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque
3.8 Solve the r e l ated numer i cal problems
4.0 Concept of Friction

4.1 Define friction and classify the types of friction.
4.2 Explain the concept of normal reaction.
4.3 State the laws of friction.
4.4 Define coefficients of friction, Angle of friction and angle of repose.
4.5 Derive expressions for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined
plane.
(Upwards and downwards)
4.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
4.7 Mention the methods of minimizing friction.
4.8 Explain why it is easy to pull a lawn roller than to push it.
4.9 Solve the r e l ated numer i cal problems.
5.0 Concepts of Work, Power, and Energy

5.1 Define the terms W ork, Power and Energy. State SI units and
dimensional Formulae.
5.2 Define potential energy and give examples, derive an expression for
potential energy.
5.3 Define Kinetic energy and give examples, derive an expression for
kinetic energy.
5.4 State and derive Work-Energy theorem.
5.5 Derive the relation between Kinetic energy and momentum.
5.6 State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in the case of
afreely falling body.
6.0 Concepts of Simple harmonic motion
6.1 Define Simple harmonic motion, give examples, state the
conditions.
6.2 Explanation of uniform circular motion of a particle is a
combination of two perpendicular S.H.M.s.
6.3 Derive expressions for displacement, velocity, acceleration,
Frequency, Time period of a particle executing SHM.
6.4 Define phase of SHM.
6.5 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive expression for time period of
simple pendulum.
6.6 State the laws of motion of simple pendulum.
7.0 Concept of heat and thermodynamics
7.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases
7.2 State and explain Boyle’s and Charles laws.
7.3 Define absolute zero temperature, absolute scale of temperature
7.4 Define ideal gas and distinguish from real gas
7.5 Derive Ideal gas equation. Define specific gas constant and universal
gas constant, write S.I unit and dimensional formula. Calculate the value of R.
7.6 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases
7.7 State and explain isothermal process and adiabatic process
7.8 State first and second laws of thermodynamics and state applications
7.9 Define specific heats and molar specific heats of a gas,
DeriveCP-CV =R
7.10 Solve the r e l e va nt numer i cal problems
8.0 Concept of Sound
8.1 Concept of the sound, Wave motion. (Longitudinal and transverse
wave)
8.2 Distinguish between musical sound and noise.
8.3 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity level of sound.
8.4 Explain causes, effects and methods of minimizing of noise pollution.
8.5 Explain the phenomenon of beats state the applications.
8.6 Define Doppler effect, list the applications.
8.7 Define reverberation and reverberation time and write Sabine’s
formula.
8.8 Define and explain echoes state its applications.
8.9 State conditions of good auditorium.
9.0 Concepts of properties of matter
9.1 Explain the terms elasticity, stress, strain and types of stress and strain.
9.2 State and explain Hooke’s law.
9.3 Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus
(K), Rigidity modulus (n), Poisson’s ratio ( ),
9.4 Define surface tension and give examples.
9.5 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory.
9.6 Define angle of contact and capillarity and write formula for Surface
Tension.
9.7 Explain the concept of viscosity, give examples, write Newton’s formula.
9.8 Define co-efficient of viscosity and write its units and dimensional
formula and State Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity.
9.9 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
10. Concepts of Electricity and Magnetism
10.1 Explain Ohm’s law in electricity and w rit e the f orm ul a .
10.2 Define specific resistance, conductance and state their units.
10.3 Explain Kichoff’s laws.
10.4 Describe Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketc.h.
10.5 Describe Meter Bridge for the determination of resistivity with a circuit
diagram.
10.6 Explain the concept of magnetism. State the Coulomb’s inverse square
law of Magnetism.
10.7 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force and write the
properties of magnetic lines of force.
10.8 Derive an expression for the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in
auniform magnetic field.
10.9 Derive equations for Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the
axial line and on the equatorial line of a bar magnet.
10.10 Solve the r el ated numer i cal problems
11.0 Concepts of modern physics

11.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect and Write Einstein ‘s photo
electric Equation.
11.2 State laws of photo electric effect.
11.3 Explain the Working of photo electric cell, write its applications.
11.4 Recapitulation of refraction of light and its laws, critical angle, total
Internal Reflection.
11.5 Explain the principle and working of Optical fiber, mention different
types of Optical fiber, state the applications.
11.6 Define super conductor and super conductivity and mention examples.
11.7 State the properties of super conducting materials and list the
applications.
11.8 Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications.
COURSECONTENT
1. Units and Dimensions:
Introduction, Physical quantity, Fundamental and Derived quantities,
Fundamental and Derived units, SI units, Multiples and Sub multiples, Rules
for writing S.I. units, Advantages of SI units. Dimensions and Dimensional
formulae, Dimensional constants and Dimensionless quantities, Principle
of homogeneity, Advantages and limitations of dimensional analysis, Errors
in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error, significant
figures, Problems.
2. Elements of Vectors:
Scalars and Vectors, Types of vectors (Proper Vector, Null Vector, Unit Vector,
Equal, Negative Vector, Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and
Position Vector). Addition of vectors, Representation of vectors, Resolution of
vectors, Parallelogram, Triangle and Polygon laws of vectors, Subtraction of
vectors, Dot and Cross products of vectors-Problems.
3. Dynamics
Introduction-Concept of acceleration due to gravity-Equations of motion for a
freely falling body and for a body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal
and Oblique projections- Expressions for maximum height, time of flight, range-
Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular velocity, angular
acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque–problems.
4. Friction:
Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of friction- Angle of
repose-Angle of friction- rough inclined plane- Advantages and disadvantages
of friction-Methods of reducing friction–Problems.
5. Work, Power and Energy:
Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential energy- kinetic
energy-Derivations of Potential and Kinetic energies-K. E and Momentum
relation - Work-Energy theorem- Law of Conservation of energy- Problems.
6. Simple Harmonic Motion:
Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples- Expressions for
displacement, velocity, acceleration, Time period, frequency and phase in
SHM- Time period of a simple pendulum- Laws of simple pendulum-seconds
pendulum-Problems.
7. Heat and Thermodynamics:
Expansion of Gases, Boyle’s law, absolute scale of temperature- Charles
laws- Ideal gas equation- Universal gas constant- Differences between gas
constant(r) and universal gas constant(R), Isothermal and adiabatic
processes, Laws of thermodynamics, Specific heats - molar specific heats of
a gas -Different modes of transmission of heat, laws of thermal conductivity,
Coefficient of thermal conductivity-Problems.
8. Sound:
Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion -musical sound and noise-Noise
pollution – Causes &effects- Methods of reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler
effect- Echo- Reverberation-Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula-Conditions of good
auditorium- Problems.
9. Properties of matter
Definition of Elasticity –Definition of stress and strain -the units and
di mensional for mulae for stress and strain - The Hooke’s law-
Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus(K),
Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio ( ), relation between Y, K, n and
(equations only no derivation)
Definition of surface tension-Explanation of Surface tension with reference to
molecular theory - Definition of angle of contact -Definition of capillarity -The
formula for surface tension based on capillarity - Explanation of concept of
Viscosity - Examples for surface tension and Viscosity - Newton’s formula for
viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of viscosity- The effect of temperature
on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseuille’s equation for Co-efficient of
viscosity- The r e l ated nu mer i cal problems.
10. Electricity & Magnetism:

Ohm’s law and explanation, Specific resistance, Kirchoff’s laws,
Wheatstone’s bridge, Meter bridge, Coulomb’s inverse square law,
magnetic field, magnetic lines of force, magnetic induction field strength-
magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line - magnetic
induction field strength at a point on the equatorial line–problems.
11. Modern Physics;

Photoelectric effect –Einstein’s photoelectric equation-laws of photoelectric
effect-photoelectric cell–Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal
reflection- fiber optics- -principle and working of an optical fiber-types of optical
fibers - Applications of optical fibers- superconductivity–applications-
Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy (English version) Intermediate physics Volume
2. Dr. S. L. Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha Unified physics Volume 1,2,3 and 4
3. Resnick& Holiday Text book of physics Volume I
4. Dhanpath Roy Text book of applied physics
5. D.A Hill Fiber optics
 XI & XII Standard NCERT Text BooksModel Blue Print with
Weightage for Blooms category and questions forchapter and Cos mapped
Weig Marks wise Question wise Mappe
ht distribution of distribution of d with
No of
S. Unit age Weightage Weightage CO
Perio
No Title/Chapter of
ds A
mark R U Ap R U Ap An
n
s
Units and 0 0
1 08 03 3 0 0 1 0 0 CO1
Dimensions
Elements of 0
2 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 CO1
Vectors
3 Dynamics 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 * CO2
4 Friction 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO2
Work, Power 0 0
5 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
and Energy
Simple 0 *
6 harmonic 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
motion
Heat and 0 *
7 Thermodynami 12 11 0 8 3 0 1 1 CO4
cs
8 Sound 10 11 0 8 3 0 0 1 1 0 CO4
Properties of 0 0
9 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5
matter
Electricity and 0 0
10 12 14 6 0 8 2 0 1 CO5
Magnetism
0
Modern
11 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 0 CO5
physics
2 6 *
Total 120 110 22 0 8 8 4
4 4 10
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 3 or 6 or 7
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 4.9
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies
code Periods of Periods FA SA
per week
Engineering
Chemistry
C-104 and 4 120 20 80
Environmental
Studies
Unit
S.No No of Periods COs Mapped
Title/Chapter
Fundamentals
1 18 CO1
of Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 CO1
Acids and
3 10 CO1
bases
Principles of
4 8 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 CO2
6 Corrosion 8 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 CO3
8 Polymers 12 CO4
9 Fuels 6 CO4
Chemistry in
10 6 CO4
daily life
Environmental
11 Studies 16 CO5
Total 120
 Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies
1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in
the process of various Engineering Industrial
Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made
Course Objectives environmental issues and concerns with an
interdisciplinary approach that include physical,
chemical, biological and socio-cultural aspects of
environment.
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises
 Course outcomes
Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding,
CO1 mole concept, acids and bases, PH metallurgical
process and alloys
Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, emf and

CO2
corrosion
Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment

CO3
Course Outcomes of water by advanced method
Synthesise of Plastics, rubber and applications

CO4 of fuel chemical compounds used in our daily
life.
Explain the causes, effects and control methods

CO5 of air and water pollution and measures to
protect the environment
 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for
each chapter and COs mapped
Marks wise Question wise
Weig
No of distribution of distribution of Mappe
S.N Unit ht age
Period Weightage Weightage d with
o Title/Chapter of
s A A A A CO
marks R U R U
p n p n
Fundamentals
1 18 19 8 8 3 1 1 1 CO1
of Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 11 0 0 8 3 1 1 CO1
Acids and
3 10 11 0 8 0 3 1 1 CO1
bases
Principles of
4 8 8 8 0 0 1 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemist 16 11 8 3 0 1 1 * CO2
ry
6 Corrosion 8 8 0 8 0 1 CO2
Water
7 10 11 8 3 0 1 1 CO3
Treatment
8 Polymers 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 * CO4
9 Fuels 6 3 3 0 0 1 CO4
Chemistry in
10 6 3 0 0 3 1 CO4
daily life
Environmental 1
11 16 14 3 0 1 2 CO5
Studies 1
1 2 3 *
Total 120 110 6 6 6 5 10
2 0 5
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 5 or 8
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to learn out
ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1.0 Atomic structure
1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron,

protonand neutron) and the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain the significance of four Quantum numbers.
1.4 Explain1. Aufbau principle, 2 Pauli’s exclusion principle 3 Hund’s rule.
1.5 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s, p and d- Orbitals.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency
1.9 Define and explain Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl, MgO,
*H2,*O2 and *N2. (* Lewis dot method)
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and
distinguish between their properties.
1.11 Structures of ionic solids-define a) Unit cell b) co-ordination number and the
structures of NaCl and CsCl unit cells.
2.0 Solutions
2.1 Define the terms 1. Solution, 2. Solute and 3. Solvent
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state and solubility
2.3 Define mole and problems on mole concept.
2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2. Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent
weight and
calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids. (HCl,
H2SO4, H3PO4 Bases (NaOH, Ca (OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3,
CaCO3)
2.5 Define molarity and normality and numerical problems on molarity and
normality
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality if weight of solute and volume
ofsolution are given
b) Calculate the weight of solute if Molarity or normality with volume of solution
are given
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to
lowconcentrated Solutions
3.0 Acids and bases
3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases and give the limitations
ofArrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 Explain Bronsted–Lowry theory of acids and bases and give the limitations
ofBronsted–Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.3 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of
Lewistheory of acids and bases.
3.4 Explain the Ionic product of water
3.5 Define pH and explain PH scale and solve the Numerical problems on pH
(Strong Acids and Bases)
3.6 Define and explain buffer solution and give the examples of buffer solutions.
3.7 State the application of buffer solutions
4.0 Principles of Metallurgy
4.1 List out the Characteristics of Metals and non-metals
4.2 Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals
4.3 Define the terms1.Mineral, 2. Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux 5. Slag
4.4 Describe the methods of concentration of Ore; 1. Handpicking, 2. Levigation and 3.
Froth Floatation
4.5 Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting,
Calcination and Smelting.
4.6 Explain the purification of Copper by Electrolytic Refining
4.7 Define an Alloy and Write the composition and uses of the following alloys. 1.
Brass 2. Germen silver 3. Nichrome.
5.0 Electrochemistry
5.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3. insulator, 4. Electrolyte
5. Non–electrolyte. Give two examples each.
5.2 Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction
5.3 Explain electrolysis by taking example fused NaCl
5.4 Explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
5.5 Define1 . Chemical equivalent (E) 2 . Ele ctr oche mi cal eq ui val en t (e) and
their relation.
5.6 Solve the Numerical problems on Faraday’s laws of electrolysis and
applications of electrolysis (Electro plating)
5.7 Define Galvanic cell and explain the construction and working of Galvanic
cell.
5.8 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.9 Explain the electrode potentials and standard electrode potentials
5.10 Explain the electrochemical series and its significance

5.11 Explain the emf of a cell and solve the numerical problems on emf of the
cell based on standard electrode potentials.
6.0 Corrosion
6.1 Define the term corrosion.
6.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
6.3 Describe the formation of a) composition cell b) stress cell c) concentration cell
during corrosion.
6.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
6.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion
a) Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings)
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and impressed–
voltageprocess)
6. 0 Water Treatment
6.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
6.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
6.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water (with Formulae)
6.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
6.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L) or(ppm).
6.6 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Ion-exchange process, b)
Permutit process or zeolite process
6.7 State the essential qualities of drinking water.
6.8 Chemistry involved in treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination,
deflouridation)
6.9 Explain Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis with examples.
6.10 State the applications of Reverse Osmosis.
8.0 Polymers
8.1 Explain the concept of polymerisation
8.2 Describe the methods of polymerization a)addition polymerization of ethylene
b)condensation polymerization of Bakalite(Only flow chart)
8.3 Define thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with examples.
8.4 Distinguish between thermo plastics and thermosetting plastics
8.5 List the Characteristics of plastics and state the disadvantages of using
plastics.
8.6 State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials.
8.7 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC, 2. Teflon, 3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6
8.8 Explain processing of Natural rubber and write the structural formula of Natural
rubber.
8.9 List the Characteristics of raw rubber
8.10 Define and explain Vulcanization and List out the Characteristics of
Vulcanizedrubber.
8.11 Define the term Elastomer and describe the preparation and uses of the
following synthetic rubbers a) Buna-s and b) Neoprene rubber.
9.0 Fuels
9.1 Define the term fuel
9.2 Classify the fuels based on physical state and based on occurrence.
9.3 List the characteristics of good fuel.
9.4 State the composition and uses of gaseous fuels.
a) water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) Coal gas, e) Biogas.
10.0 Chemistry in daily life
10.1 Give the basic chemical composition, applications, health aspects and pollution
impacts of
a) soaps, and detergents b) vinegar c) Insect repellents d) activated charcoal e) Soft
drinks
11.0 ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
11.1 Define the term environment and explain the scope and importance of
environmental studies
11.2 Define the segments of environment 1). Lithosphere, 2). Hydrosphere,
3). Atmosphere 4). Biosphere.
11.3 Define the following terms 1) Pollutant, 2). Pollution. 3). Contaminant
4)receptor, 5)sink, 6) particulates, 7)dissolved oxygen (DO), 8)Threshold limit
value (TLV), 9).BOD,10).COD 11) eco system12) Producers1 3 ) Consumers
14) Decomposers with examples
11.4 State the renewable and non-renewable energy sources with examples.
11.5 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity
11.6 Define air pollution and classify the air pollutants-based on origin and physical
state of matter.
11.7 Explain the causes, effects of air pollution on human beings, plants
andanimals and control methods of air pollution.
11.8 State the uses of forest resources.
11.9 Explain causes and effects of deforestation
11.10 Explain the causes and effects of the following
1) Greenhouse effect, 2) Ozone layer depletion and 3) Acid rain
11.11 Define Water pollution, explain the causes, effects and control methods
ofWater pollution.
COURSE CONTENT
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory –
Quantum numbers –Aufbau principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion
Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic configurations of
elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – types of chemical bonds – Ionic and
covalent bond with examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds-
structures of ionic crystals (NaCl and CsCl).
2. Solutions
Introduction of concentration methods – mole concept, molarity and normality –
Numerical problems on mole, molarity and normality.
3. Acids and Bases
Introduction – Theories of acids and bases and limitations – Arrhenius theory-
Bronsted –Lowry theory – Lewis acid base theory – Ionic product of water-
pHrelated numerical problems–Buffer solutions, action of buffer and its
applications.
4. Principles of Metallurgy
Characteristics of Metals and non-metals –Distinguish between Metals and
Non-metals, Define the terms i) Metallurgy ii) ore iii) Gangue iv) flux v) Slag -
Concentration of Ore –Hand picking, Levigation, Froth floatation – Methods
of
Extraction of crude Metal – Roasting, Calcination, Smelting – Alloys –
Composition and uses of brass, German silver and nichrome.
5. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes –
electrolysis – Faraday’s laws of electrolysis-application of
electrolysis(electroplating) -numerical problems on Faraday’s laws – Galvanic
cell – standard electrode potential – electrochemical series–emf and
numerical problems on emf of a cell.
6. Corrosion
Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - composition, stress and
concentration cells–rusting of iron and its mechanism – prevention of corrosion
by coating methods, cathodic protection methods.
7. Water technology
Introduction–soft and hard water–causes of hardness–types of hardness
–disadvantages of hard water – degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) –
softening methods – permutit process – ion exchange process– qualities of
drinking water –Chemistry involved in treatment of water (Coagulation,
Chlorination, defluoridation ) - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis –Applications of
Reverse osmosis.
8. Polymers
Introduction – polymerization – types of polymerizations – addition,
condensation with examples – plastics – types of plastics – advantages of
plastics over traditional materials-Disadvantages of using plastics – Preparation
and uses of the following plastics i). PVC ii) Teflon iii) Polystyrene iv). Nylon 6,6
–Processing of natural rubber - Vulcanization – Elastomers- Preparation and
applications of Buna-s, Neoprene rubbers.
9. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels–characteristics of good fuel-composition
and uses of gaseous fuels.
10. Chemistry in daily life
Basic composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of soaps
and detergents, vinegar, insect repellents, soft drinks, activated charcoal.
11. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Introduction– environment –scope and importance of environmental studies –
important terms related to environment– renewable and non-renewable energy
sources–Concept of ecosystem – Biotic components –Forest resources –
Deforestation -Biodiversity and its threats-Air pollution – causes-effects–Global
environmental issues – control measures – Water pollution – causes –
effects – control measures.
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi- Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit test 1, unit test 2 and unit
test 3
Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.7

ENGINEERING MECHANICS
Course Course Title No. of Total Marks for Marks for

Code Periods No. of Formative Summative
per Week Periods Assessment Assessment
ENGINEERING
C-105 05 150 20 80
MECHANICS
No. of
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods
1 Introduction 4 CO1
2 Forces & Moments 18 CO1
3 Centroid 18 CO2
4 Moment of Inertia 30 CO2
5 Simple Stresses and Strains 40 CO3
6 Shear force and Bending Moment 40 CO4
Total 150
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
Familiarize with the concepts of forces and their types,

applications of forces and moments, calculate the geometric
(i)
properties like Centroid and moment of inertia... etc.., for
varioussections
Course
Acquire the concepts of simple stresses and strains and their
Objectives
(ii) applications, and their relevance to mechanical properties of
metals
Understand the effect of loading on beams, analyses Shear

(iii)
Forceand Bending Moment of simple beams
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the basic concepts of Engineering Mechanics and
concept of different forces & moments and applying these
CO1 C 105.1
principles for Civil Engineering problems.
Compute the Centroid, Centre of gravity, Moment of

CO2 C 105.2 Inertia and Radius of gyration for various sections
Course
Outcomes Calculate the simple Stresses and Strains in structural
CO3 C 105.3 materials
Explain concepts of shear force and bending moments,

CO4 C 105.4 Compute the SF, BM values and Draws the SFD and
BMD for beams.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Introduction
Learning 1.1Define Mechanics and Engineering Mechanics

Outcomes 1.2State the applications of Engineering Mechanics
1.3State the branches of Engineering Mechanics
1.3Define the terms 1. Statics, 2. Dynamics, 3. Kinetics and
4.Kinematics
1.4 List the systems of measurements and Units
1.5 List S.I and M.K.S units of physical quantities used in Civil
Engineering
2.0 Forces and Moments
2.1 Define the following terms:
1. Force
2. Moment
3. Resultant
4. Equilibrium of forces
5. Equilibrant
6. Moment of a couple
2.2 Distinguish between
2.2.1 Scalar and Vector quantities
2.2.2 Co-planar and non-co-planar forces
2.2.3 Parallel and non-parallel forces
2.2.4 Like and unlike parallel forces
2.3Compute the resultant of two co-planar forces acting at a
point by
2.3.1 Law of parallelogram of forces and
2.3.2 Triangle law of forces
2.4 Explain ‘Lami’s Theorem’ and ‘Polygon Law of forces’
2.41 Solve simple problems using Lami’s Theorem
2.5 Explain ‘Polygon Law of forces’
2.5.1 Compute the resultant of a system of coplanar
concurrent forces by Polygon Law of forces
2.5.2 Define ‘Resolution of forces’
2.6. Solve problems on computation of the resultant of a
system of coplanar parallel forces.
2.7. Explain the properties of a couple.
2.8. List the conditions of equilibrium of rigid body subjected to
a number of co- planar forces.
2.8.1. Calculate resultant of co-planar concurrent forces
by analytical methods.
2.9 List various types of supports like Simple support, fixed
support, hinged support, roller support, List various types
of beams like simply supported beams, cantilever beams,
fixed beams, over hanging beams, continuous beams.
2.10 List various types of loads like point load,
uniformly distributed load, uniformly varying load,
Calculate the
support reactions for simply supported beams with point
loadsand uniformly distributed loading
3.0 Centroid
3.1 Define Centroid and Centre of gravity
3.2 Distinguish between Centroid and Centre of gravity
3.3 State the need for finding the Centroid and Centre
ofgravity for various engineering applications.
3.4 Calculate the positions of Centroid for simple
planefigures from first principles
3.5 Explain the method of determining the Centroid
by‘Method of moments.
3.6 Calculate the position of Centroid of standard Sections-T,
L, I, Channel section, Z section, unsymmetrical I section
3.7 Calculate the position of Centroid of built-up sections
consisting of RSJ’s and flange plates and Plane figures
having hollow portions
4.0. Moment of Inertia
4.1 Define Moment of Inertia, Polar Moment of Inertia and
Radius of gyration
4.2 State the necessity of finding Moment of Inertia for
various engineering applications
4.3 Compute Moment of Inertia and Radius of gyration for
regular geometrical sections like T, L, I, Channel section,
Z section and unsymmetrical I section
4.4 State 1. Parallel axes theorem and 2. Perpendicular
axestheorem to determine Moment of Inertia
4.5 Compute MI of standard sections by applying
parallel axis theorem.
4.6 Compute MI of built-up sections by applying parallel axis
theorem.
4.7 Calculate radius of gyration of standard sections.
4.8 Compute Polar Moment of Inertia for solid and hollow
circular Section by applying perpendicular axes theorem.
5.0. Simple Stresses and Strains
1. Stress
2. Strain
3. Modulus of Elasticity
4. Longitudinal Strain
5. Lateral Strain
6. Poisson’s ratio
7. Modulus of rigidity
8. Bulk Modulus
9. working stress,
10. Factor of safety
11. Resilience
12. Strain Energy
13. Proof resilience
14. Modulus of Resilience
5.2 Distinguish between different kinds of stresses and strains
5.3 Draw the stress-strain curve for ductile materials (Mild
steel) and hence explain the salient points on the curve.
5.4 State Hooke’s law and limits of proportionality, State the
factors affecting factor of safety
5.5 Solve problems on relationship between simple stress and
simple strain under axial loading on uniform bars and stepped
bars.
5.6 State the relationship among the elastic constants, Solve
problems on relationship between elastic constants.
5.7 Calculate stresses in simple and composite members
under axial loading
5.8 Define temperature stress, strain, hoops stress, Explain
the concept of temperature stresses in composite sections.
5.9 Calculate instantaneous stress and strain Energy due
todynamic loads and impact loading.
5.10 List and explain mechanical properties of materials
6.0 Shear force and Bending moment
6.1 Define
a) Cantilever beam
b) Simply supported beam
c) Fixed beam
d) Continuous beam
e) Overhanging beam
Define
a) Point Load
b) Uniformly Distributed Load
Describe
a) Roller support
b) Hinged support
c) Fixed support
6.2 Calculate reactions at rollers/hinged and fixed supports for
1. Simply Supported beams,
2. Cantilever beams and
3. Overhanging beams.
6.3 Explain a) Shear Force and b) Bending Moment
6.4 Explain sign conventions used for drawing 1. Shear Force
and2. Bending Moment
6.5 Deduce the relationship among the rate of loading,
shear force and bending moment
6.6 Determine Shear Force and Bending Moments on
Cantilever and Simply Supported beams for simple
casesof loading (Point Load, Uniformly Distributed Load)
analytically
6.7 Describe the procedures for sketc.hing the Shear Force
Diagrams (SFD) and Bending Moment Diagrams (BMD)
6.8 Sketc.h Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and
Bending Moment
Diagrams (BMD) for Cantilever and Simply Supported
Beams
6.9 Define point of contra flexure
6.10 Determine the Shear Force, Bending Moment and point
of contraflexure for overhanging beams and sketc.h Shear
Force Diagrams (SFD) and Bending Moment Diagrams (BMD)
for overhanging beams
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction
Mechanics-Engineering Mechanics-Applications and branches of Engineering
Mechanics - Statics, Dynamics, Kinetics and Kinematics - Systems of
measurements and Units - S.I and M.K.S units of physical quantities used in
Civil Engineering
2. Forces & Moments
Definition of force - Vectors and Scalars - Vector representation of a force -
systems of forces - Co-planar forces - Resultant of forces at a point –
Parallelogram Law and Triangle Law of forces – Lami’s theorem – Polygon law
of forces – Resolution of forces- Parallel forces – like and unlike forces –
moment of a force - units and sense-couple-moment of a couple –
properties of a couple - Conditions of equilibrium of a rigid body subjected to a
number of co-planar forces - Structural members supporting co-planar forces -
Types of supports- Types of beams - Types of loading- Determination of
support reactions for simply supported beams with point loads and
Uniformly distributed loading.
3. Centroid
Definitions – Centroid - Centre of gravity - Position of Centroid of standard
figures like rectangle, triangle, parallelogram circle, semi-circle and trapezium -
Determination of location of Centroid of standard sections - T, L, I, Channel
section, Z section and built-up sections consisting of RSJs and flange plates
and plane figures having hollow portion.
4. Moment of Inertia
Definition of Moment of Inertia - Perpendicular and parallel axes theorems –
Moment of Inertia of standard sections like rectangle, triangle, circle and
hallow
circular sections - Moment of Inertia of built-up sections- T, L, I, Channel
section and Z sections using parallel axis theorem - Moment of Inertia and
radius of gyration of built-up sections consisting of the combinations of RSJ’s
flange plates, channels & flange plates etc. - Polar Moment of Inertia of solid
and hallow circular sections using Perpendicular axis theorem
5. Simple Stresses and Strains

Stress and strain – type of stresses and strains - Stress strain curves for
ductile materials- mild steel, elastic limit, limit of proportionality, yield point,
ultimate stress; breaking stress; working stress, factor of safety – Factors
affecting factor of safety - Hooke’s law – Young’s modulus – deformation
under axial load - Shear stress and Shear Strain – Modulus of rigidity -
Longitudinal and lateral strain - Poisson’s ratio - Bulk Modulus –
relationship between elastic constants (Proof not required, only problems) -
Composite sections – Effect of axial loads - Temperature stresses – strains
– Hoop stress
- Temperature stresses in composite sections - Resilience – strain energy-
proof resilience and modulus of resilience – maximum instantaneous stress
due to gradual, sudden and shock loading - Mechanical properties of
materials-elasticity, plasticity, ductility, brittleness, malleability, stiffness,
hardness, toughness, creep, fatigue, examples of materials which exhibit the
above properties.
6.0 Shear force and bending Moment

Beams – Types of beams – Cantilevers – Simply supported – Overhanging
– Fixed and continuous -Types of supports – Roller – Hinged – Fixed
- explanation of S.F and B.M. at a section- Relation between rate of loading
SF and BM - Calculation of S.F. and B.M values at different sections for
cantilevers Simply supported beams - overhanging beams under point loads
and uniformly distributed loads, position and significance of points of contra
flexure - Drawing S.F. and B.M diagrams by analytical methods – location
ofpoints of contra flexure.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Mechanics,N. H. Dubey, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Engineering Mechanics,R.S. Kurmi,S.Chand and Company Limited
3. Engineering Mechanics,R.K.Singal,M.Singal, R.SingalI.K.International
4. Engineering Mechanics-Statics,P.Dayaratnam, Tata McGraw Hill
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Wei Marks wise Question wise
gh- Distribution of Distribution of
Link
No. of tag Weightage Weightage
S. ed
Chapter Title period e
No with
s Allo
R U Ap An R U Ap An CO
cate
d
1. Introduction 4 03 03 -- -- -- 1 - - -- CO1
Forces &
2. 18 14 03 03 08 -- 1 1 1 -- CO1
Moments
3. Centroid 18 11 03 -- 08 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO2
Moment of
4. 30 11 03 -- 08 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO2
Inertia
Simple Stresses
5. 40 17 03 06 08 -- 1 2 1 -- CO3
and Strains
Shear force and
6 Bending 40 14 03 03 08 --- 1 1 1 -- CO4
moment
Higher order
question from any CO3
-- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1
or combination of &C
5 & 6 Chapters O4
Total 150 80 18 12 40 10 6 4 5 1
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I,Unit Test-
II& Unit Test -III
Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit Test-II From 4.1 to 5.5
Unit Test – From 5.6 to 6.10

III
SURVEYING-I
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code Periods per Periods Formative Summative
Week Assessment Assessment
C-106 SURVEYING-I 03 90 20 80
S. No. Major Topics No. of COs Mapped

Periods
1. Introduction to Surveying 5 CO1

2. Chain Surveying 21 CO2
3. Compass Surveying 21 CO3
4. Levelling 40 CO4
5. Minor Instruments 03 CO5
Total 90
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Acquire basic knowledge about principles of surveying for

location, design and construction of engineering projects.
Course
Objectives (ii) Develop skills in using basic surveying instruments like measuring
chains, tapes, compass, levels & minor instruments
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C-106.1 State the fundamental principles of Surveying.

Explain the principle of chain surveying and perform the
operations involved in chaining on flat and sloping grounds
CO2 C-106.2
and when high ground intervenes, Practice chain
triangulation/traversing for location survey.
Describe the operations involved in field compass
CO3 C-106.3 surveying like taking bearings and calculation of included
Course
angles & traversing.
Outcomes
Explain the fundamental principles of levelling, tabulate the
levelling field data, explain computation of reduced levels,
CO4 C-106.4
different types of levelling, errors involved in levelling and
contours.
List the various minor instruments used in surveying
CO5 C-106.5
andtheir uses.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1. 0 Introduction to surveying
Outcomes 1.1 State the concept of surveying.
1.2 State the purpose of surveying.
1.3 Distinguish between 1. Plane and 2. Geodetic
surveying.
1.4 State the units of linear and angular measurements in
Surveying
and conversions.
1.5 List the instruments used for taking linear
andangular
measurements.
1.6 Classify different types of surveys.
1.7 State the fundamental principles of surveying.
1.8 State and explain different stages of survey operations.
2.0 Chain Surveying

2.1 State the purpose and principle of Chain surveying and
explain the principles used in Chain triangulation.
2.2 List different instruments used in Chain Surveying and
explain their functions.
2.3 List the six points to be followed while selecting the survey
stations
2.4 Define ranging and explain methods of ranging a line.
2.5 List the all operations involved in chaining on 1. Flat
ground 2. Sloping ground and 3. When high ground
intervenes.
2.6 Describe in detail the method of setting out right angles,
explain Field work procedure in Chain survey and Method
of recording field observations
2.7 List the errors and mistakes in Chain surveying and apply
the corrections for measurement due to incorrect length
of chain
2.8 Explain the methods of overcoming different obstacles in
chain surveying.
2.9 Explain the methods of preparing site plans by Chain
Surveying.
2.10 Calculate the areas of irregular boundaries using
Average Ordinate rule, Trapezoidal rule and
Simpson’srule.
3.0 Compass Surveying
3.1 State the purpose and principles of Compass surveying.
3.2 Identify the parts of Prismatic Compass and state their
functions
3.3 Define -Whole Circle Bearing, Quadrantal Bearing, True
meridian,
Magnetic meridian, True bearing, Magnetic bearing,
Dip,Declination and Local attraction.
3.4 Convert Whole Circle Bearing in to Quadrantal
Bearingand vice versa.
3.5 Explain local attraction and its effects.
3.6 Compute the included angles of lines in a Compass
traverse and the true bearings of lines in a
Compasstraverse.
3.7 Explain the operations involved in field in compass
Surveying.
3.8 Explain methods of recording field notes and
plottingCompass Surveying.
3.9 Explain the method of plotting closed traverse adjusting
closing error by Bowditch rule.
3.10 Explain errors in Compass surveying.
4.0 Levelling
4.1 Define levelling and List the types of levelling
instruments, Define the terms -Datum or Datum plane,
Reduced level, Level surface, Horizontal surface, Vertical
Line and Station, Mean sea level, Bench Mark
4.2 List the component parts of a dumpy level and their
functions, explain the steps involved in temporary
adjustments of a dumpy level, Define Back sight, Fore
sight, Intermediate sight, Change Point.
4.3 List different types of levelling staves, tabulate the levelling
field data, state methods of reducing levels, compare
height of instrument and Rise and fall methods, Compute
reduced levels by height of instrument and Rise and fall
methods, and apply check.
4.4 List the different types of Levelling, Describe in detail
Profile levelling and Reciprocal levelling
4.5 State the Errors in levelling and the Precautions to be
taken to prevent errors in levelling, Explain the effect of
Errors due to Curvature and Refraction, Compute the
error due to Curvature, Refraction and Combined error and
apply correction to be applied for the above errors
4.6 List the errors eliminated in reciprocal levelling, Derive the
formula for true difference in elevation and true error
between two points, Calculate true difference in elevation
and collimation error in reciprocal levelling
4.7 List the fundamental lines of dumpy level and state the
relationship among fundamental lines of dumpy level
4.8 Explain permanent adjustments of a dumpy level (Two
peg method
without problems)
4.9 Define Contour, Contour interval and Horizontal
equivalent, List the Characteristics and uses of contours,
explain different methods of contouring and interpolation
of contours
4.10 Explain the method of tracing contour gradient / alignment
of hill road
5.0 Minor Instruments
5.1 Explain the need for using Minor instruments
5.2 List various minor instruments used in surveying
5.3 Explain the uses of the following minor instruments:
1. Abney Level, 2. Pentagraph and 3.
Electronic Planimeter
COURSE CONTENT:
1.0 Classification and Principles of Surveying

Definition-Concept of Surveying-purpose of Surveying-Divisions of surveying-
Classification of Surveying based on different criteria– Fundamental principles
in Surveying -Measurements- Units and conversions-Instruments used for
taking linear and angular measurements- Stages of survey operations-Field
work, Office work, Care and adjustments of the instruments.
2.0 Chain Surveying

Purpose and Principle of Chain Surveying -Suitability of Chain Surveying-
Survey stations and their selection-Survey lines and offsets – Instruments
used in Chain survey and their function - Ranging a survey line- direct ranging
and Indirect ranging –Chaining a line –Duties of leader and follower- Chaining
on a sloping ground-Errors and mistakes in ordinary chaining -Correction due
to incorrect length of Chain- problems -Different operations in Chain
Surveying- Setting out right angles with cross staff and Optical square- Cross
staff survey Field work procedure- Recording field notes – field book -
Conventional signs - Obstacles in chain survey -methods to overcome
obstacles-Problems Calculations of area – different methods –Average
ordinate, Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules.
Introduction, Purpose, principle and uses of compass Survey-Traverse-Open
and Closed Traverse –Theory of magnetism-Description working and use of
Prismatic compass-Operations in using Compass before taking readings -
Concept of Meridian-Types of meridians-Bearing and angle- Designation of
bearings- Whole Circle Bearing. Quadrantal Bearing Conversions-Field work
in Compass Survey –field notes-traverse using prismatic compass -Local
attraction-detection and correction, Dip and Magnetic declination- Variation of
Magnetic declination -calculation of true bearings-Determination of included
angles from the given bearings and vice versa in compass traverse - Plotting
of closed traverse-closing error and adjustments by Bowditch graphical
method - Precautions in using a Compass-Errors in Compass Surveying.
4.0 Levelling
Levelling – Types of levelling instruments – component parts of a dumpy
level and their functions – Definitions of important terms used in Levelling
– level surface, level line, plumb line, horizontal line, axis of telescope,
line of collimation, back sight, fore sight, intermediate sight, station and
change point
– Temporary adjustments of a dumpy level – types of Levelling Staves - Bench
marks – different types of bench marks - Booking of readings in field book
– Determination of Reduced levels by height of instrument and Rise and
Fall methods – Comparison of methods – Problems-Missing Entry -
Calculations- Problems - Classification of Levelling – detailed description of
profile levelling and reciprocal levelling – Problems on Reciprocal levelling -
Errors due to curvature and refraction and combined correction – problems
- Contouring – contour, contour interval and horizontal equivalent –
Characteristics of contours – methods of contouring – Block contouring –
Radial contouring – interpolation of contours – uses of Contour maps –
tracing of contour gradient or alignment of a hill road – Marking alignment of
roads, railways and canals - Fundamental lines of dumpy level and their
relations – Permanent adjustments of a dumpy level (Two peg method
without problems)
5.0 Minor instruments
Purpose of Minor instruments- Various minor instruments- Uses of Abney
Level, Pentagraph and Electronic Planimeter.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1) Surveying - I &II,Dr.B.C. Punmia,Lakshmi Publications Pvt Ltd
2) Surveying-I &II,Dr.K.R.Arora,Standard Book House
3) Surveying and levelling - I & II,T.P Kanetkar & S.V.Kulakarni,Pune
VidhyardhiGrihaPrakasan`
4) Text book of surveying, Dr.C.Venktramaiah,Universities Press
5) Surveying& Levelling,N.N.Basak,TMH
MODEL BLUE PRINT
S. Chapter Peri Weightag Marks wise Periods wise CO’S
No name ods e of distribution of distribution of MAPPE
allo Marks weightage weightage D
cate
allotted R U Ap A R U A An
d
n p
1 Introducti CO1
on to 5 11 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
surveying
2 Chain C02
21 17 3 3 16 0 1 1 2 0
Surveying
3 Compass CO3
21 25 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Surveying
4 CO4
Levelling 40 14 6 6 16 0 2 2 2 0
5 Minor CO5
Instrumen 03 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
ts
NOTE: HIGHER CO2,

ORDER QUESTION CO3,
FROM ANY OR 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 CO4
COMBINATION
UNITS 2,3,4
TOTAL 80 18 12 40 10 6 4 5 1
R-rememberU-Understanding Ap-Application An-Analysing
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I,Unit Test-II &
Unit Test -III

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered
Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.10
Unit Test – II From 3.1 to 4.3
Unit Test – III From 4.4 to 5.3

ENGINEERING DRAWING
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code Periods per Periods Formative Summative
ENGINEERING
C-107 06 180 40 60
DRAWING
COs
S.No Major Topics Periods
Mapped
1 Importance of Engineering Drawing 01 CO1
2 Engineering Drawing Instruments 05 CO1
3 Free hand lettering & Numbering 06 CO1
4 Dimensioning Practice 09 CO1
5 Geometrical constructions 21 CO2
6 Projections of points, Lines, Planes & Solids 21 CO3
7 Auxiliary views 6 CO3
8 Sections of Solids 27 CO3
9 Orthographic Projections 33 CO3
10 Isometric Views 30 CO4
11 Development of surfaces 21 CO5
Total 180
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

Course understand the basic graphic skills and use them in preparation of
Objectives engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments

C-
CO1 and Familiarise with the conventions to be followed in
107.1
engineering drawing as per BIS
C- Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii)

CO2
107.2 engineering curves
Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of i)

Course C-
CO3 Points ii) Lines iii) Regular Planes iv) Regular
Outcomes 107.3
Solids V) Sections of Regular Solids.
C- Visualise and draw the isometric views of objects.

CO4
107.4
C- Draw the developments of surfaces of regular solids

CO5
107.5 and thereby the components used in daily applications
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing

Outcomes 1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering
communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for
Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing
andother subjects of Mechanical Engineering
2.0 Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
2.1 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines /
curves
2.2 Use correct grade of pencil to draw different types of lines
and for different purposes
2.3 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.4 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S.
andStandard Lay- outs.
2.5 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.6 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean
andtidy. Drawing Plate 1: (Having two exercises)
3.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
3.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm,
10mm and 14mm height
3.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm,
10mm and 14mm height
3.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and
applications Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)
4.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
4.2 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and
methods of dimensioning in engineering drawing as per
theB.I.S.
4.3 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations
anddesired system of dimensioning.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 08 to10 exercises)
5.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
5.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like
i) dividing a line into equal parts
ii) exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles iii)
tangent arcs to two given lines and arcs
5.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when
iii) side length is given ii) inscribing circle radius is
given describing circle radius is given
2.2 Draw the conics using general and special methods,
2.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid iii)
helix
5.4 Identify the applications of the above constructions
inengineering practice.
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of
polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involutes,
cycloid and helix
6.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines, planes
&auxiliary planes
6.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
6.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect
toreference planes (HP&VP)
6.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with
respect to two reference Planes (up to lines parallel to one
plane and inclined to other plane)
6.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to
planesperpendicular to one plane and inclined to other
plane)
6.5 Identify the need of Auxiliary views for a given
engineering drawing.
6.5 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points
and Lines (15 exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6
exercises)
Drawing Plate -9: Having problems on auxiliary planes (Having
4 exercises)
7.0 Draw the Projections of Solids
7.1 Visualise and draw the projections of solids (up to axis
ofsolids parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
Drawing plate No.10: Having problems of projection of
solids (10 exercises)
8.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
8.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
8.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape
ofsection
8.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular
solidsby applying the principles of hatching.
Drawing Plate–11: Having problems of section of solids (6
exercises)
9.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection
9.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial
drawing.
9.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent
agiven object fully.
Drawing Plate 12: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
10.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
10.1 identify the need of pictorial drawings.
10.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
10.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic
drawings.
Drawing plate 13: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
11.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
11.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
11.2 Draw the development of simple engineering objects
(cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid) using parallel
line and radial line method.
11.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering
components like i) funnel ii) 900 elbow
Drawing plate No. 14: (Having 05 exercises)
2.0
Key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.No Major topic Key Competency
Importance of Engineering  Explain the linkages between

1. Engineering drawing and other subjects
Drawing
of study in Diploma course.
 Select the correct instruments to draw
2. Engineering Drawing Instruments
various entities in different orientation
 Write titles using sloping and vertical
3. Free hand lettering & Numbering lettering and numerals as per B.I.S
(Bureau of Indian standards)
 Dimension a given drawing using
4. Dimensioning Practice standard notations and desired system
of dimensioning
 Construct ellipse, parabola, rectangular
5. Geometrical construction hyperbola, involute, cycloid and helix
from the given data.
Projection of points, Lines, Planes  Draw the projections of points, straight

6. lines, planes & solids with respect to
& Solids reference planes (HP& VP)
 Draw the auxiliary views of a given
Engineering component
7. Auxiliary views
 Differentiate between Auxiliary view and
apparent view
 Differentiate between true shape and
apparent shape of section
8. Sections of Solids
 Apply principles of hatching.
 Draw simple sections of regular solids
 Draw the minimum number of views
9. Orthographic Projection needed to represent a given object fully.
 Differentiate between isometric scale

10. Pictorial Drawings and true scale.
 Draw the isometric views of given
objects.
 Prepare development of Surface of
11. Development of surfaces regular solids and other components
like i) funnel ii) 900 elbow
COURSE CONTENT
NOTES: 1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice
Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing
Its importance as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per
standards – SP-46 –1988 – Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -
engineering education – Link between Engineering drawing and other
subjects of study.
2.0 Engineering drawing Instruments
Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved
lines, tools for measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter &
drafting machine – Mentioning of names under each classification and their
brief description -Scales: Recommended scales reduced & enlarged -Lines:
Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes:
A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3
sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of
Drawing Sheet, Drawing plate: Lay out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a
suitable scale - Simple Exercises on the use of Drawing Instruments.
Importance of Title Block.
3.0 Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering -
Practicing of letters &numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm) -
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering
stencils
4.0 Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape
description of an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size
description -Location of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -
Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader line,
arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above
tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system ( SP-46-
1988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard,
features “Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of
narrow spaces.
5.0 Geometric Construction

Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts -
Construction of tangent lines: to draw interior and exterior tangents to two
circles of given radii and centre distance -Construction of tangent arcs: -i) To
draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle
(acute, right and obtuse angles)-ii)Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle
or an arc and a given line-iii)Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given
circles internally and externally -Construction of polygon: construction of any
regular polygon by general method for given side length, inscribing circle
radius and describing/superscribing circle radius - Conics: Explanation of
Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a loci of a
moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their Engg. Applications viz.,
Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a Hyperbolic process - Construction of
any conic section of given eccentricity by general method -Construction of
ellipse by concentric circles method, Oblong Method and Arcs of circles
method -Construction of parabola by rectangle method and Tangent method -
Construction of rectangular hyperbola - General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and
Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point -their engineering application,
viz., Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc.. –their construction
6.0 Projection of points, lines and planes & solids
Classification of projections, Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection,
Reference Planes, Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences
between first angle and third angle projections -Projections of points in
different quadrants -Projections of straight line –(a)Parallel to both the planes
(b)Perpendicular to one of the planes (c)Inclined to one plane and parallel to
other planes - Projections of regular planes - (a) Plane parallel to one of the
reference planes - (b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice
versa - Projections of regular solids - (a) Axis perpendicular to one of the
planes (b)Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
7.0 Auxiliary views
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of
drawing an auxiliary views explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -
Partial auxiliary view.
8.0 Sections of Solids
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching
–Section of regular solids inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane
9.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model –
Number of views obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketc.hes of
only 3 views for describing object -Concept of front view, top view, and side
view sketc.hing these views for a number of engg objects - Explanation of first
angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle projection -
Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an
object – Use of miter line in drawing a third view when other two views are
given -Method of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of
views to describe an object fully.
10.0 Pictorial Drawings
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique,
and Perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle
between them, meaning of visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an
isometric scale, difference between Isometric scale, and ordinary scale
difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection - Isometric
and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features like
rectangles, circular - shapes, non-isometric lines – Use of box and
offset methods.
11.0 Development of Surfaces

Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work-
Concept of true length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection
when the line is (i) parallel to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one
principal and parallel to the other -Development of simple solids like cubes,
prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid and truncation of these solids-Types of
development: Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of drawing
development of funnels, 900 elbow pipes.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Drawing,N.D.Bhatt, Charotar Publications
:
2. Engineering Graphics ,P I Varghese, McGraw-hill
3. Engineering Drawing,Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal,McGraw-hill
4. SP-46-1998, Bureau of Indian Standards.
MODEL BLUE PRINT
S. Major No. of Weightag Marks wise Question CO’s
N Topic period e of Distribution of wise Mappe
o s s marks Weightage Distribution d
of Weightage
A A A A
R U R U
p n p n
Importance
of CO1
1 01 -
Engineering
Drawing
Engineering
2 Drawing 05 - CO1
Instruments
Free hand
3 lettering & 06 5 5 1 CO1
Numbering
Dimensionin CO1
4 09 5 5 1
g Practice
Geometrical CO2
5 21 15 5 10 1 1
construction
Projections
of points,
6 Lines, 21 10 10 1 CO3
Planes &
Solids
Auxiliary CO3
7 6 5 5 1
views
Sections of CO3
8 27 10 10 1
Solids
Orthographi CO3
9 33 10 10 1
c Projections
Isometric CO4
10 30 10 10 1
Views
Developmen CO5
11 21 10 10 1
t of surfaces
2
Total 180 80 60 4 6
0
Note : Students have to write four out of six 10 marks questions.

SURVEYING-I PRACTICE & PLOTTING
No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Periods Total No. Formative Summative
Course Title
Code per of Periods Assessment Assessment
Week
40 (30 for class
SURVEYING-I
exercises +10
PRACTICE &
for Survey
C-108 PLOTTING 06 180 60
camp)
S. Major Topics No. of COs MAPPED

No. Periods
1. Chain surveying 42 CO1
2. Compass Surveying 42 CO2
3. Levelling 60 CO3
4. Plotting 36 CO1, CO2,
CO3
Total 180
5 A Survey camp, immediately after 6 days
completion of all exercises, shall be (Additional
conducted for 3 days during 8 AM to 12 instructional
noon & 2PM to 4 PM on each day duration &
followed by one day break and 2 days of NOT to be
plotting from 9AM to 5 PM, with one hour included in the
lunch break. (25% of total sessional marks above 180 CO1,CO2,CO3
shall be allocated to this activity. The skills periods)
learnt during class exercises shall be
demonstrated in a simulated field like
situation and shall be assessed
appropriately)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Enhance knowledge about surveying instruments & methods
(i) adopted to carry out Field Survey with a professional
Course
approach.
Objectives
(ii) Develop skills in using chain, tape, compass & Dumpy level
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Course CO1 C-108.1 Apply standard Practices to perform chain survey in the
Outcomes field and to plot from field data
CO2 C- 108.2 Apply Principles to Perform compass survey and plot
from field data
Conduct experiments on methods of levelling,
CO3 C- 108.3 Longitudinal and cross sectioning for the given alignment
and analyse the data by Block levelling (contours)
prepare the drawings.
Learning 1.0 Chain surveying
Outcomes 1.1. Practice unfolding and folding a chain.
1.2. Perform direct ranging on level ground and measure the distance
between two given stations and record the measurements in the
fieldbook.
1.3. Perform indirect ranging and measure the distance between two
given stations when a high ground intervenes to prevent
indivisibility of ends of line.
1.4. Set out a right angle to a given chain line by using chain only.
1.5. Set and measure offsets for a given chain line by 1. Perpendicular
offsets and 2. Oblique offsets.
1.6. Perform triangulation survey of a given area with chain and cross
staff and record all necessary details.
1.7. Calculate the area bounded by the given points by chain
triangulation and compare the result with the area calculated from
plotting.
1.8. Calculate the area bounded by the given points by chain and
Crossstaff compares the result with the area calculated from
plotting.
1.9. Carry out chain survey to overcome obstacles like pond, building
etc.and plot the Survey from field book measurements.
1.10. Carry out chain traversing to survey an area bounded by more
thanthree stations and plot the Survey from field book
measurements.
2.0 Compass Survey
2.1 Identify the parts of a prismatic Compass
2.2 Set up the compass at a station and carry out
temporaryadjustments.
2.3 Take bearings of two points from instrument station and
calculate the included
angle.
2.4 Perform an open traverse with Compass and Chain.
2.5 Perform a closed traverse with compass and chain.
2.7 Plot the closed traverse from field data and adjust for closing
error by Bowditch rule.
2.8 Determine the area bounded by the given points by the method of
Radiation.
2.9 Determine the distance between two accessible points
involving single setting of the instrument.
2.10 Determine the distance between two inaccessible
pointsinvolving setting of the instrument at two stations.
3.0 Levelling
3.1 Identify the component parts of a dumpy level / Auto level
andStudy different types of levelling staves
3.2 Perform temporary adjustments of a dumpy level / Auto level for
taking observations and Practice taking staff readings and recording
them in level field book.
3.3 Take staff readings for differential levelling and compute the
difference in elevation between two stations (take invert levels also)
3.4 Determine the true difference in elevation between two far off
stations by conducting reciprocal levelling
3.5 Determine the collimation error of a dumpy level by conducting
reciprocal levelling
3.6 Conduct profile levelling along a route and compute the RLs at
various stations
3.7 Conduct profile levelling by taking cross sections across a route and
compute the RLs at various stations
3.8 Conduct profile levelling along a route by taking readings along both
LS and CS and compute the RLs
3.9 Conduct block levelling for the given area
3.10 Locate the contour Points by direct (Radial) method in the field
4.0 PLOTTING
4.1 Understand the importance and relation between field work and
plotting.
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Chain Surveying

a) Practice unfolding and folding of a chain.
b) Ranging and chaining of lines on level ground and recording in field book
to measure the distance between two stations.
c) Chaining a line involving indirect ranging.
d) Setting and measuring the offsets-Perpendicular and Oblique offsets
e) Measurement of land areas –cross staff survey
f) Chain triangulation around the building covering a small area with other
details taking offsets and recording.
g) Chain triangulation involving a road with other details taking offsets and
recording.
h) Chain traversing to survey an area bounded by more than three stations.

a) Setting up the compass – observations of bearings
b) Calculation of included angles from the observed bearings
c) Traversing with prismatic compass and chain – open Traverse
– Recording.
d) Traversing with prismatic compass and chain- closed traverse - recording.
e) Plotting the closed traverse from field data and adjust for closing error by
Bowditch rule.
f) Determination of the area bounded by the given points by the method
ofradiation
g) Determination of the distance between two accessible points involving
single setting of the instrument
h) Determination of the distance between two inaccessible points involving
setting of the instrument at two stations.
3.0 Levelling
a) Study of dumpy level, levelling staves – performing Temporary
adjustmentsof level.
b) Taking staff readings of various stations – booking of readings in level
fieldbook.
c) Differential and Fly levelling – calculation of reducing levels by height
ofcollimation and Rise & Fall methods (inverted levels also)
d) Reciprocal levelling – True difference in elevation and collimation error.
e) Profile levelling along a route by taking readings along both LS and CS and
compute the RLs
f) Contouring – block levelling and locating contour points by Radial method
4.0 Plotting
a) Conventional signs in Surveying 2 Exercises
b) Plotting of perpendicular offsets 1 Exercise
c) Plotting of land surveys – Chain 3 Exercises
and cross-staff Surveying – Calculation of areas
d) Plotting of chain triangulation 2 Exercises
Surveying of small areas around Buildings.
e) Chain traversing to survey an area bounded by 2 Exercises
more than three stations
f) Plotting of closed traverse by 2 Exercises
Compass surveying – location of Details and
adjusting error by Bow ditch method. 2 Exercises
g) Plotting of open traverse by Compass
surveying and locating details 2 Exercises
h) Compass survey by method of radiation- 1 Exercise
calculation of area
i) Determination of the distance between 1 Exercise
two accessible points involving single
setting of the instrument
j) Determination of the distance between 2 Exercises
two inaccessible points involving setting
of the instrument at two stations.
k) Plotting of LS and CS 2 Exercises
l) Plotting of contours by Block levelling 2 Exercises
Total 24 Exercises
KEY competencies to be achieved by the student
S.NO. Experiment Title Key Competency

1 Field Exercises in Chain  Practice unfolding and folding a chain.
Surveying
Ex 1.1  Perform direct ranging on level ground
and measure the distance between
Ex 1.2 twogiven stations and record the
measurements in the field book.
Ex 1.3
 Perform indirect ranging and measure
the distance between two given stations
Ex 1.4
when a high ground intervenes to prevent
Ex 1.5 intervisibility of ends of line.
 Set out a right angle to a given chain

Ex 1.6 lineby using chain only.
Ex.1.7  Set and measure offsets for a given

chain line by 1. Perpendicular offsets
Ex.1.8 and 2. Oblique offsets.
Ex 1.9  Perform triangulation survey of a given

area with chain and cross staff and
Ex 1.10 record all necessary details.
 Calculate the area bounded by the given

points by chain triangulation and
compare the result with the area
calculated from plotting.
 Calculate the area bounded by the given

points by chain and Cross staff compare
the result with the area calculated from
plotting.
 Carry out chain survey to overcome

obstacles like pond, building etc. and
plotthe Survey from field book
measurements.
 Carry out chain traversing to survey an

area bounded by more than three
stations and plot the Survey from field
book measurements.
2 Field Exercises in Compass
Surveying  Identify the parts of a prismatic Compass
Ex 1.1
 Set up the compass at a station
Ex 1.2 andcarry out temporary
adjustments.
Ex 1.3  Take bearings of two points from
instrument station and calculate
Ex 1.4
theincluded angle.
Ex 1.5  Perform an open traverse with
Compassand Chain.
Ex 1.6
 Perform a closed traverse with
Ex.1.7 compassand chain.
 Plot the closed traverse from field data

and adjust for closing error by
Ex.1.8 Bowditchrule.
 Determine the area bounded by the given

points by the method of radiation.
Ex 1.9  Determine the distance between two
accessible points involving single setting
of the instrument.
 Determine the distance between two

inaccessible points involving setting of
the instrument at two stations.
4 Field Exercises in Levelling
Ex 1.1  Identify the component parts of a
dumpy level / Auto level and Study
Ex 1.2 different types of levelling staves
Ex 1.3  Perform temporary adjustments of a

dumpy level / Auto level for taking
Ex 1.4 observations and Practice taking staff
readings and recording them in level field
Ex 1.5 book
 Take staff readings for differential

Ex 1.6
levelling and compute the difference in
elevation between two stations (take
Ex.1.7
invert levels also)
Ex.1.8  Determine the true difference in
elevationbetween two far off stations by
Ex 1.9 conducting reciprocal levelling
Ex 1.10  Determine the collimation error of a

dumpy level by conducting
reciprocallevelling
 Conduct profile levelling along a route

and compute the RLs at various stations
 Conduct profile levelling by taking cross

sections across a route and compute
theRLs at various stations
 Conduct profile levelling along a route by

taking readings along both LS and CS
and compute the RLs
 Conduct block levelling for the given area
 Locate the contour Points by direct

(Radial) method in the field
PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE
(C-20 CURRIUCULUM COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)
Subject Subject Title Periods per week Total periods per

Code year
C-109 Physics Laboratory 03 45
TIMESCHEDULE
S.N Name of the Experiment No.of
o Periods
1. Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers 03
2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge 03
3. Verification of Parallelogram law of forces and Triangle law of 03
forces
4. Simple pendulum 03
5. Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method) 03
6. Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & 03
Combination) (Single
7. Refractive index of solid using traveling microscope 03
8. Boyle’s law verification 03
9. Meter bridge 03
10. Mapping of magnet lines of force and locate null points 03
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
11. Surface tension of liquid using traveling microscope 03
12. Coefficient of viscosity by capillary method 03
Revision 06
Test 03
Total 45
Objectives:

1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes and areas of a
cylinder and sphere and their comparison etc..
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate, cross
sectional areaof a wire and volumes of sphere and also their comparison
etc.
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum
5.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at
zero degree centigrade.
6.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using distant
object method, U-Vmethod, U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods
andtheir comparison.
7.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
8.0 Verify the Boyle’s law employing a Quill tube.
9.0 Determine the specific resistance of material of a wire using Meter Bridge.
10.0 Drawing magnetic lines of force under N-S and N-N methods and locate
null points.
11.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling Microscope (Demo)
Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method (Demo)
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the
Competencies Key competencies
Experiment
1. Hands on practice  Find the Least count  Read the scales
on Vernier Calipers  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate the
(03)  Read the scales requisite physical
 Calculate the physical quantities of given
quantities of given objects
object
2. Hands on practice  Find the Least count  Read the scales
on Screw gauge (03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate thickness
 Read the scales of given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of  Calculate cross section
glass place and cross of wire and other
section of wire and
quantities
other quantities
3. Verification of  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle
Parallelogram law of  Note the positions of at equilibrium
forces and Triangle law of threads on drawing point
forces (03) sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle parallelogra
at equilibrium m
point
 Construct triangle
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the ratios
 Compare the of force and length
measured diagonal
 Construct triangle
 Find the length of sides
 Compare the ratios
4. Simple pendulum (03)  Fix the simple pendulum  Find the time for
to the stand number of oscillations
 Adjust the length  Find the time period
of pendulum  Calculate the
 Find the time for number acceleration due to
of oscillations gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the
acceleration due to
gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
5. Velocity of sound in  Adjust the reservoir
air  Arrange the
level
–Resonance resonance
 Find the first and
method (03) apparatus
secondresonanting
 Adjust the reservoir
lengths
level forbooming sound
 Calculate
 Find the first and
velocity of sound
secondresonanting
at room
lengths
temperature
 Calculate velocity of
 Calculate
sound
velocity of sound
at 00 C
6. Focal length and  Fix the object distance  Calculate the
Focal power of convex  Find the Image focal length and
lens (Separate & distance power ofconvex
Combination) (03)  Calculate the focal lens
length and power of  Draw u-v and 1/u
convex lens and –1/vgraphs
combination of convex
lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u –
1/vgraphs
7. Refractive index of  Find the least  Read the scale
solidusing traveling count ofvernier on  Calculate the
microscope (03) microscope refractiveindex of
 Place the graph glass slab
paperbelow
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the
refractiveindex of
glass slab
8. Boyle’s law  Note the  Find the length of
verification atmospheric aircolumn
(03)  Find the
pressure
 Fix the quill tube to pressure of
retortstand enclosed air
 Find the length of  Find the value P x l
aircolumn
 Find the
pressure of
enclosed air
 Find and compare
thecalculated
value P x l
9. Meter bridge (03)  Make the  Find the balancing
circuit length
connections  Calculate
 Find the balancing unknown
length resistance
 Calculate  Calculate the
unknown specificresistance
resistance
 Find the radius of wire
 Calculate the
specific
resistance
10. Mapping of magnet  Draw  Draw magnetic lines
linesof force (03) magnetic of
meridian force
 Placed the bar  Locate the
magnet in NN and
neutral points
NS directions
 Draw magnetic along equatorial and
lines offorce axial lines
 Locate the neutral
points along
equatorialand axial
lines
11. Surface tension of  Find the least  Read the scale
liquid using traveling count ofvernier on  Calculate height of
microscope (03) microscope liquidrise
 Focus the microscope  Calculate the
to thelower meniscus & surfacetension of
bent pin water
 Read the scale
 Calculate height of
liquidrise
 Calculate the
surfacetension of
water
12.. Coefficient of  Find the least  Find the pressure
viscosityby capillary count head
method (03) ofvernier  Calculate rate of
 Fix the capillary volumeof liquid
tube
collected
toaspiratory
bottle  Find the radius
 Find the mass ofcapillary
of tube
collectedwater  Calculate the
 Find the pressure head viscosity ofwater
 Calculate rate
ofvolume
ofliquid
collected
 Find the radius
ofcapillarytube
 Calculate the
viscosity
ofwater using
capillary
method
Scheme of Valuation for end Lab Practical Examination:

A. Writing Aim, Apparatus, Formula, Graph, Precautions carries 10
(Ten) Marks
B. For Drawing the table, taking Readings, Calculation work,
Drawing the graph, finding result carries 15 (Fifteen)
Marks
C. Viva Voice 05 (Five)
Marks
Total 30 (Thirty)
Marks
 Course outcomes
Experiments with Vernier calipers, Screw gauge,
CO1
Parallelogram law and
Triangle law
Experiments with Simple pendulum, Resonance apparatus
Cours CO2
(Velocity of
e Out sound in air)
comes Experiments with Convex lens, Refractive index of solid by
CO3
travelling
microscope
Experiments with quill tube (Boyles law verification), Meter
CO4
bridge,
Mapping of magnetic lines of force
CO5 Experiments with Surface tension and Viscosity
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(C-20 curriculum common to all
Branches)
Subject Total periods

Subject Title Periods per week
Code per year
Chemistry
C -110 03 45
Laboratory
CO1 Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of

standard solution
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable precipitation
CO5 Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations with
instrument for investigation of water pollution parameters
TIMESCHEDULE
S.N Name of the Experiment No.ofPerio Mappe
o ds d with
COs
1. a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions
used in the laboratory by senses. CO
03 1
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis
2. Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions of 03 CO1
3. Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3 solution 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std. HCl solution 03 CO2
5. Estimation of H2SO4usingStd.NaOH solution 03 CO2
6. Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using Std.KMnO4 03 CO3
7. Determination of acidity of water sample 03 CO2
8. Determination of alkalinity of water sample 03 CO2
9. Determination of total hardness of water using Std.EDTA 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample 03 CO4
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O )in water sample 03 CO5
12. Determination of pH using pH meter 03 CO
13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic 03 CO
14. Determination of turbidity of water 03 CO
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample 03 CO
Total: 45
Objectives:
1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric

flask, burettes) and gravimetric measurements (using different types of
balances), making dilutions, etc.. to identify the chemical compounds and
solutions by senses.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to
makesolutions of desired dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.
Na2CO3solutionfor estimation of HCl
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution
for estimation of NaOH
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. NaOH
solution for estimation of H2SO4
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO 4solution
for estimation of Mohr’s Salt.
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of
given samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and
rain water if available)
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of
given samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total
hardness of given samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap
water) using Std. EDTA solution
10.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides
present in the given samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and
one surface / tap water)
11.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine
Dissolved Oxygen (D.O) in given water samples (One sample from closed
container and one from open container / tap water)
12.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks,
sewage, etc..) to determine their pH using standard pH meter
13.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions
a) To determine conductivity
b) To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
14.0 Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non-coloured) to
determine their turbidity in NTU
15.0 To determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground
water and one surface / tap water)
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Familiarization of methods for
Volumetric analysis. -
Recognition of chemical --
substances and solutions
 Weighing the salt to the  Weighing the salt to the
accuracy of .01 mg accuracy of .01 mg
Preparation of Std Na2CO3  Measuring the water with  Measuring the water with
volumetric flask, measuring volumetric flask,
and making solutions of
jar, volumetric pipette and measuring jar, volumetric
different dilution (03) graduated pipette pipette and graduated
 Making appropriate pipette
dilutions  Making appropriate
 Cleaning the glassware and
Estimation of HCl solution
using Std. Na2CO3solution rinsing with appropriate
(03) solutions
Estimation of NaOH using  Making standard solutions
Std.HCl solution (03)
 Measuring accurately the
 Making standard
Estimation of H2SO4 using standard solutions and
Std.NaOH solution (03) solutions
titrants
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt  Measuring accurately the
using Std.KMnO4 (03)  Filling the burette with
standard solutions and
Determination of acidity of titrant
titrants
water sample (03)  Fixing the burette to the
 Effectively Controlling the
Determination of alkalinity of stand
water sample (03) flow of the titrant
 Effectively Controlling the
 Identifying the end point
Determination of total
flow of the titrant
hardness of water using Std.  Making accurate
EDTA solution (03)  Identifying the end point
observations
Estimation of Chlorides  Making accurate
present in water sample (03) observations
Estimation of Dissolved  Calculating the results

Oxygen (D.O) in water sample
(By titration method) (03)
 Familiarize with  Prepare standard
Determination of pH using pH instrument solutions / buffers,
meter (03)  Choose appropriate etc..
‘Mode’ / ‘Unit’  Standardize the
Determination of conductivity  Prepare standard instrument with
of water and adjusting ionic solutions / buffers, appropriate standard
strength to required level (03) etc.. solutions
 Standardize the  Plot the standard
instrument with curve
appropriate standard  Make measurements
Determination of turbidity of
solutions accurately
water (03)
 Plot the standard curve
 Make measurements
accurately
 Follow Safety
 Measuring the accurate  Measuring the
volume and weight of accurate volume and
sample weight of sample
 Filtering and air drying  Filtering and air drying
Estimation of total solids without losing any without losing any
present in water sample (03) filtrate filtrate
 Accurately weighing the  Accurately weighing
filter paper, crucible and the filter paper,
filtrate crucible and filtrate
 Drying the crucible in
SCHEME OF VALUATION
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus, principle and procedure 5M

B) Demonstrated competencies 20M
Making standard solutions
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant
Identifying the end point
Making accurate observations
C) Viva-voce 5M
Total 30M
Computer Fundamentals Lab
Course No. of Total No. Marks for Marks for

Course Title
code Periods/Weeks of periods FA SA
C-111
Computer
(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)
Time schedule:
No. of sessions
each of 3
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods
periods
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped
1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90
Course i) To know Hardware Basics
Objectives ii) To familiarize operating systems
iii) To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills
infuture
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.
At the end of the course students will be able to
CO1 C-110.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 C-110.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using

word processing software
Course CO3 C-110.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and
Outcomes to draw various graphs / charts.
CO4 C-110.4 Use Power point software to develop effective

presentation for a given theme or topic.
CO5 C-110.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop
Learning Outcomes:
I. Computer Hardware Basics
1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware
connectionsb).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c).To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT
23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop
33. To familiarize with standard toolbox
34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an
elegantlook.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.
Key competencies:
Expt Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies
No
1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to

Computer system Computer system: i). external hardware
and hardware CPU ii). Mother Board iii) and operate the
Monitor iv) CD/DVD Drive
connections computer
v) Power Switch vi) Start
Button vii) Reset Button
b. Identify and connect
various peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with
computer system
d. Identify various ports on
CPU and connect
Keyboard & Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the a. Login and logout
Computer correctly password as per the
b. Start and shut down the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key b. Operate mouse
Board &Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start a. Access
Desktop Menu, Taskbar, Icons application
and Shortcuts programs using
b. Access application Start menu
programs using Start b. Use taskbar and
menu, Task manager Task manager
c. Use Help support
2. To check the software a. Find the details of Access the
details of the Operating System being properties of
computer used computer and find
b. Find the details of the details
Service Pack installed
3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name a. Access device
present in your and clock speed manager and find
computer b. Find the details of the details
RAM and Hard disk
present b. Type /Navigate
c. Access Device the correct path
manager using Control and Select icon
Panel and check the
related to the
status of devices like
mouse and key board details required
d. Use My Computer to
check the details of Hard
drives and partitions
e. Use the Taskbar
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and a. Create files and
Folders organizing files in folders Rename ,
different folders arrange and
b. Use copy / paste search
move commands to for the required
organize files and folders folder/file
c. Arrange icons b. Restore deleted
Working with Files and – name wise, files from Recycle
Folders size, type, bin
Continued.... Modified
d. Search a file or
folder and find its path
e. Create shortcut to
files and folders (in other
folders) on Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use
of My Documents
g. Familiarize with the
use of Recycle Bin
5. To use Windows a. Familiarize with the a. Use windows
Accessories: use of Calculator accessories and
Calculator – Notepad b. Access Calculator select correct text
using Run command
–WordPad – MS editor based on
c. Create Text Files
Paint the situation.
using Notepad and
WordPad and observe
the difference in file size b. Use MS pain to
d. Use MS paint and create /Edit
create .jpeg, .bmp files pictures and save
using MS Paint in the required
format.
6. To familiarize with a. Create/Open a a. Create a
Ribbon layout of MS document Document and
word. – Home – b. Use Save and Save name
as features
Insert- page layout- appropriately and
c. Work on two Word
References-Review- documents save
View simultaneously b. Set paper size
d. Choose correct and print options
Paper size and Printing
options
7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board
Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage and mouse to
c. Use mouse (Left click enter/edit text in
/ Right click / Scroll)
the document.
d. Use Keyboard
shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and c. Use spell check/
Replace features in MS- Grammar features
word for auto
f. Use Undo and Redo corrections.
Features
g. Use spell check to
correct Spellings and
Grammar
8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text
techniques b. Formatting and paragraphs
Paragraphs and use various
c. Setting Tabs
text
d. Formatting Pages
e. The Styles of Word styles.
b. Use bullets and
f. Insert bullets and numbers to create
numbers lists
g. Themes and c. Use Templates
Templates /Themes
h. Insert page numbers,
d. Insert page
header and footer
numbers date,
headers and
footers
9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by a. Insert table in the
required number of adding the fields – word document
rows and columns Deleting rows and and edit
columns –inserting sub
table –marking borders. b. Use sort option
Merging and splitting of for arranging
cells in a Table data.
b. Changing the
background colour of the
table
c. Use table design
tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed
row/ column height/length
– Even distribution of
rows / columns features
e. Convert Text to table
and Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the
Table to arrange data in
ascending/descending
order
10. To Insert objects, a. Create a 2-page a. Insert hyperlinks

clipart and Hyperlinks document. &Insert &Bookmarks
hyperlinks and t
Bookmarks. b. Create
b. Create an organization
organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples
like preparing an
Examination schedule
notice with a hyperlink to
Exam schedule table.
11. To Use Mail merge a. Use mail merge to Use Mail merge
feature of MS Word prepare individually feature
addressed letters
b. Use mail merge to
print envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various Enter Mathematical
symbols features. symbols available in MS symbols and
Word Equations in the
b. Insert a symbol in the word document
text
c. Insert mathematical
equations in the
document
13. To Practice with MS- a.Open /create an MS a. Familiarize with
EXCEL Excel spreadsheet and excel layout and
familiarize with MS Excel use
2007 layout like MS office b. Use various
Button- features available
b.Use Quick Access in toolbar
Toolbar- Title Bar-
Ribbon-Worksheets-
Formula Bar-Status Bar
14. To access and Enter a. Move Around a a. Access and

data in the cells Worksheets-Quick select the
access -Select Cells required cells by
b. Enter Data-Edit a various
Cell-Wrap Text-Delete a addressing
Cell Entry-Save a File- methods
Close Excel b. Enter data and
edit
15. To edit spread sheet a. Insert and Delete Format the excel
Copy, Cut, Paste, and Columns and Rows- sheet
selecting cells Create Borders-Merge
and Center
b. Add Background
Color-Change the Font,
Font Size, and Font Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-
Work with Long Text-
Change a
Column's
Width
16. To use built in a. Perform Use built in
functions and Mathematical functions in Excel
Formatting Data Calculations verify -
AutoSum
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell
Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References Enter formula for
in Formulae automatic
c. Use Automatic
calculations
updating function of Excel
Formulae
d. Use Mathematical
Operators in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error
Message and Help
18. To Create Excel a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel
Functions, Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , sheets involving
Count and Count If cross references
Functions and equations
c. Fill Cells Automatically b. Use the
advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data a. Sort data in a. Refine the data
in table multiplecolumns in a worksheet
b. Sort data in a row and keep it
c. Sort data using Custom organized
order b. Narrow a
d. Filter data in work sheet worksheet by
selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel a. Produce an Excel Pie a. Use data in
Graphs and Charts Chart Excel sheet to
b. Produce Create technical
c. Excel Column Chart charts and
graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in
Excel
21. To develop lab reports Create Lab reports using a. Insert Practical
of respective discipline MS Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in
Footer
22. To format a Worksheet a. Shade alternate rows a. Format Excel
in Excel, page setup ofdata sheet
and print b. Add currency and b. Insert headers
percentage symbols &footers and
c. Change height of a row print
and width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and
Footers
f. Set Print Options and
Print
23. To familiarize with Use various options in Access required
Ribbon layout PowerPoint options in the tool
&features of a. Home bar
PowerPoint 2007.
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint PowerPoint PowerPoint
Presentation b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/Clip
c. PowerPoint Bullets Art and text
d. Add an Image to boxes
aPowerPoint b. Use bullets
Slide option
e. Add a Textbox to
aPowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master a. Create a PowerPoint a. Setup Master
Slide in PowerPoint Design Template slide and format
and add notes b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide
master view and Normal
view
d. Format a Design
Template Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a
Design Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a
PowerPoint Presentation
26. To Insert Text and a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
Objects b. Set Indents and line Objects
spacing Use 3d features
c. Insert pictures/ clipart
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word
art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart a. Create a Flow Chart in Create
/ Organizational Charts PowerPoint organizational
b. Group and Ungroup charts and flow
Shapes charts using smart
c. Use smart art art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table
Background
d. Format Series Legend
29. To insert a a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and
Charts/Graphs PowerPoint Bar graphs, Pie
b. Work with the Charts and format.
PowerPoint Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint
Chart Axis
d. Format the Bars of
aChart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie
Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart
Background
30. To Insert audio & a. Insert sounds in the slide a. Insert Sounds
video, Hyperlinks in a and hide the audio and Video in
slide symbol appropriate
Add narration to the b. Adjust the volume in the format.
slide settings b. Add narration to
c. Insert video file in the the slide
format supported by c. Use hyperlinks
PowerPoint in a slide to switch to
d. Use automatic and on different slides
click options and files
e. Add narration to the slide
f. Insert Hyperlinks
31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation
effects b. To explore and practice effects
special animation effects
like Entrance, Emphasis,
Motion Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
presentation grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide
d. Set up resolution show
e. Exercise with Rehearse c. Add timing to
Timings feature in the slides
PowerPoint d. Setup automatic
f. Use PowerPoint Pen slide show
Tool during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out
33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph
standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Colour& Swatches
Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The
Text Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool
34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit
b. Trim edges image by using
c. Change the shape and corresponding
size of a photo tools.
d. Remove the part of
photograph including
graphics and text
35 To insert Borders a. Start with a single Able to create a
around photograph background layer border or frame
b. Bring the background around an image to
forward add visual interest
c. Enlarge the canvas to a photo
d. Create a border colour
e. Send the border colour to
the back
f. Experiment with different
colours
36 To change a. open the foreground and Able to swap
Background of a background image background
Photograph b. Use different selection elements using the
tools to paint over the Select and Mask
image tool and layers.
c. Copy background
imageand paste it on
the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag
the background layer
below the foreground
image layer.
37 To change colours of a. Change colours using: Able to control
Photograph i) Colour Replacement colour saturation
tool
ii) Hue/Saturation
adjustment layer tool
38 To prepare a cover a. open a file with height Able to prepare
page for the book in 500 and width 400 for cover page for the
subject area thecover page. book
b. apply two different colours
to work area by dividing it
into two parts using
Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and
place it on work area→
resize it using free
transform tool.
d. Type text and apply
colour and style
e. Apply effects using
blended options
39 To adjust the a. opens a file. Able to control
brightness and b. Go to image→ brightness/contrast.
contrast of picture to adjustments→
give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast.
c. adjust the brightness and
contrast.
d. Save the image.
40 To type a word and a. open a file Able to apply
apply the shadow b. Select the text tool shadow emboss
emboss effects andtype text. effects
c. Select the typed text
goto layer→ layer
style→ blended
option→ drop shadow,
inner shadow, bevel
and emboss→
contour→ satin→
gradient overlay
d. Save the image.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests
Unit test-1 From 1 to 8

III SEMESTER
THIRD SEMESTER
Instruction
Periods/Week
Sub Name of Periods
End
Code the Subject Per Duration Sessional Total
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
C-301 Mathematics 4 60 3 20 80 100
–II
Mechanics
of Solids &
C-302 5 75 3 20 80 100
Theory of
Structures
C-303 Hydraulics 5 75 3 20 80 100
C-304 Surveying-II 4 60 3 20 80 100
Construction
C-305 4 60 3 20 80 100
Materials
Construction
C-306 4 60 3 20 80 100
Practice
PRACTICAL
Civil
C-307 Engineering - 6 90 3 40 60 100
Drawing-I
Surveying -
C-308 II Practice & - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Plotting
Material
C-309 Testing - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Practice
Hydraulics
C-310 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Practice
Total 26 16 630 280 720 1000
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
Code Periods/week of periods FA SA
Engineering
C-301 Mathematics- 4 60 20 80
II
1 Indefinite Integration 22 CO1
2 Definite Integration and its 24 CO2
applications
3 Differential Equations of first 14 CO3
order
Total Periods 60
Course (i) To understand the concepts of indefinite integrals and

definite integrals with applications to engineering problems.
Objectives (ii) To understand the formation of differential equations and
learn various methods of solving them.
CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.
Course CO2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
Outcomes CO3 Obtain differential equations and solve differential
equations of first order and first degree.
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.
L.O. 1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of
Integrals (u + v) dx and ku dx where k is constant and u, v
arefunctions of x.
1.3. Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the
above rules.
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by
the method of substitution.
i) f(ax + b) dx where f(x)dx is in standard form.
ii) [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii) f (x)/[f(x)] dx
iv) f {g(x)} g (x) dx
1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.
1.6. Evaluate the integrals of the form sinmxcosnxdx where m and n
aresuitable positive integers.
1.7. Evaluate integrals of suitable powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , , 2
2 2 a2 x x a2
a x
2
1 1 1
ii) ii) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii) ) x 2 a2 x2 a2 ,
, a2  x2
1.9. Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
d , d and d .
a bSin a b a cos b sin c
cos
1.10. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.11. Solve problems using integration by parts.
1.12 Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form u.vdx .
1.13. Eva luate the integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-II
C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
L.O. 2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3. Solve problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above
concept.
2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above
properties.
2.6. Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
2.7. Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between
twocurves using integration.
2.8. Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the functions
inany given interval.
2.9. Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.
2.10. Solve some problems using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule
forapproximation of integrals.
Unit -III
C.O. 3 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order
and first degree.
L.O. 3.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
3.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
3.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
3.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables
separable method.
3.5 Solve Homogeneous differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.6 Solve exact differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.7 Solve linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q, where P
and Q are functions of x or constants.
3.8 Solve Bernoulli’s differential equation reducible to linear form.
3.9 Solve simple problems arising in engineering applications.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration.
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard
functions. Properties of indefinite integrals. Integration by substitution or change
of variable. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x. Integrals of the form
sin m x.cosn x dx, where at least one of m and n is odd positive integers.
Integrals of suitable powers of tanx. secx and cosecx. cotx by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
1 1 1
i) , ,
2 2
a2 x 2 a x x a2
2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii) ) x 2 a2 x2 a2 ,
, a2  x2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic
functions.
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)]
dx.
Unit-II
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite
integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum.
Area under plane curves – Area enclosed between two curves. Mean and
RMS values of a function on a given interval Volumes of solids of revolution.
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a
define integral.
Unit -III
Differential Equations:
3. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation-
formation of differential equations-solutions of differential equations of first
order and first-degree using methods, variables separable, homogeneous,
exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for third semester diploma courses,
prepared & prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir
Publishers,Moscow.
BLUE PRINT
S. Chapter/Un No of Weigh Marks wise Questionwise COs
N it title Period tageall distribution of distributionof mappe
o s otted weightage weightage d
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I:
1 Indefinite 22 28 11 11 06 0 2 2 2 0 CO1
Integration
Unit – II:
Definite
Integration
2 24 33 11 03 11 08 2 1 2 1 CO2
and its
application
s
Unit – III:
Differential
3 Equations 14 19 03 03 03 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
of first
order
Total 60 80 25 17 20 18 5 4 5 2
Engineering Mathematics – II
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5
Unit Test-II FromL.O 2.6 to L.O 3.9

MECHANICS OF SOLIDS AND THEORY OF STRUCTURES
No. of
Total Marks for Marks for
Course Periods
Course Title No. of Formative Summative
Code per
Periods Assessment Assessment
Week
MECHANICS OF
C-302 SOLIDS AND THEORY 05 75 20 80
OF STRUCTURES
COs
S.No. Major Topics No. of Periods
Mapped
1. Theory of simple bending 15 CO1

2. Deflection of beams 15 CO2
3. Columns and Struts 10 CO3
4. Dams and Retaining walls 15 CO3
5. Statically indeterminate beams 10 CO4
6. Stresses in frames 10 CO5
TOTAL 75
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to
Understand the concepts of bending stresses, shear stresses

(i)
anddeflection induced in beams.
Course Understand the effect of loading on columns and their behaviour
Objectives under loading, stability of Dams and Retaining walls under the action
(ii)
of lateral loads, effects of Loading on statically determinate beams
and frames.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO C- Solve the problems pertaining to Bending equation and

1 302.1 Shear stress distribution across the depth of various cross
sections.
CO C- Compute the Slope & Deflection in beams using double
2 302.2 integration, Macaulay’s & Mohr’s Moment-Area methods.
Course
Outcomes CO C- Compute 1. The load carrying capacity of columns and 2.
3 302.3 Intensity of base pressure acting on dams and retaining
walls.
CO C- Explain the effects of Loading on propped cantilevers, fixed
4 302.4 and continuous beams and sketc.h Shear force and Bending
Moment diagram.
CO C- Calculate the forces in trusses using method of joints and
5 302.5 sections.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Theory of Simple Bending

Outcomes 1.1 Define simple / pure bending and explain the
processof simple bending
1.2 Define
a) Neutral layer
b) Neutral axis
c) Radius of curvature
1.3 List the assumptions made in the theory of simple
bending and derive the bending equation for
simplebending
1.4 Define
a) Bending Stress
b) Moment of Resistance
1.5 Explain and Sketc.h bending stress distribution
acrossthe depth of the beam for any cross section.
1.6 Define Modulus of section and Flexural rigidity and
derive the formula for section modulus of (solid and
hollow sections)
a) Square Section
b) Rectangular Section
c) Circular Section
1.7 Solve problems on theory of simple bending for
Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical sections to calculate
a) Moment of Resistance or
b) Load carried or
c) Dimensions of cross section.
1.8 State formula for calculation of Shear Stress in any
layer of a cross section (Derivation of formulae not
required) and Draw shear distribution across
a) Rectangular section
b) Solid circular section
c) I - section
d) T - section
1.9 Determine shear stress at any layer and draw shear
stress distribution diagram across
a) Rectangular section b) I – section
1.10 Determine the maximum shear stress in circular,
rectangular and square sections (Derivation of
formulae not required)
2.0 Deflection of Beams
2.1 Draw the deflected shapes of different types of
beams(like simply supported, cantilever, fixed and
overhanging beams) and Define -Elastic curve, slope
and Deflection
2.2 Distinguish between strength and stiffness of a beam.
2.2 Derive relation between slope, deflection and radius of
curvature
2.3 Derive the equations for maximum slope and
deflection by double integration method for:
a) Cantilever beams with point loads and uniformly
distributed loads
b) Simply supported beams with central point load or
uniformly distributed load throughout.
2.4 Calculate the maximum slope and deflection in
simplysupported and cantilever beams using the
above formulae
2.5 Explain Mecaulay’s method (for Simply supported
beams) to find the slope and deflections
2.6 Compute the maximum slope and deflection for
SimplySupported beam carrying point loads and
uniformly distributed loads by Mecaulay’s method
2.7 Explain the moment area method for slope and
deflection and Define Mohr’s theorem-I and Mohr’s
theorem-II
2.8 Derive formulae for maximum slope and deflection of
standard cases by moment area method.
2.9 Compute the maximum slope and deflections for
Cantilever and Simply Supported Beams by Mohr’s
theorem-I and Mohr’s theorem-II (moment area
method)
3.0 Columns and Struts
3.1 Define: i) Compression member ii) Axial Loading iii) List
different types of compression members iv) Define:
a) Buckling/Critical/Crippling Load b) Actual length
c) Least radius of gyration d) Safe load e) Factor of
safety
3.2 Calculate least radius of gyration for solid/hollowcircular,
square and rectangular sections.
3.3 List different end conditions used for a column,
3.4 Define i) Effective/equivalent length
ii) Slenderness ratio
3.5 List the effective lengths of columns for different end
conditions, Calculate the slenderness ratio for a given
column/strut and Classify columns based on
slenderness ratio or length and lateral dimensions,
Distinguish between Long and short columns.
3.6 State Euler’s formula for crippling load of a column/strut
(derivation not required) and derive an expression
showing limitations of Euler’s formula, solve problems on
limitations of Euler’s formula, calculate crippling and safe
loads on a column/strut with simple/built up section
using Euler’s formula.
3.7 Explain the validity of Rankine’s formula for short and
long columns using basic Rankine’s empirical formula,
Obtain Rankine’s formula for crippling load of a
column/strut from basic empirical formula, calculate
crippling or safe loads on a column/strut with
simple/builtup section using Rankine’s formula.
3.8 Calculate the ratio of strengths of hollow and solid
circular columns loaded under same conditions,
Designa hollow circular cross section of a column for
the givendata.
3.9 Obtain the expression for pressure distribution at the
base of a column, subjected to eccentric load about
oneaxis only and compute the pressure distribution at
the base of a column, subjected to an eccentric load
about one axis only
3.10 Define the core of a column, calculate core
for circular/square/Rectangular columns and draw
theshapes of core.
4 Dams and Retaining Walls
4.1 Define a dam/retaining wall; List the forces acting on a
dam/retaining wall.
4.2 Derive the formula for maximum and minimum stress
intensities at the base of a Trapezoidal dam with
vertical water face and sketc.h the stress distribution at
the baseof a dam/retaining wall for different conditions,
Calculatethe stress intensity at base of a
rectangular/Trapezoidal dam with or without free board.
4.3 List the conditions for stability of a dam/retaining wall,
define middle third rule, define minimum base width of a
dam/retaining wall, Derive the formula for minimum
basewidth of a dam with and without free board to avoid
tension at the base for the following sections 1.
Trapezoidal section 2. Rectangular section 3. Triangular
section and calculate the minimum base width based on
above formulae
4.4 Explain the procedure to find the stresses at the base
ofa dam with battered water face and calculate the
stresses at the base of a dam with battered water face,
Solve the problems on checking the stability of a dam
with vertical / inclined water face
4.5 Define: i) Angle of repose of soil
ii) Angle of Surcharge
iii) Active earth pressure
iv) Passive earth pressure
4.6 Compute the lateral earth pressure on a retaining wall
having soil face vertical with levelled earth,
surcharged earth and with levelled earth and UDL.
4.7 Calculate the stresses at the base of a retaining wall for
the above cases, the minimum base width of a retaining
wall with vertical soil face and levelled earth to avoid
tension and sliding at base, the stresses at the base of
aretaining wall with levelled earth and soil face inclined.
4.8 Check the stability of a retaining wall with soil face
vertical and having levelled/surcharged earth or with
soil face inclined and having levelled earth.
4.9 State Rankine’s formula for minimum depth of
foundation.
4.10 Calculate minimum depth of foundation for walls and
columns using Rankine’s formula.
5 Statically Indeterminate Beams
5.1 Differentiate between a statically determinate and
indeterminate structure, define degree of static
indeterminacy and Calculate degree of static
indeterminacy for Propped cantilever, Fixed beam
andTwo span continuous beam
5.2 Calculate prop reaction of propped cantilever subjected
to UDL throughout OR a single point load between fixed
and propped ends and Calculate SF and BM values
anddraw SFD and BMD for a propped cantilever with
abovetype of loading only, Calculate the location of
point of contra flexure in propped cantilever for above
loading.
5.3 State the merits and demerits of fixed beams and
derivethe conditions required for the analysis of fixed
beams by moment area method.
5.4 Derive the formulae for the fixed end moments due to
central point load or UDL throughout on a fixed beam
and Draw SFD and BMD for a fixed beam with above
type of loading only.
5.5 State the formulae for maximum deflection in a fixed
beam due to above loading and calculate the maximum
deflection in a fixed beam using above formulae.
5.6 State the merits and demerits of continuous beams and
state the equation based on theorem of three moments.
5.7 Calculate support moments and span moments for a
two-span continuous beam with simply supported or
over hanging ends only, subjected to central point load
or UDL throughout on each span, using theorem of
threemoments.
5.8 Calculate the support reactions for above type of
continuous beams and Draw SFD and BMD for two span
continuous beams, using theorem of three moments.
6 Stresses in Frames
6.1 Define a frame.
6.2 Classify the fames based on a) Number of members and
b) Number of joints.
6.3 Show the sign convention for different types of stresses
in members of a truss/frame.
6.4 Explain the rules for assuming the direction of stresses
in the members.
6.5 Explain the method of calculating stresses/forces in the
members of a truss/frame by the method of joints.
6.6 Calculate the forces in the members of a simply
supported or cantilever truss/frame subjected to DL & LL
at nodal points by the method of joints and prepare force
table.
6.7 Differentiate method of joints and method of sections.
6.8 Calculate the forces in the members of a simply
supported or cantilever truss / frame subjected to DL &
LL at nodal points by the method of sections and
prepare force table.
COURSE CONTENT:
1.0 Theory of simple bending.
Theory of simple bending – assumptions – Neutral axis – Bending

stress distribution – Moment of resistance – curvature of beams – Bending
equation – strength of beams – Rectangular, circular, and L sections practical
applications – simple problems- Shear stress in beams – Equation for shear
stress in a layer of a beam (Derivation of formula not required) – Shear Stress
distribution diagrams for various beam sections such as rectangular, solid
circular and I sections – Problems.
2.0 Deflection of Beams
Deflected shapes of beams with different support conditions – Strength and

stiffness of beams – Relation between curvature, slope and deflection -
Double integration method – Derivation of standard cases – Problems -
Macaulay’s method for slope and deflection – Simply supported beam under
concentrated and uniformly distributed loads – Problems -d) Mohr’s theorems
for slope and deflection – Cantilevers and simply supported beams with
symmetrical loading
– Problems.
3.0 Columns and struts
Short and long columns – Axial loading only – solid circular, Hollow circular,
Rectangle and I-section and built-up columns – different end conditions –
slenderness ratio – calculation of safe load on columns by Euler’s and Rankine’s
formula – Effective length, radius of gyration and slenderness ratio - limitation of
Euler’s formula – strength of columns – problems – stress distribution at the
base of column due to eccentric load about one axis-problems – core of a
column.
4.0 Dams and retaining walls
Introduction – rectangular dams – trapezoidal dams having water face

vertical and inclined – Conditions for the stability of a dam – conditions to
avoid tension in the masonry dam at its base, to prevent the over – turning
of the dam, the sliding of dam and to prevent the crushing of masonry at the
base of the dam – Minimum base width of a dam - Active and passive earth
pressure – Angle of internal friction – Angle of surcharge – calculation of
active earth pressure by Rankine’s formula with and without surcharge -
General conditions of stability of retaining walls – middle third rule –
Distribution of pressure on foundation of retaining walls – calculation of
minimum base width - Calculation of minimum depth of foundation by
Rankine’s formula.
5.0 Statically indeterminate beams
Statically determinate and indeterminate structures – definition – degree of static

indeterminacy - Cantilever beam with UDL on whole span and propped at free
end – cantilever beams with point load between fixed and propped ends –
Calculation of prop reaction – SFD and BMD -Fixed Beams: Introduction-
Sagging and hogging Bending moments – merits and demerits –
Determination of Fixed end moments by moment Area method – standard
cases – fixed beams subjected to symmetrical concentrated loads – Fixed
beams subjected to U.D.L throughout – sketc.hing B.M.D. and S.F.D –
problems (without sinking of props) – Max deflection formulae of fixed beams
subjected to central point load and U.D.L throughout (No derivation) – problems
-Continuous Beams: Merits and demerits
– Continuous beams – effect of continuous supports – support moments
– Clapeyron’s Theorem of three moments – equation (without derivation) –
continuous beams with central point load or U.D.L. throughout for each span
– problems on two span continuous beams with simply supported or over
hanging ends only – Reaction at supports in continuous beams – sketc.hing
S.F.D. and
B.M.D (Beam with varying moments of inertia, supports at different levels not
included)
6.0 Stresses in frames
Frames – Definition – classification based on number of members and number of

joints – Determination of forces in members of statically determinate pin
jointed frames – method of sections and method of joints – Application to
simple frames and trusses (simply supported and cantilever) under loads at
joints.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1) Strength of Materials, R.K. Rajput, S.Chand Publishers, New Delhi

2) Strength of Materials, S. Ramamurtham, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi
3) Strength of Materials, B.C.Punmia, Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi
4) Strength of Materials, R.S. Khurmi, S.Chand Publishers, New Delhi
5) Strength of Materials, R.K. Bansal, Lakshmi Publications, New Delhi
MODEL BLUE PRINT:

COs
Weighta Distribution of Distribution of
Major No. of Mapp
S. ge of Weightage Weightage
periods ed
N Topics marks A
o. R U Ap An R U Ap
n
Theory of
1. simple 15 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 -- CO1
bending
Deflection CO2
2. 15 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 --
of beams
Columns CO3
3. 10 11 3 -- 8 -- 1 -- 1 --
and Struts
Dams and CO3

4. Retaining 15 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 --
walls
Statically
5. indetermina 10 3 3 -- 1 1 -- CO4
te beams 17 8 1
Stresses in CO5
6. 10 3 -- -- 1 -- --
frames
Higher order question from CO3,

any or combination of 3,4,5 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1 CO4
chapters
TOTAL 80 18 12 40 10 6 4 5 1
R-Remember , U-Understand, Ap-Apply, An-Analyse
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I &
Unit Test-II
Unit Test – II From 4.1 to 6.9

HYDRAULICS
No. of
Total No. Marks for Marks for
Course Periods
Course Title of Formative Summative
Code per
Week
C-303 HYDRAULICS 05 75 20 80
S.No. Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped
1. Properties of Fluids 04 CO1
2 Fluid pressure and its measurements 09 CO1
3. Flow of Fluids 09 CO2
4. Flow through orifice and mouth pieces 10 CO3
5. Flow over notches and weirs 10 CO3
6. Flow through pipes 10 CO4
7. Flow through open channels 12 CO4
8. Pumps and Turbines 08 CO5
9. Hydroelectric power plants 03 CO5
Total 75
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
COURSE (i) Understand the properties of liquids, water pressure and its
OBJECTIVES measurement, principles of flow of water, flow through Orifice
and Mouth Pieces, Flow over notches & weirs, flow through
pipes, open channels.
(ii) Understand the working principles of pumps & turbines and
general lay-out of Hydro-electric Power Plants.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
COURSE C- Solve simple problems on properties of fluids and
OUTCOMES CO1 303.1 pressure measurements using various instruments.
C- Solve the problems using the equation of continuity and
CO2
303.2 energies of liquid in motion.
C- Determine coefficient of discharge of a small orifice,
CO3
303.3 mouth piece, Notches & Weirs and Venturi meter.
Solve the problems of the major and minor losses of
C-
CO4 head of water flowing through pipes and channels using
303.4
relevant formulae
C- Justify the suitability of various Pumps and Turbines for
CO5
303.5 the given conditions.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
LEARNING 1.0 Properties of Fluids
OUTCOMES 1.1 Explain the term fluid and give an example
1.2 Differentiate ideal and real fluids.
1.3 Distinguish between fluids & liquids.
1.4 Define the terms like - Mass density, Specific weight,
Specific gravity, Adhesion, Cohesion, Surface tension,
Capillarity, Compressibility, Viscosity and Vapour pressure.
1.5 State formulae of dynamic viscosity, capillarity, surface
tension of water drop and soap bubble.
2.0 Fluid pressure and its measurements
2.1 Define the terms: Atmospheric pressure, Gauge pressure
and Absolute pressure.
2.2 State the relation between the above three pressures.
2.3 Describe the following pressure measuring instruments:
Piezometers, U-tube manometers, Differential
manometersand Pressure gauges.
2.4 Compute the pressure of a flowing fluid given the readings
on Piezometers, simple manometers, differential and
inverted differential manometers.
2.5 Define Total Pressure and Centre of Pressure. State the
formulae for total pressure and centre of pressure on the
following surfaces immersed in a liquid at rest:
1. Horizontal plane,
2. Vertical plane and
3. Inclined plane
2.6 Calculate total pressure and centre of pressure for the
above plane surfaces for the given conditions.
2.7 Determine total pressure and centre of pressure for
hydraulic structure (like sluice gates, dams, lock gates).
3.0 Flow of fluids
3.1 State the different types of flow of liquids
3.2 Define:
i) Steady flow and Unsteady flow
ii) Uniform flow and non-uniform flow,
iii) Laminar flow and turbulent flow.
3.3 Distinguish between different types of flow of liquids.
3.4 Define discharge, State units of discharge
3.5 State one dimensional continuity equation.
3.6 Compute the discharge/velocity at a section of flowing
liquid in pipe for the given conditions.
3.7 Explain the following energies of liquid in motion
1. Datum head,
2. Pressure head and
3. Velocity head.
3.8 State Bernoulli’s theorem of total energy of a liquid in
motion. List the limitations of Bernoulli’s theorem. Compute
the pressure/velocity at a section of flowing liquid in pipe
for the given conditions using Bernoulli’s equation. List
three practical applications of Bernoulli’s theorem.
3.9 Describe the working principle of
1. Venturi meter
2. Orifice meter and
3. Pitot tube.
3.10 State the formulae to calculate the actual discharge
of flowing liquid through Venturi meter and Orifice meter.
Compute the actual discharge of flowing liquid through
Venturi meter and Orifice meter.
4.0 Flow through Orifice and Mouth pieces

4.1 Define orifice. List different types of orifices. Differentiate
large orifice and small orifice.
4.2 Define the terms: Vena-contracta, Cc, Cv, Cd and Cr
(Hydraulic coefficients). State the relation between above
coefficients.
4.3 State the formula for theoretical discharge through small
orifice
4.4 Calculate the discharge, Cc, Cv, Cd and Cr for given
conditions-Numerical Problems
4.5 Derive formula for discharge through Large Rectangular
Orifice. Calculate discharge through Large Rectangular
Orifice for given conditions-Numerical Problems.
4.6 State the equations with standard notations for discharge
through Fully submerged Orifice and Partially submerged
Orifice. Compute the discharge for the above two orifices
for the given conditions-Numerical problems.
4.7 State the formula for time of emptying of a prismatic
tank by an orifice. Compute the time of emptying of a
prismatic tank by an orifice.
4.8 Define mouth piece. Differentiate mouth piece and orifice.
Classify mouth pieces.
4.9 State the formulae for discharge for different types of
mouth pieces.
4.10 Calculate discharge through a mouth piece for given
data-Numerical Problems.
5.0 Flow over notches and weirs
5.1 Define a notch. List different types of notches.
5.2 State the formulae for the discharge through Rectangular
Notch, Triangular notch and Trapezoidal notches.
Calculate the discharge through the above notches from
the given data.
5.3 Define weir. List different types of weirs. State the formulae
for discharge over Sharp crested weir and Broad crested
weirs.
5.4 State the formulae for discharge over above weirs with
modifications for end contractions and velocity of
approach.
5.5 Determine the discharge over sharp crested and broad
crested weirs under given conditions – Numerical
Problems.
5.6 Write the formulae to determine the discharge for
rectangular weir -Francis, and 2. Bazin’s empirical formula
5.7 Determine the discharge over rectangular weir using
above two formulae for given data – Numerical Problems.
6.0 Flow through Pipes
6.1 List various losses that occur when water flow through
pipes.
6.2 Differentiate Major loss and Minor losses.
6.3 State formulae to compute loss of head due to friction
using Chezy, and Darcy.
6.4 Solve numerical problems in pipes based on the above
twoformulae for given data- Numerical problems.
6.5 State formulae for head loss due to various minor losses.
6.6 Compute the above minor losses of head for given data
–Numerical problems.
6.7 Define the terms: Hydraulic gradient line and Total energy
line.
6.8 Calculate the discharge through Parallel and Compound
(series) Pipes connected to reservoir for given data-
Numerical Problems.
6.9 Define the terms: Critical velocity and Reynold’s number.
6.10 State whether the flow is laminar or turbulent based
on Reynold’s number.
7.0 Flow through open channels
7.1 Define open channel flow. Differentiate open channel flow
and pipe flow.
7.2 Define the terms: Wetted perimeter and Hydraulic mean
depth.
7.3 State Chezy’s formula and Manning’s formula for uniform
flow through open channels.
7.4 List the Values of ‘C’ for different surfaces. State the
following formulae to evaluate ‘C’.
(i) Kutter’s, formula
(ii) Manning’s formula and
(iii) Bazin’s formula
7.5 Calculate Velocity and Discharge in a channel using
Chezy’s and Manning’s formulae for given conditions-
Numerical problems.
7.6 Define most economical section of a channel.
7.7 List the conditions for most economical section of
Rectangular channel and Trapezoidal channel.
7.8 Design rectangular channel sections for the given
conditions.
7.9 Design trapezoidal channel sections for the given
conditions.
8.0 Pumps and Turbines

8.1 Define a Pump. List different types of Pumps. Describe
theparts of Reciprocating Pump with a sketc.h.
8.2 Describe the working principle of Single acting and Double
acting reciprocating pumps.
8.3 List the functions of air vessels in reciprocating pumps.
8.4 Describes the different parts of centrifugal pumps. Explain
the working principle of centrifugal pump. Explain the
necessity of priming. Explain the use of Foot valve and
Strainer in a centrifugal pump.
8.5 List the pumps to be used for the condition of low
headand maximum discharge and vice versa.
8.6 Distinguish Mono block from Centrifugal pump. State any
three advantages of Submersible pumps
8.7 Describe: Jet pump, Air lift pump and Deep well pump. List
the uses of Jet pump, Air lift pump and Deep well pump.
8.8 Define Turbine. List types of turbines. List the examples of
Impulse Turbine and Reaction turbines. Differentiate
between Impulse and Reaction turbines.
8.9 Explain the working principle of Pelton wheel turbine.
8.10 Describe the Parts of Francis Turbine. Explain the
purpose of draft tube. List types of draft tubes.
9.0 Hydro-Electric Power Plants
9.1 Sketc.h a typical layout of hydro-electric power plant
installation.
9.2 List different components of hydro-electric power plant
installation.
9.3 Define a surge tank.
9.4 List the functions of surge tank.
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Properties of liquids
Scope and importance of hydraulics in Civil Engineering - Fluids – classification -
ideal and real fluids - Difference between fluids and liquids - Properties of liquids -
Formulae for Dynamic viscosity, Kinematic viscosity, surface tension of water and
soap bubble, capillarity.
2. Liquid pressure and its measurement

Atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure and absolute pressure and relationship -
Pressure measuring Instruments – Piezometer- Manometers – U-tube, inverted
U- tube and differential manometers –Description - Measurement of the Pressure
of a flowing liquid – Piezometer - simple, differential and inverted differential
manometers
- Total pressure and Centre of pressure on plane surface immersed in liquid –
Horizontal, Vertical and inclined plane surfaces and Practical Applications-
Numerical Problems on Total pressure and Centre of pressure.
3. Flow of liquids
Types of Flow-Uniform flow, non-uniform flow, stream line flow, turbulent flow,
steady flow and unsteady flow - Rate of flow or discharge-continuity equation –
one dimensional – Principle -Numerical Problems - Energies of liquid in motion –
datum head – pressure head and velocity head - Total energy of liquid in motion
– Bernoulli’s theorem (without proof) - limitations of Bernoulli’s theorem - Numerical
Problems - Practical applications of Bernoulli’s theorem - venturi meter - orifice meter
- pitot tube - Numerical Problems on venturi meter and orifice meter.
4. Flow through Orifices and Mouth Pieces

Orifice-types of Orifices-difference of small and large orifice-Determination of
discharge through small Orifice - Vena Contracta-Hydraulic coefficients (Cv,Cc,Cd
and Cr) – relation -(No derivation) - Numerical Problems - Large Rectangular
Orifice- Derivation of formula for discharge- Numerical Problems - Flow through fully
submerged and partially submerged orifices-explanation- formula for discharge-
Numerical Problems - Time of emptying of a prismatic tank by an orifice- Numerical
Problems - Mouth piece-Difference between Orifice and Mouth piece - Types of
Mouth pieces – equations for discharge-determination of discharge through a Mouth
piece from the given details.
5. Flow over Notches and Weirs

Notches - types of notches - rectangular, triangular and trapezoidal notches -
Formulae for the discharge over rectangular, triangular and trapezoidal notches-
Numerical problems (Derivation of formulae not required) – Weirs - types of weirs
– sharp crested and broad crested weirs - Formulae for the discharge over a
sharp crested and broad crested weirs -Numerical problems (Derivation of
formulae not required) - Equations of discharge for the above weirs with velocity of
approach and end contractions - Empirical formulae for discharge over rectangular
weir-Francis formula-Bazins formula- Numerical problems (Derivation of formulae not
required).
6. Flow thorough pipes

Major and minor losses - Frictional loss in pipes - Chezy’s formula and Darcy’s
formula (without proof) - Numerical problems - Minor Losses - Loss of head at
entrance and exit of pipe, loss of head due to sudden enlargement, sudden
contraction – Formulae - simple problems - Hydraulic gradient and total energy line
- Discharge through parallel pipes and compound pipes (series) connected to a
reservoir - Laminar and turbulent flow in pipes - critical velocity and Reynold’s
number – significance (no problems).
7. Flow through open Channels

Open channel flow - differences between open channel flow and pipe flow -
Geometric properties of channel - Wetted perimeter and hydraulic mean depth -
Discharge through open channel –Chezy’s formula (derivation not necessary) -
Numerical problems - Value of ‘C’ for different surfaces - Empirical formulae for value
of ‘C’ - Kutter’s formula, Manning’s formula, Bazin’s formula - Conditions for Most
economical section of a channel - rectangular and trapezoidal sections - Design of
cross sections- problems.
8. Pumps and Turbines
Pumps - types - reciprocating pumps and centrifugal pumps - Reciprocating pumps-
singe acting and double acting pumps- description and working – functions of air
vessels - Centrifugal pumps -description of parts – working – priming - foot valve
and strainer - Other type of pumps-jet, airlift, deep well pumps and submersible
pumps – brief description – uses – Turbines - Classification of turbines-impulse
and reaction turbines - Impulse turbine - Pelton Wheel, description and
working(without problems)
- Reaction turbines- Francis and Kaplan turbines - Description and working of
Francis turbine (without problems) - Draft tube- purpose and types.
9. Hydro-electric Installation
Sketc.h a typical layout of a hydroelectric power plant - components – Intake works,
Pressure tunnel, Penstock, surge tank, anchor blocks and tailrace - Functions of
surge tank.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publications.
2. Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics Including Hydraulics Machines by P. N. Modi &
S.M. Seth, Rajsons publications, Pvt.Ltd.
3. Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines,R.S Khurmi
&N.Khurmi,S.Chand Publications.
4. Fluid Mechanics,Frank white, SIE
MODEL BLUE PRINT
Question
Marks wise
wise COs
No. of Distribution of
S. Weightag Distribution Mapped
Major Topics period Weightage
No e of marks of Weightage
s R U Ap An R U A A
p n
Properties of
1 04 03 3 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- CO1
Fluids
Fluid pressure
2 and its 09 3 -- -- 1 -- -- CO1
measurement
14
8 1
3 Flow of Fluids 09 3 -- -- 1 -- -- CO2
Flow through
4 orifice and 10 11 3 -- 8 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO3
mouth pieces
Flow over
5 notches and 10 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 -- CO3
weirs
Flow through
6 10 11 3 -- 8 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO4
pipes
Flow through
7 open 12 11 3 -- 8 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO4
channels
Pumps&
8 08 03 3 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- CO5
Turbines
Hydroelectric
9 03 03 3 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- CO5
power plants
Higher order question from
CO1,CO2,C
any or combination of 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1
O4
1,2,3,6,7 Chapters
TOTAL 80 27 3 40 10 9 1 5 1
R-Remember U-Understanding Ap-Application An-Analysis
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I & Unit
Test-II

II
SURVEYING-II
No. of
Course Periods
Code per
Week
C-304 SURVEYING-II 04 60 20 80
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
No. of COs
S.No. Major Topics
Periods Mapped
1 Theodolite Survey 16 CO1

2. Trigonometric levelling 10 CO2
3. Tacheometry 10 CO3
4 Curves 16 CO4
5 Advanced surveying using GPS and GIS 8 CO5
Total 60
Develop skills in using Theodolites and Know about

(i) applications of principles of Trigonometric levelling and
Tacheometry.
COURSE
Understand the need for setting out the curves
OBJECTIVES (ii)
andmethods of setting out simple curves
Understand the principles of advanced surveying
(iii)
systems viz., GPS, GIS and their applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Suggest with justification in the use of theodolite for
CO1 C-304.1
Traversing
Describe the principles of Trigonometrical Levelling
CO2 C-304.2 and compute the distance and elevation for different
conditions.
COURSE
Find the vertical and horizontal distances using
OUTCOMES CO3 C-304.3
stadia & tangential tacheometry.
Calculate the data required for setting out simple
CO4 C-304.4
circular curve
Explain the concepts of GPS and GIS and their
CO5 C-304.5
applications in Civil Engineering.
LEARNING OUTC OMES:
LEARNING 1.0 Theodolite survey
OUTCOMES 1.1 List the uses and types of a Theodolite, differentiate between
transit and non-transit theodolites, List the parts of a transit
Theodolite, explain the functions of parts of a transit
theodolite.
1.2 Define the terms Face left observation, Face right
observation, Swing of telescope, Telescope normal and
Telescope inverted, List the fundamental lines of a transit
Theodolite, explain the relationship of fundamental lines of
theodolite, Explain the steps involved in carrying out
temporary adjustments of a transit theodolite for taking
observations, Read the reading of vernier and least count
1.3 Explain the method of measuring the horizontal angle by
repetition method, rule out the page of a theodolite field
book, calculate the angle by the method of repetition, List the
errors eliminated in repetition method
1.4 Explain the method of measuring of horizontal angle by
reiteration method, Rule the page of a theodolite field book,
explain the method of calculating angles by method of
reiteration
1.5 Explain the method of measurement of Direct angles and
Deflection angles, explain the Steps involved in setting out
angles using a theodolite.
1.6 Explain the methods of measurement of vertical angles,
magnetic bearing of a line, Explain the methods of
prolonging a given survey line
1.7 Explain the method of conducting traverse survey by
Included angles method, Deflection angles method and
Magnetic bearing method. Check the angular measurements
and apply corrections in a closed traverse
1.8 Define Latitude and Departure of a line, Compute the
latitudes and departures of survey lines of a closed traverse,
calculate the error of closure of a closed traverse, List the
omitted measurements of a closed traverse and calculate the
omitted measurements when Length and bearing of one side
only is omitted, Balance the closing error by Bowditch rule
and Transit rule.
1.9 Enumerate the difference between consecutive and
independent co-ordinates, Calculate the consecutive and
independent co-ordinates of stations of a closed traverse and
calculate the area of a closed Traverse by independent co-
ordinates
1.10 List the types of errors in theodolite surveying.
2.0 Trigonometric Levelling
2.1 Define trigonometrical levelling
2.2 Explain different cases that occur in trigonometrical levelling
to find the elevation and distance of a given object (base of
the object accessible or inaccessible)
2.3 Derive formula for finding height and elevation of an object
when the base of the object is accessible.
2.4 Calculate the height and elevation of an object when the
base of the object is accessible.
2.5 Derive the formula to find the distance and elevation of the
object when the base of the object is inaccessible and
instrument stations and object are in the same vertical plane
2.6 Calculate the distance and elevation of the object when the
base of the object is inaccessible and instrument stations
and object are in the same vertical plane
2.7 Describe the procedure to find the distance and elevation of
the object when the base of the object is inaccessible and
instrument stations and object are not in the same vertical
plane.
2.8 Calculate the distance and elevation of the object when the
base of the object is inaccessible and instrument stations
and object are not in the same vertical plane.
3.0 Tacheometry
3.1 Define tacheometry and uses of tacheometry and explain the
principles of stadia tacheometry, List the different methods of
tacheometry, define staff intercept
3.2 List the constants of tacheometry in stadia tacheometry
3.3 Derive the formulae to determine the horizontal distance of
staff station from the instrument station using stadia
tacheometry, when the line of collimation is horizontal with
staff held vertical
3.4 Derive the formulae to determine the elevation of the staff
station using stadia tacheometry, when the line of collimation
is horizontal with staff held vertical, Calculate the horizontal
distance of staff station from the instrument station and its
elevation when the line of collimation is horizontal with staff
held vertical.
3.5 Explain the procedure for determining tacheometric
constants, State the use of analytic lenses
3.6 Write the formulae to determine the horizontal distance of
staff station from the instrument station using stadia
tacheometry When the line of collimation is inclined with staff
held vertical (without derivation), Write the formulae to
determine the elevation of the staff station using stadia
tacheometry When the line of collimation is inclined with staff
held vertical (without derivation)
3.7 Calculate the horizontal distance of staff station from the
instrument station and its elevation when the line of
collimation is inclined with staff held vertical, Compute the
horizontal distance and difference in elevations between any
two staff stations (instrument station and staff stations are
lying in the same vertical plane and when the instrument
station and staff stations are not lying in the same vertical
plane) using stadia tacheometry
3.8 Explain the principle of Tangential Tacheometry, enumerate
the difference between Stadia and tangential tacheometry
3.9 Derive the formula to determine the distance of staff station
from the instrument station and elevation of the staff station
by tangential tacheometry
3.10 Compute the horizontal distance of staff station from
instrument station and its elevation by tangential
tacheometry, Compute the horizontal distance and
difference in elevations between any two staff stations using
tangential tacheometry (instrument station and staff stations
are lying in the same vertical plane and the instrument
station and staff stations are not lying in the same vertical
plane).
4.0 Curves
4.1 List the types of horizontal curves
4.2 Define Simple curve
4.3 Define degree of curve and state the relation between the
radius and degree of curve according to chord length / arc
length and Calculate degree of curve using above relations
4.4 Sketc.h a simple circular curve and show its elements
4.5 Define various elements of a simple circular curve
4.6 Compute the length of curve, tangent length, length of long
chord and mid ordinate, apex distance and chainages at
salient points of a curve
4.7 List the linear and angular methods of curve setting
4.8 Explain the procedure for setting out a curve by linear
methods
4.9 Explain the procedure for setting out a curve by angular
methods
4.10 Calculate the data required for setting out a curve for
above methods and prepare the curve tables.
5.0 Advanced surveying using GPS and GIS
5.1 List the modern surveying techniques
5.2 Define GPS and explain the working principle of GPS
5.3 Explain the segments of GPS and Enumerate the types of
GPS receivers
5.4 Explain taking coordinates of various points using GPS
5.5 List the applications of GPS in civil Engineering
5.6 List merits and demerits of GPS
5.7 Define GIS and State the components of GIS
5.8 List and explain the types of data used in GIS
5.9 Define map and list the types of map projections
5.10 List the uses and applications of GIS in civil Engineering
COURSE CONTENT:
1.0 Theodolite Surveying
Component parts of a transit theodolite and their functions – Definitions of
technical Terms – Station, face left, face right, swinging the telescope, transiting -
Fundamental lines of a transit theodolite – Horizontal axis, vertical axis, axis
of telescope, axis of plate levels, axis of altitude bubble, line of collimation –
Conditions of adjustments - Temporary adjustments of a transit theodolite -
Measurement of horizontal angles by repetition and reiteration method -
Measurement of vertical angles - Booking readings - Measurement of magnetic
bearings, deflection angles, direct angles – Prolonging a straight line – by
single transiting, double transiting and fore sighting methods -Errors in theodolite
work - Theodolite Traversing - Traversing with theodolite by included angles
method, deflection angles method and magnetic bearing method - Checks for
closed and open traverse - Traverse computations – Latitude and departure –
closing error – balancing a closed traverse by Bowditch rule and transit rule –
omitted measurements in a closed traverse – problems on omitted
measurements (Length and bearing of one side only omitted) – consecutive
and independent coordinates - area of closed traverse.
2.0 Trigonometric levelling
Principle and necessity of Trigonometric levelling - Elevations and distances of

objects whose base is accessible or inaccessible, with instruments stations and
object in the same vertical plane or in different vertical planes.
3.0 Tacheometry
Tacheometry – principle – uses – types – stadia and tangential

tacheometry - Stadia Tacheometry with staff held vertical and line of
collimation horizontal or inclined – elevations and distances of staff
stations – determination of Tacheometric constants - Tachometric tables –
problems -Tangential Tachometry
– uses – Finding elevation and distances – Problems.
4.0 Curves
Curves – types of horizontal curves – simple, compound and reverse curves

– degree of curve – formulae for degree of curve using 20m / 30m chain –
elements of simple circular curve – Point of commencement of curve, point
of tangency, forward and back tangents, point of intersection, angle of
intersection, deflection angle, length of curve, tangent length, long chord, mid
ordinate, normal chord and sub chord -Calculation of elements of simple
circular curve - Method of curve setting – chain and tape methods – offsets
from long chord method, successive bisection of arcs method, off sets from
tangent (radial and Perpendicular offsets) method and off sets from chords
produced method – angular methods – single and double theodolite
methods -Preparation of curvetable for curve setting – problems.
5.0 Advanced surveying using GPS and GIS
Global Positioning system (GPS) – principles – segments – space control

and user segments – receivers – observation and data processing –
applications in Civil Engineering – advantages and disadvantages of GPS –
Geographical information systems (GIS) – definition – components – Map –
Map projections – types of data used – use and application in civil
engineering.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1) Surveying Vol.I&Vol.II by B.C Punmia, Ashok Jain & Arun Jain,

Laxmi publications
2) Surveying Vol.I&Vol.II by Dr.K.R. Arora, Rajsons Publications Pvt.Ltd
3) Surveying Vol.I&Vol.II by T.P.Kanetkar and S.V. Kulakarni, Pune
Vidyarthi GrihaPrakashan
4) Surveying Vol.I&Vol.II by S.S Bhavikatti, I.K International Publishing House.
5) Surveying Vol.I&Vol.II by S.K.Duggal, M.C.Graw Hill Publications.

MODEL BLUE PRINT
Weig Marks wise Question wise

S. No. of htage Distribution of Distribution
Weightage of Weightage COs
N period of
Major Topics Mapped
o. s mark R U Ap A R U Ap A
s n n
Theodolite
1 16 17 3 6 8 -- 1 2 1 -- CO1
Survey
Trigonometric
2 10 11 3 - 8 -- 1 - 1 -- CO2
levelling
3 Tacheometry 10 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 -- CO3
4 Curves 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 -- CO4
16
Advanced
surveying
5 8 14 3 3 8 -- 1 1 1 -- CO5
using GPS
and GIS
Higher order question

- CO2,CO3,
from any or combination 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- 1
- CO4
of 2,3 & 4 Chapters
Total 80 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1
R-Remember U-Understanding Ap-Application An-

Analysing
Test-II

II
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

Course Total No.
Course title Periods per Formative Summative
Code of Periods
week Assessment Assessment
Construction
C-305 04 60 20 80
Materials
No. of COs
S.No Major Topics
Periods Mapped
1 Stones 08 CO1
2 Bricks 08 CO2
3 Clay products & Sand 08 CO3
4 Cement 08 CO4
5 Mortars & Concrete 12 CO4
6 Surface protective materials 08 CO5
7 Timber, Plastics, Glass & Asbestos 08 CO5
Total 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Familiarize with the various materials used in civil engineering
(i) constructions.
COURSE
OBJECTIVES Acquire the concepts of selection of appropriate construction
(ii)
materials for various Civil Engineering structures /elements.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
C- Select appropriate stones and their acceptability for
CO1
305.1 construction work
C-
CO2 Explain the acceptability of bricks for construction work.
305.2
COURSE
C- Explain suitability of tiles, pipes and building sand for
OUTCOM CO3
305.3 Construction
ES
CO4 C- Check the suitability of cement, mortar and concrete for
305.4 various construction works
CO5 C- Select and apply Surface Protective Materials, Wood,
305.5 Plastics, Glass and Asbestos for construction work.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Stones
LEARNING 1.1 Give Physical classifications of rocks.
OUTCOMES 1.2 List characteristics of good building stone.
1.3 List common varieties of stone used in different items
of construction and their suitability for construction
works (like Granite, marble, Kadapa slabs, Shahabad
stones)
1.4 Explain the purpose of dressing of stones.
1.5 Select a type of a stone for a given situation /
construction.
2.0 Bricks
2.1 State the common sizes of bricks – as per IS
specifications.
2.2 List the characteristics of good bricks.
2.3 List the standard tests on bricks like Water absorption
test and Compressive strength test.
2.4 Explain Water absorption test and Compressive
strength tests on brick.
2.5 Explain the uses of bricks for construction purposes -
Refractory bricks, Fly ash bricks, Precast Solid
Concrete Blocks, Hollow concrete blocks, High quality
building blocks.
3.0 Clay products & Sand

3.1 State the common varieties of tiles used for different
purposes.
3.2 List the characteristics of good tiles.
3.3 List the uses of porcelain and glazed tiles.
3.4 State the uses of stone ware pipes.
3.5 List the characteristics of good sand.
3.6 State the functions of building sand.
3.7 State the percentage of bulkage allowance for
construction work.
3.8 State the need for the quarry dust as a substitute
ofsand.
3.9 Select suitable tile, pipe and fine aggregate for
construction work.
4.0 Cement
4.1 State the chemical composition of cement.
4.2 State rough and ready methods of examining cement
4.3 Explain the method of manufacture of cement by
dryprocess only.
4.4 Give the Classification of cements
4.5 List the three uses of various cements
4.6 State the different standard tests on cement.
4.7 Explain the tests on cement like Fineness,
Consistency, Setting times and soundness.
4.8 State grades of cement and their compressive
strengths.
4.9 State the importance of blended cement
4.10 Explain the application of blended cement with fly ash
and blast furnace slag.
5.0 Mortars and Concrete
5.1 State Fine aggregate and Coarse aggregate. Explain
the various tests conducted for Aggregates like water
absorption and sieve analysis (Procedure of tests not
necessary).
5.2 Give the Classification of mortars. List the proportion of
mortars for various works like plastering, masonry,
flooring etc.., Explain the method of preparation of
cement mortar
5.3 Explain the use of super plasticiser for improving
workability and strength.
5.4 List the ingredients of PCC and RCC. State the usual
proportions of plain and reinforced concrete for
different items of work.
5.5 Define Hydration of cement, Water cement ratio,
Workability, Curing. Explain the importance of
Hydration of cement and water cement ratio.
5.6 Explain the method of preparing concrete. List the
steps involved in preparation of concrete from mixing
to curing. List different curing compounds. List the
methods of curing suitable for different surfaces.
5.7 List different tests conducted for determining the
workability of concrete. Explain the procedure of
conducting the following tests on concrete i.e., Slump
test and Compressive strength test.
5.8 List various types of admixtures used in concrete. List
uses of admixtures used in concrete. Explain about
ready mix concrete. List the advantages and
disadvantages of ready-mix concrete.
5.9 List the uses of Fly ash, Quarry dust for improving
durability and resistance to adverse exposure
conditions.
5.10 Differentiate normal strength concrete and high
strength concrete. Understand the following special
concretes (i) Fibre reinforced concrete (ii) FAL-G
concrete (iii) Light weight concrete (iv) High density
concrete (v) Polymer concrete (vi) Self-compacting
concrete. Explain micro concrete and shotcrete.
6.0 Surface Protective Materials

6.1 Give the composition of Paints, Enamels and
Varnishes.
6.2 List surface protective materials i.e., Paints, Enamels,
Varnishes, Distempers, Emulsion, French polish and
Wax Polish.
6.3 List the uses of surface protective materials.
6.4 Apply suitable surface protective material for the given
construction work.
7.0 Timber, Plastics, Glass & Asbestos

7.1 List characteristics of good timber. Define seasoning.
Explain the importance of seasoning of timber
7.2 Name common varieties of timber used in A.P for
various Civil Engineering works.
7.3 State various types of wood products used in
construction work.
7.4 List the uses of wood products used in construction
work.
7.5 List the uses of fibre reinforced plastic.
7.6 List the merits and demerits of plastics.
7.7 List the merits and demerits of asbestos products.
7.8 Explain suitability of different types of glasses as a
building material.
7.9 List the merits and four demerits of glass.
7.10 Explain suitability of Powder coated Aluminium and
Steel sheets as building material.
COURSE CONTENT
1) Stones
Classification of rocks, physical classification - Characteristics of good
building stone - Common varieties of stones - granite, marble, Kadapa slab,
Shahabad stones - Dressing of stones – purpose.
2) Bricks
Specification for bricks as per IS-1077-1971 - Characteristics of good bricks -
Testing of bricks as per IS-3495-1966 – water absorption and compressive
strength test on bricks - Refractory bricks and their uses - Fly ash bricks.
3) Clay products & Sand
Tiles –Types of tiles roofing tiles (Mangalore tiles), floor tiles, Ceramic
tiles, Vitrified tiles, Morbonite - Characteristics of good tiles - Porcelain –
glazed tiles (uses only) - Stone ware pipes – uses - Characteristics of
good sand, Functions of sand - Bulking of sand – percentage of bulking
– bulkage allowance to be permitted - Crushed stone powder as substitute
of sand.
4) Cement
Chemical composition of cement - Rough and ready method of testing cement
- Methods of manufacture of cement – Dry process - Classification of cement
– ordinary Portland cement, quick setting cement, white cement –Rapid
hardening cement, Low heat cement, High alumina cement, Blast furnace
slag cement and Pozzolana cement – uses of different types of cement -
Tests on cement as per ISI – fineness, consistency, setting time,
soundnesstests - Blended cement.
5) Mortars & Concrete

Fine aggregate and course aggregate – Water absorption and sieve analysis
of fine and coarse aggregates - Mortar – Classification of mortar –
Lime mortar, cement mortar, Surkhi mortar, Blended mortar - Different
proportions of mortars for various works - Preparation of cement mortar -
Ingredients of plain concrete - Proportioning – usual proportions for
different item of work - Foundation, Footings, Columns, Slabs & Beams for
ordinary buildings - Plain concrete and reinforced concrete - Water cement
ratio – factors effecting water cement ratio - Workability – Slump test on
fresh concrete, hardened concrete – compressive strength test on
hardened concrete - Admixtures – definition – types – Chemical
admixtures – Plasticizers (water reducers), super plasticizers, air
entraining agents, accelerators, retarders and bonding admixtures – Mineral
admixtures – Pozzolanas -fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag,
silica fume, rice husk ash and metakaoline – Gas forming – Powered zinc,
powdered aluminium and hydrogen peroxide – uses - Method of preparation
of concrete – Hand and machine mixing - Procedure of mixing, conveyance,
placing compaction, and curing of concrete - Curing –different curing
compounds - methods – suitability - Introduction to ready mix concrete
– Advantages and disadvantages - Use of fly ash, quarry dust. Normal
strength concrete - High strength concrete- Special concretes like Fibre
reinforced concrete, FAL-G concrete, Light weight concrete, High density
concrete, Polymer concrete and Self-compacting concrete - Micro concrete
and Shotcrete.
6) Surface Protective Materials

Composition of Paints, enamels, varnishes - Types and uses of surface
protective materials like Paints, Enamels, Varnishes, Distempers, Emulsion,
French polish and Wax Polish.
7) Timber, Plastics, Glass and Asbestos

Characteristics of good timber - Seasoning of timber – Importance - Common
varieties of timber used for different items of work – Doors and windows, form
work, centring with particular references of A.P - Wood products-veneer – Ply
wood, particle board, laminated board, straw board – Eco board - Types
of plastics – fibre reinforced plastics for plastic doors and windows and
water tanks - Use of asbestos – manufacture of asbestos sheets and pipes
- Typesof glasses and uses.
REFERENCE:
1. Engineering Materials by Rangwala, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd

2. Building Materials by S.K. Duggal, New age International Publishers.
3. Building materials by M. L Gambhir, Neha Jamwal, Mc.Graw Hill Publications
4. Building Materials by P.C Varghese, PHI Learning.
5. Building Materials by Ravi Kumar Sharma, I.K International Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd.
MODEL BLUE PRINT

No. of Weightag
Distribution of Distribution of
Mapped
period e of
S. Major Topics Weightage Weightage
s marks
COs
No R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Stones
08 11 3 8 -- -- 1 1 - -- CO1
2 Bricks
08 11 3 8 -- -- 1 1 - -- CO2
Clay
3 products & 08 11 3 8 -- -- 1 1 - -- CO3
Sand
4 Cement
08 11 3 8 -- -- 1 1 - -- CO4
5 Mortars &
12 14 6 8 -- -- 2 1 - -- CO4
Concrete
Surface
6 06
protective 08 3 3 -- -- 1 1 - -- CO5
materials
Timber,
7 Plastics,
08 06 3 3 -- -- 1 1 - -- CO5
Glass &
Asbestos
Higher order
question CO1,
-
from any or -- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- 1 CO4,
combination -
CO5
of 1,4,5,6&7
Chapters
Total 2 4 1
60 80 -- 8 7 -- 1
4 6 0
Test-II

CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE

Course Total No.
Course Title Periods per Formative Summative
Code of Periods
Construction
C-306 04 60 20 80
Practice
No. of COs
S. No. Major Topics
Periods Mapped
Classification, Planning of buildings
1. 12 CO1
and foundations
2. Masonry 10 CO2
Doors, Windows and Lintels,
3. 10 CO3
Sunshades
4 Roofs, Floorings and Stair Cases 12 CO4
5 Scaffolding and Form work 06 CO5
Protective, decorative finishes and
6. 10 CO5
Termite proofing
TOTAL 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the Course, the student shall be able to
Gain useful knowledge of concepts, principles and procedures
(i) pertaining to building construction system
Course
Understand the skills for the effective execution of building
Objectives
(ii) construction work, carry out repairs and maintenance works with
safety and quality.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C- Design of foundations as per NBC

306.1
C- Explain general principles to be followed in construction of
CO2
306.2 masonry work
Course C- Explain types of doors, windows, ventilators, Lintels and
CO3
Outcomes 306.3 sunshades for effective ventilation.
C- Explain construction methods of roofs, different types of
CO4
306.4 floor finishes and types of Stair cases
Justify the arrangement of scaffolding, formwork,
C-
CO5 Protective and decorative finishes, Termite Proofing for
306.5
given construction work.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Classification, Planning of buildings and foundations
Learning
outcomes 1.1 List the components of a building. Explain the
functions of the components of a building
1.2 Classify the buildings according to National Building
Code with examples.
1.3 Explain the investigations required for foundation as
per N.B.C.
1.4 Describe line diagrams of Spread footings, Raft
foundation, Pile foundation and Well foundation.
1.5 Explain the terms Bearing capacity, Safe bearing
capacity and Ultimate bearing capacity of soil.
1.6 State the loads to be considered in design of
foundation.
1.7 List rules for minimum depth, width of foundation and
thickness of concrete bed for spread footing
foundation.
1.8 Explain the method of constructing spread footing
foundation.
1.9 Lists the causes of dampness at basement level. Lists
the effects of dampness at basement level. Lists the
measures for prevention of dampness at basement
level.
1.10 Introduction to Physical factors in designing a
building. States various factors to be considered in
planning. Inter relationship of different rooms. Aspect,
prospect, furniture requirements, roominess, grouping,
circulation, privacy, sanitation, elegance and economy.
Explain Orientation, Ventilation, stock protection from
excessive sun, rain, dust, insects etc.., Case study
ofan existing house over the above factors
2.0 Masonry
2.1 List different types of stone masonry.
2.2 Explain the different types of stone masonry.
2.3 State the general principles to be observed in stone
masonry construction
2.4 Explain Bond, Course, Header and Stretc.her in
brickmasonry.
2.5 List general principles of brick masonry.
2.6 Explain with sketc.hes, English bond for alternate
layers brick masonry of various wall thicknesses.
2.7 Explain masonry with Pre-cast concrete solid blocks,
Hollow blocks, high quality building blocks maintaining
bond with sketc.hes.
3.0 Doors, windows, Lintels and sunshades

3.1 State the principles of locating doors, windows and
ventilators in buildings.
3.2 Explain with sketc.hes common and special types of
doors, windows and ventilators.
3.3 List the uses of different types of doors, windows
andventilators.
3.4 Explain the fittings and fastenings of doors, windows
and ventilators.
3.5 Explain the functions and types of lintels.
3.6 Explain the functions of sunshades, canopy, sun-
breakers and porticos.
3.7 Explain about thin lintel developed by CBRI with simple
sketc.hes.
4.0 Roofs, Floorings and staircases
4.1 State the functions and classification of roofs.
4.2 State the classification of trusses based on material
and shape.
4.3 Explain with sketc.hes king post truss, queen post
truss, fan roof truss, north light roof trusses.
4.4 Explain with sketc.hes A type, B type steel trusses
using structural angles and tubular sections as per the
provisions of IS code.
4.5 State the common and decorative ceilings used in
construction work. Explain the method of fixing Plaster
of Paris and fibre glass ceilings.
4.6 State the component parts and functions of flooring.
List the requirements of good floor.
4.7 Explain method of construction of C.C flooring, stone
slab flooring, tiled flooring, mosaic flooring, Ceramic
flooring, and Marble flooring.
4.8 Explain terms: rise, tread, landing, flight, going, hand
rail, newal post, baluster and balustrade.
4.9 Draw the line diagrams of different stairs.
5.0 Scaffolding and Formwork
5.1 State the purpose of scaffolding.
5.2 Define scaffolding and mention the types.
5.3 List the component parts of tubular scaffolding.
5.4 Sketc.h and explain about tubular scaffolding.
5.5 State the advantages of tubular scaffolding.
5.6 State the principles of locating stairs.
5.7 State different types of formworks.
5.8 Briefly describe the arrangement of formwork for
columns, beams, slabs and walls.
6.0 Protective, decorative finishes and Termite Proofing
6.1 State the objects and methods of plastering. State the
steps in providing cement plastering on masonry walls.
6.2 State the use of wall putty as a decorative finish
onmasonry walls.
6.3 State the objects and types of pointing.
6.4 State the objects of painting. Explain the method of
painting new and old walls surfaces. State the paints
suitable for painting wood work and steel work.
6.5 Explain briefly the method of white washing, colour
washing, distempering the brick masonry wall.
6.6 Define termite proofing. Explain the method of termite
proofing.
COURSE CONTENT:
1) Classification, Planning of buildings and foundations
Component parts of a building – Their functions - Classification of
buildings according to National building code - Site investigation for
foundation as per N.B.C, Trial pit, auger boring - Bearing capacity of soils –
safe and ultimate bearing capacity - Spread footing foundation for columns
and walls - Raft foundation - Pile foundation – RCC Piles – Bearing
piles, friction piles and under reamed pile - Well foundation – component
parts – sinking of well foundation - Different loads to be considered for the
design of foundation as per IS 875 – 1987 - Spread foundation – Depth of
foundation by Rankin’s formulae– width of foundation – Thickness of
concrete bed - Construction of foundation – (spread footing foundation only) -
Causes, effects and prevention of dampness at basement level - Principles of
planning - Orientation – factors affecting orientation, orientation criteria for
Indian conditions – points for obtaining orientation - Ventilation – Stock
Protection from excessive sun – sun
– rain – dust – insects etc..,
2) Masonry
Classification of stone masonry - Ashlar, Random rubble and Coursed Rubble
Masonry - General principles to be observed while constructing stone
masonry - Brick Masonry - Bonds in brick masonry (English bond only) for
various wall thicknesses - General principles to be observed in construction of
brick masonry.
3) Doors, Windows, Lintels and Sunshades

Doors and windows – parts of door window – positioning - Common types
ofdoors-panelled, Glazed and Flush doors - Special types of doors – Flush
doors with modern construction materials, revolving doors, collapsible doors,
rolling shutters, sliding doors, referring to A.P.D.S.S for size of doors and
windows - Windows – Panelled and Glazed - Ventilators – fixed, swinging type
and louvered - Fittings and fastenings for doors and windows - Lintels –
Functions – Types of lintels – R.C.C., wood, stone and steel - Sunshade,
canopy and sun breakers – lintel cum sunshade.
4) Roofs, Floorings and Stair Cases

Roof – functions of roofs - Classification of roofs – flat roofs – pitched
roofs - Different types of trusses – classification based on material and
shape king post truss, queen post truss, fan roof truss, north light roof truss,
steel trusses of A type and B type using angular and tubular sections as
per IS code - Weather proof course on R.C.C. roof - Decorative ceilings for
auditoriums – method of fixing Plaster of Paris –Fibre glass - Parts of
flooring – Requirements of a good floor - Methods of constructing flooring
– cement concrete flooring, stone slab (Kadapa slab, Shahabad stone)
floorings, cement plaster flooring, Tiled flooring, mosaic flooring-Terms:
rise, tread, landing, flight, going, hand rail, newel post, baluster and
balustrade-Line diagrams of different stairs- Location of stairs - Types of
different stairs – straight, Quarter turn, half turn, Dog legged, open well,
bifurcated, spiral/helical stair case, free standing and slab less
stairs/staircase.
5) Scaffolding and Formwork

Scaffolding – Purpose and types – component parts of tubular
scaffolding - advantages of tubular scaffolding-different types of formworks-
arrangement of formwork for columns, beams, slabs and walls.
6) Protective, decorative finishes and Termite proofing

Plastering – purpose – Types of plastering – procedure for plastering
- external finishing - sand faced, pebble dash, acoustic plastering and marble
chips – Internal finishing – wall paper and wall putty finishing - Pointing
– purpose –Types of pointing - Painting – objects – method of painting new
and old wall surfaces, wood surface and metal surfaces – powder coating
and spray painting on metal surfaces - White washing – colour
washing – Distempering – internal and external walls - Termite proofing –
method.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Building Construction by Dr. B.C Punmia, Er. Ashok K.Jain, Dr. Arun K.Jain,
Laxmi Publications.
2. Building Construction by Rangwala, Charotar Publications.
3. Building Construction by Sushil Kumar, Standard Publishers Distribution.
4. Building Construction by S.P. Arora & S.P. Bindra, Dhanpat Rai Publications.
MODEL BLUE PRINT
Question
Marks wise
wise
Weighta Distribution of COs
No. of Distribution
ge of Weightage Mappe
S. Major Topics Perio of Weightage
N ds marks d
o A A A A
R U R U
p n p n
Classificati on,
planning of
buildings and 06 08
1 14 -- -- 2 1 - --
Foundation s 12 CO1
03 08
2 11 -- -- 1 1 -- --
Masonry 10 CO2
Doors,
Windows 0 0
3 11 -- -- 1 1 -- --
and 10 3 8 CO3
.
Lintels,
Sunshades
Roofs,
0 0
Floorings 14 -- -- 2 1 -- --
4 12 6 8 CO4
and Stair
Cases
Scaffolding 0 -
and Form 06 -- -- -- 2 -- --
5 06 6 - CO5
work
Protective,
decorative
0 0
6 finishes 14 -- -- 2 1 -- --
10 6 8 CO5
. and
Termite
proofing
Higher order
question
from any or - CO1,
-- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- 1
combination - CO5
of 1,5& 6
Chapters
3 4 1 1
Total 60 80 -- 5 -- 1
0 0 0 0
Test-II

II
CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING-I
No. of
Course Periods
Code per
Week
CIVIL ENGINEERING
C-307 06 90 40 60
DRAWING-I
No. of
S.No. Major Topics COs Mapped
Periods
1 Introduction 9 CO1
2 Residential Buildings 45 CO2
3 Public and Industrial Buildings 21 CO3
4 Working drawings 15 CO4
Total 90
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

(i) Apply the standard practices in building drawing, understand
setbacks, orientation of buildings and Vaastu Shastra.
COURSE
(ii) Prepare drawings of different components of building, site
OBJECTIVES
plans, single storeyed buildings, line drawings of public &
industrial buildings with fire safety, working drawings manually.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Practice drawing different components of buildings
CO1 C- 307.1 and drawing site plans as per local bye laws,
orientation of buildings and Vaastu Shastra.
Practice drawing plan, elevation and section of
CO2 C- 307.2 residential buildings, framed structures, given line
diagram and specifications.
COURSE Draw the line diagrams of Hospitals, Hostels,
OUTCOMES CO3 Schools and Apartments for the given requirements
C- 307.3 with fire safety and provision for Physically disabled
and aged people.
Draw the working drawings for foundation marking,
C- 307.4 electrical layout, provision of lift and solar water
CO4
heater.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
LEARNING 1.0 INTRODUCTION
OUTCOMES 1.1 Sketc.h the conventional signs of Civil Engineering
materials, Plumbing and Electrical fixtures.
1.2 Draw the cross section of load bearing wall and name
all components below and above ground level.
1.3 Draw the plan of one Brick wall meeting at corner
showing alternative courses of header and
stretc.hersin English bond.
1.4 Draw the following views of a fully panelled door and
label the parts
1. Elevation and
2. Sectional plan
1.5 Draw the following views of fully panelled window and
glazed window and label the parts.
1. Elevation and 2. Sectional plan
1.6 Draw the following views of glazed window and label
the parts.
1. Elevation and 2. Sectional plan
1.7 Draw the elevation of the following trusses and label
the parts with the given data (details of joints not
required)
1. King post truss and 2. Queen post truss
2.0 RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
2.1 Draw the site plan of a residential building as per
local byelaws and NBC (National Building Code).
2.2 Draw the following views of single storeyed load
bearing type residential building from the given line
diagram and set of specifications for a) One room with
veranda b) one-bedroom house c) two-bedroom house
1. Plan
2. Section and
3. Elevation
2.3 Draw the following views of single storied framed
structure type residential building from the given line
diagram and set of specifications for a) One-bedroom
house b) Two-bedroom house
1. Plan,
2. Section and
3. Elevation
2.4 Draw the following views of a dog legged stair with
given specifications.
1. Plan, and 2. Section
2.5 Draw the following views of two- storied residential
building (framed Structure) from the given the line
diagram and set of specifications.
1. Plans of first and second floors and
2. Elevation
2.6 Prepare the drawings in the standard format for
obtaining sanction from a local body for a residential
building (Two storeyed, two bed room building)
including a rain water harvesting structure
2.7 Principles of Vastu with Scientific approach.
3.0 PUBLIC AND INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

3.1 Rural hospital of 10 beds capacity
3.2 Hostel for 50 students
3.3 Primary school of 250 to 300 students
3.4 Apartments - Plan of one floor with 6 to 10 units @ 90
–150 sq.m /unit
3.5 Provisions of Fire Safety
3.6 Provision for Physically disabled and aged people.
4.0 WORKING DRAWINGS

4.1 Prepare a working drawing for the purpose of
markingthe width of foundation for the given plan of a
building
4.2 Calculate the following for the given plan of a building
1. Plinth area,
2. Carpet area and
3. Floor area ratio/ Floor spaces Index.
4.3 Prepare a working drawing for electrical layout for a
given residential building (2 bed room buildings-ground
floor only).
4.4 Draw the plan and cross section of a lift shaft or a multi
storeyed building.
4.4 Draw the typical layout of active solar water heating
system.
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Conventional signs for materials like bricks, stone, concrete, wood,
glass, earth, steel and electrical fixtures like ceiling fan, bulb, main
switch, refrigerator, bell push, buzzer, A.C motor, and water supply and
sanitary fixtures like tap, wash basin, sink, W.C pan (Indian and
European type), shower, flush tank.
1.2 Cross section of a load bearing wall showing all the components below
and above the ground level.
1.3 Plan of one brick wall meeting at a corner showing odd and even
courses in English bond,
1.4 Plan and Cross section of a Fully panelled door
1.5 Plan and Cross section of a Fully panelled window and glazed window
showing all the component parts
1.6 Elevation of King post and Queen post trusses with the
givenData (details of joints not required)
2.0 Residential Buildings
2.1 Setbacks and orientation principles for planning residential buildings as
per local bye laws and NBC.
2.2 Single storied two bed room load bearing residential building
2.3 Single storied framed structure two-bedroom residential building
2.4 Two-storied residential building (framed structure type)
2.5 Dog legged stair
2.6 The standard format for obtaining sanction from local body for a
residential Building
(up to two-bedroom building–G+1 floors) including a rainwater
harvesting structure.
2.7 Principles of Vastu with Scientific approach
3.0 Public and industrial buildings

Draw the line diagrams only showing the functional requirements of
3.1 Rural hospital of 10 beds capacity
3.2 Hostel for 50 students
3.3 Primary school of 250 to 300 students
3.4 Apartments - Plan of one floor with 6 to 10 units @90 – 150 sq.m / unit
3.5 Provisions of Fire Safety
3.6 Provision for Physically disabled and aged people.
4.0 Working drawings

4.1 Working drawing for the purpose of marking from the given plan
andwidth of foundation.
4.2 Calculates the following for the given plan of a building
1. Plinth area,
2. Carpet area and
3. Floor area ratio/ Floor spaces Index.
4.3 Prepares a working drawing for electrical layout for a given residential
building (2 bed room buildings-ground floor only).
4.4 Draws the plan and cross section of a lift shaft or a multi
storeyedbuilding.
4.5 Draws the typical layout of active solar water heating system.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Civil Engineering Drawing by Chakraborthy, UBS Publications.
2. Civil Engineering Drawing & House Planning by B.P Verma,
KhannaPublishers.
3. Building Planning & Drawing by Dr.N.Kumara swamy, A.Kameswararao,
Charotar Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.
4. Building Planning & Drawing by S.S Bhavikatti, M.V Chitawadagi, I.K
International publishing house Pvt.Ltd.
MODEL BLUE PRINT
Question
Marks wise
wise COs Mapped
No. of Distribution of
S. Major Weightag Distribution
period Weightage
No Topics e of marks of Weightage
s
A A
R U An R U Ap
p n
Introductio
1 09 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
n
Residentia
2 45 20 20 1 CO1 & CO2
l Buildings
Public and
3 Industrial 21 20 20 1 CO1 & CO3
Buildings
Working CO1, CO2,

4 15 20 20 2
drawings CO3& CO4
Total 60 60 4
Note: In question paper, Part –A consists of two questions of 10 marks each from
the chapter 4 (Working drawings) and Part –B consists of two questions of 20
marks each from the chapters 2 (Residential Buildings) and 3 (Public and
Industrial Buildings)
SURVEYING-II PRACTICE & PLOTTING
No. of Total Marks for Marks for
Course
Course Title Periods per No. of Formative Summative
Code
Week Periods Assessment Assessment
40 (30 for
SURVEYING-II class
C-308 PRACTICE & 04 60 exercises + 60
PLOTTING 10 for Survey
camp)
S.No. Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped
1. Theodolite Survey 20 CO1

2. Trigonometric Levelling 8 CO2
3. Tacheometry 12 CO3
4. Curves 12 CO4
5. Plotting 8 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4
Total 60
6 A Survey camp, immediately after 7 days
completion of all exercises, shall be (Additional
conducted for 4 days during 6 AM to instructional
12 noon & 2PM to 5 PM on each day duration & NOT
followed by one day break and 2 to be included in
days of plotting from 9AM to 5 PM, the above 60
with one hour lunch break. (25% of periods) CO1, CO2, CO3,
total sessional marks shall be CO4
allocated to this activity. The skills
learnt during class exercises during I
year & III semester shall be
demonstrated in a simulated field like
situation and shall be assessed
appropriately)
169
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Develop knowledge about surveying instruments &
Course 1 methods adopted to carry out Field Survey with a
Objectives professional approach.
Develop skills in students in using Theodolite and curve
2
setting.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Apply the knowledge of Theodolite in different
CO1 C-308.1 operations in civil engineering projects and to plot
from field data.
Apply the principles of Trigonometrical Levelling and

CO2 C-308.2 computation of distance and elevation for different
conditions and to plot from field data.
Course
Outcomes Find the constants of Tacheometer and apply
CO3 C-308.3 principles of Tacheometry and compute the
distances and elevations for different conditions.
Compute the elements of Simple curve and sets the

CO4 C-308.4 Simple Curve by using different methods and to plot
from field data.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
LEARNING 1.0 Theodolite Surveying

OUTCOMES
 Identify the component parts of a theodolite
 Perform temporary adjustment of theodolite.
 Measure horizontal angle by repetition method
andrecord the observations in the field book
 Measure horizontal angles by reiteration method and
record the observations in the field book
 Measure Vertical angles and record the observations in
the field book
 Prolong a given survey line by double transiting method
 Measure the horizontal distance between
twoinaccessible points using theodolite
 Measure bearing of a survey line
170
 Conduct (i) Theodolite traversing (closed) (ii) Compute
latitudes and departures and (iii)Calculate the area of
traverse
 Determine the Horizontal and Vertical Distance of an

object whose base is accessible
object whose base is inaccessible and the two
instrument stations and the object in the same vertical
plane
object whose base is inaccessible and the two
instrument stations and the object are not in the
samevertical plane
3.0 Tacheometry
 Determine the Tacheometric constants ‘K’ and ‘C’.

 Determine Horizontal Distance and Elevation by
principle of stadia Tacheometry.
4.0 Curves
 Sets out Simple Curve using Chain and Tape.

 Sets out Simple Curve using One Theodolite.
 Sets out Simple Curve using Two Theodolites.
5.0 Plotting
 Measure the horizontal distance between two

inaccessible points by plotting the data observed in
theodolite survey
 Plot the closed traverse of theodolite, distribute the
closing error by Bowditch / transit rule
 Calculate the area of traverse from the traverse
Plotting
 Plot the Simple curve after setting out in the field
171
COURSE CONTENT:
1.0 Theodolite surveying

a) Identification of the component parts of a theodolite
b) Performing temporary adjustment of theodolite.
c) Measurement of horizontal angle by repetition method and record the
observations in the field book
d) Measurement of horizontal angles by reiteration method and record the
observations in the field book
e) Measurement of Vertical angles and record the observations in the field
book
f) Prolonging a given survey line by double transiting method
g) Measurement of the horizontal distance between two inaccessible points
using theodolite
h) Measurement of bearing of a survey line
i) Conducting (i) Theodolite traversing (closed) (ii) Compute latitudes and
departures and (iii) Calculate the area of traverse

a) Determination of the Horizontal and Vertical Distance of an object whose
base is accessible
b) Determination of the Horizontal and Vertical Distance of an object whose
base is inaccessible and the two instrument stations and the object in the
samevertical plane
c) Determination of the Horizontal and Vertical Distance of an object whose
base is inaccessible and the two instrument stations and the object are not in
the same vertical plane
3.0 Tacheometry
a) Determination of Constants of Tacheometer Determination of Distance and
Reduced
Level of Top an
b) Determination of Horizontal distance and elevation by stadia Tacheometry.
4.0 Curves
a) Setting out a simple curve by chain and tape method.
b) Setting out a simple curve by one Theodolite
c) Setting out a simple curve by two Theodolite methods.
172
5.0 Plotting
a) Measurement of horizontal distance between two inaccessible points by
plotting the data
observed in theodolite survey
b) Plot the closed traverse of theodolite, distributing the closing error by
Bowditch / transit
+rule and calculate the area of traverse
c) Plot the Simple curve after setting out in the field
S.No. Experiment Title Key Competency

1 Field Exercises in  Identify the component parts of a
Theodolite Surveying theodolite, Perform temporary
Ex 1.1 adjustments of theodolite.
Ex 1.2  Measure horizontal angles.
 Record the observations in the field book.

Ex 1.3
 Measure horizontal angle by repetition
Ex 1.4 method.
Ex 1.5  Measure horizontal angles by reiteration

method.
Ex 1.6
 Measure Vertical angles.
Ex.1.7  Prolong a given survey line by double
transiting method.
Ex.1.8
 Measure the horizontal distance between
Ex 1.9 two inaccessible points using theodolite.
Ex 1.10  Measure bearing of a survey line.
 Conduct theodolite traversing (closed),

Compute latitudes and departures,
Calculate the area of traverse.
2 Field Exercises in  Determine the Horizontal and

Trigonometric levelling Vertical Distance of an object whose
Ex 1.1 base is accessible
173
Ex 1.2  Determine the Horizontal and Vertical
Distance of an object whose base is
Ex 1.3 inaccessible when the two instrument
stations and the object are in the
samevertical plane
 Determine the Horizontal and

Vertical Distance of an object whose
base is inaccessible when the two
instrumentstations and the object are
not in the same vertical plane
3 Field Exercises in  Determine the Tacheometric constants

Tacheometric Survey ‘K’ and ‘C’
Ex 1.1
 Determine Horizontal Distance and
Ex 1.2 Elevation by principle of stadia
tacheometry
4 Field Exercises in Curves  Sets out Simple Curve using Chain and
Ex 1.1 Tape.
 Sets out Simple Curve using One
Ex 1.2 Theodolite.
 Sets out Simple Curve using
TwoTheodolites
Ex 1.3
174
MATERIAL TESTING PRACTICE
Course No. of
Course title no. of Formative Summative
code period/week
periods Assessment Assessment
Material Testing
C-309 03 45 40 60
Practice
S.No. Topics No. of periods COs Mapped
1 Tests on bricks 12 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
2 Tests on Cement 12 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
3 Tests on Aggregates 15 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
4 Tests on metals 06 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
Total 45
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Familiarize with the knowledge of different materials, tools used in
(i)
Material Testing Lab.
Use various basic implements used in testing of various Civil
Course (ii)
Engineering construction materials.
objectives
(iii) Know the etiquette of working with the fellow work force
Reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
(iv)
experiments/exercises.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Demonstrate the skill of planning and organising
CO1 C-309.1 experimental set up for conducting various tests on
Civil Engineering construction materials
Perform precise operations/tasks with Engineering
CO2 C-309.2 equipment/instrument used for testing of different Civil
Course Engineering construction materials
Observe various parameters, their variations and
Outcomes CO3 C-309.3
graphically represent the same
Analyse the experimental results to draw inferences, to
CO4 C-309.4
make recommendations
Practice ethics & etiquette while working in a group
CO5 C-309.5 and display professionalism while communicating as a
member and leading group.
175
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
LEARNING 1.0 Tests on bricks
OUTCOMES (a) Water absorption test on bricks
 Using of balance to weigh bricks and recording its
weight.
 Placing the specimen/ bricks in an oven at
const. temperature.
 Placing the end of the bricks in the dish, the depth
ofimmersion in water being 25 mm.
 Giving identification marks to bricks.
 Immersing the bricks at a given temperature.
 Wiping out water traces.
 Placing the whole arrangement in a warm
(forexample,20 to 30°C) well ventilated room
 Heating the specimen/ bricks in an oven at
constant temperature.
 Calculating % of water absorption.
 Examining the bricks for efflorescence after the
secondevaporation and report the results.
(b) Crushing Strength test on bricks
 Operation of compression Testing machine /UTM.
 Placing of bricks in CTM.
 Applying of load gradually at the rate of 14N/mm2/min
Switching off the CTM.
 Taking adequate no of bricks randomly.
 Cleaning the surface of bricks.
 Immersing the bricks in clean water tub.
 Wiping off the surface of bricks with cloth after
takingfrom water tub.
 Applying CM 1:1 on the rough surfaces and filling up
the frog with prepared CM.
 Storing of plastered bricks under jute bags for
24hours and immersing in clean water for
3days.
 Wiping off surplus water after removing from clean
water.
 Preparing 1:1 cement mortar.
 Applying the load gradually at the rate of 14 N/mm2
per minute till failure occurs.
 Recording the load at failure(crushing)
 Tabulating the observations.
176
 Calculating the average crushing strength.
2.0 Tests on cement
(a) Fineness Test on cement
 Selecting the required IS sieve No.9.
 Weighing cement.
 Sieving of cement.
 Weighing of residue after sieving
 Calculating % of residue of cement left on the pan.
(b) Normal Consistency Test on Cement
 Weighing of cement.
 Transferring of cement into non-absorbent tray.
 Using of stopwatch.
 Measuring the required % of water.
 Reading of Vicat’s scale/noting down the plunger
penetration and recording.
 Mixing cement with water and transferring the paste
into mould within gauge time.
 Releasing of Vicat’s plunger to penetrate into
thepaste.
 Repeating the process varying % of water and noting
the penetration of plunger from the bottom of the
mould till the penetration value is between 5-7mm.
(c) Setting Time Test on cement
 Transferring cement into non-absorbent tray.
 Measuring the required % of water
 Mixing cement with water and transferring the
paste into mould within gauge time.
 Releasing of Vicat’s needle to penetrate into the paste
 Reading of Vicat’s scale/noting down the needle
penetration
and recording.
 Repeating the procedure until the needle, when
broughtin contact with the cement block and released,
fails to pierce the block between 5-7 mm measured
from the bottom of the mould.
177
(d) Compressive Strength of cement
 Operating the vibrating machine for uniform compaction
 Operating the compression testing machine
 Transferring the cement into non-absorbent tray.
 Mixing cement with water and transferring the
paste into mould within gauge time.
 Filling of mixed cement mortar into standard mould
 Mixing of 3 grades of Ennore sand.
 Measuring of water (P/5 +3.5) % of
combined weight of cement and sand.
 Reading the compressive strength of cubes and
recording
3.0 Tests on Aggregates
(a) Water absorption test on sand
 Taking appropriate quantity of fine aggregate (sand)
and clean it thoroughly by washing it thorough 75µ
sieve till the fine dust is fully removed.
 Finding weight of sand in pycnometer and pouring
distilled water till sand in inundated. Cleaning the
pycnometer on its outside surface and finding its
weight after 24 hours saturation and let the weight be
“A‟.
 Emptying the pycnometer and filling it with distilled
water
only. Taking its weight “B‟.
 Cleaning the aggregate with soft clothes until the
aggregate become saturated surface dry and let its
weight be “C”.
 Keeping the aggregate in oven for drying at a
temperature of 110oc for period of 24hours.
 Removing the aggregate from the oven, cooling to
room temperature in the air tight desiccators and let
the weight be “D”
 Repeating the entire procedure for second
samplealso.
(b) Test on Bulking of sand
 Placing of sand in cylindrical container.
 Measuring water using graduated glass jar.
 Measuring Initial volume, Final volume of sand
and volume of water.
178
 Uniform mixing of water and sand.
 Transferring the mixed sand from pan into measuring
jar carefully.
 Converting percentage of water into volume of water.
 Calculating accurately the % of bulking for every
equal increment of water added.
Drawing ordinary Graph with % of water added on
X-axis and % of bulking on Y-axis.
 Recording maximum percentage of bulking of sand
corresponding to the percentage of water
added from the curve of the Graph, record.
Calculating the volume of sand required taking into
consideration the bulkage.
(c) Test on determination of bulk density and
percentage of voids in Coarse and Fine aggregate
 Using of balance and recording weight.
 Measuring the volumes of fine and coarse
aggregate using cylindrical metal measure in loose
and compacted states.
 Weighing of cylindrical metal measures.
 Weighing of cylindrical metal measures.
 Tamping the aggregate in 25 strokes with tamping rod.
 Calculating of bulk density of coarse and fine
aggregates both in loose and completed states.
(d) Sieve analysis of coarse and fine aggregates
 Using of balance to weigh coarse and fine
aggregates and recording their weight.
 Arranging the set of sieves used for sieve analysis of
coarse aggregate.
 Arranging the set of sieves used for sieve analysis of
fine aggregate.
 Sieving of coarse and fine aggregate on a machine
or sieve shaker
 Calculating the cumulative percentage weight
retained for coarse and fine aggregate.
 Calculating the fineness modulus of coarse and fine
aggregates.
(e) Field method to determine fine silt in aggregate
 Measuring the sand by graduated cylinder/jar.
 Measuring the amount of fines forming a separate layer.
 Adding of correct quantity of water to sand.
 Calculating the silt content.
179
4.0 Tests on metals
(a) Tension test on mild steel rod
 Mounting the specimen in the grips of movable and
fixed heads of UTM.
 Adjusting the load points to zero, after jaws hold the
specimen firmly.
 Keeping left valve in open position and right valve
closed position.
 Switch off the instrument. Measuring the diameter of the
rod.
 Making specimen of convenient length.
 Applying the load slowly and gradually.
 Removing the specimen from the grips.
 Marking the center point
 Measuring the gauge length.
 Keeping the left valve in closed position after
completion of the experiment
 Observing the load decreasing and neck formation.
 Noting the yield point, ultimate load and breaking point.
 Plot the stress and strain graph
(c) Hardness test on metals
 Keeping the specimen ready for testing
 Setting of dial to zero
 Identifying Ball and diamond indenters
 Identifying A, B, and C scale
 Applying minor load
 Reading of hardness number using microscope
(d) Izod/Charpy Impact test on metals
 Preparing the standard specimen and fixing
the specimen in the position of anvil.
 Clutching the striking hammer.
 Adjusting the pointer.
 Fixing the specimen in the position of anvil.
 Adjusting the pointer.
 Releasing pendulum to strike the specimen by taking
safety precaution
 Preparing the standard specimen
 Recording down the reading by observing the
appropriate scale
180
(e) Deflection test on beam
 Operating UTM.
 Fixing and reading of dial gauge
 Placing of specimen over the brackets centrally.
 Selection of load range for the test.
 Adjusting the load gauge and deflectometer to zero.
 Applying of load at the rate of 2.5 mm per minute.
 Noting down the deflection for each increment of load.
 Drawing of graph between load vs deflection
 Calculating of Young’s modulus from the graph
KEY Competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No Experiment Title Competency Key Competency
Water Absorption Taking weight of dry bricks
1
on bricks and wet bricks
1. Preparation of 1:1
cement mortar and
application cement Preparation of 1:1
mortar over top and cement mortar
bottom faces of brick Application of load
Crushing strength
2 2. Application of load gradually at the rate 14
test on bricks
gradually at the rate 14 N/mm2 per minute till
N/mm2 per minute till failure a occurs
failure a occurs
3. Recording the load at
FAILURE
Fineness test on Taking weight of cement
3
cement sample and its residue
1. Measurement of
required percentage of
Preparation of sample
water to cement
in the mould
accurately
Normal consistency Reading of Vicat’s
4 2. Preparation of sample
test on cement scale/noting down the
in the mould
plunger penetration
3. Reading of Vicat’s
scale/noting down the
plunger penetration
1. Measurement of Preparation of sample
Setting times of
5 required percentage of in the mould
cement
water to cement Reading of Vicat’s
181
accurately scale/noting down the
2. Preparation of sample needle penetration
in the mould
3. Reading of Vicat’s
scale/noting down the
needle penetration
4. Recording time at
required needle
penetration
1. Taking weights of
different grades of
standard sand and
cement accurately
Application of load at
Compressive 2. Addition of required
required rate and
6 strength test on percentage of water to
recording of load at
cement cement accurately
failure accurately
3. Application of load at
required rate and
recording of load at
failure accurately
Water absorption of Accurate weighing of dry

7
sand sand and wet sand
1. Measuring of sand and

water accurately
2. Addition of water to
Measuring of
sand in accurate
8 Bulking of sand increasing in volume
increments
of sand
3. Measuring of
increasing in volume of
sand
Determination of
necessary
adjustment for Measurement of volume
9 --
bulking of fine of sand accurately
aggregate by field
method
Bulk density and 1. Taking of weight of
Taking weight of
Percentage of voids cylindrical metal
10 aggregate and
in coarse and fine measure accurately
containers
aggregates 2. Calculating of bulk
182
density of coarse and
fine aggregates both in
loose and compacted
states
3. Taking weight of
aggregate and
containers
1. Correct arrangement of
sieves used for the Correct arrangement
Sieve analysis of
sieve analysis of fine or of sieves used for the
11 coarse and fine
coarse aggregate sieve analysis of fine
aggregate
2. Weighing of residue in or coarse aggregate
each sieve accurately
1. Measuring sand by
graduated cylinder
Field method of
accurately
12 determining fine silt --
2. Measuring correct
in aggregate
quantity of water to be
added to sand
1. Marking of gauge
length on the MS Rod Fixing the specimen
2. Fixing the specimen correctly in between
correctly in between jaws
jaws Application of load at
Tension test on mild
13 3. Application of load at required rate carefully
steel rod
required rate carefully
4. Measuring the load at

failure accurately
1. Measurement of length
and diameter of Application of load
specimen accurately accurately
Torsion test on mild
14 2. Application of load Measuring the angle of
steel rod
accurately rotation accurately
3. Measuring the angle of
rotation accurately
1. Placing of specimen at
exact position
15 Brinell/Rockwell --
2. Application and release
of load at required rate
183
Preparation of
1. Preparation of standard
standard specimen
specimen and fixing the
and fixing the
specimen in the right
Izod/Charpy test on specimen in the right
16 position of anvil
mild steel/brass position of anvil
2. Recording down the
reading by observing
the appropriate scale
1. Measuring the
dimensions of
specimen accurately
2. Application of load at
Deflection test on exact point of Measurement of
17
beams application deflection accurately
3. Measurement of
deflection accurately
1. Measurement of
deflection of springs
COURSE CONTENT
1. Tests on Bricks
Water absorption - Crushing strength
2. Tests on Cement
Fineness test - Normal consistency test - Setting times of cement -
Compressive strength of cement.
3. Tests on Aggregates
Water absorption of Sand - Bulking of Sand - To determine necessary
adjustment for bulking of fine aggregate by Field method - Bulk density and
Percentage of voids in Coarse and fine aggregates - Sieve analysis of coarse
and fine aggregates - Field method to determine fine silt in aggregate.
4. Tests on Metals
Tension test on mild steel rod - Torsion test on mild steel rod -
Brinell/Rockwel hardness test on steel and Brass with different surface finish -
Izod/Charpy tests on mild steel/brass - Deflection Test on beam (Steel beam
or wooden beam)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Laboratory manual of strength of materials and soil mechanics, SBTET, A.P.
184
HYDRAULICS PRACTICE
No. of Total No. Marks for Marks for
Course
Course Title Periods per of Formative Summative
Code
Week Periods Assessment Assessment
Hydraulics
C-310 03 45 40 60
Practice
S. No. of
Major Topics COs Mapped
No Periods
Determination of Hydraulic Coefficients / CO1,
1 factors / Constants / Verification of 36 CO2,
Principles / Laws CO3, CO4
2 Study on Hydraulic Machines 09 CO5
Total 45
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand the principles of Hydraulics in flow measurements
1
and Pumps & Turbines.
Critically observe/examine and Measure the discharges
2
Course through flow measuring devices.
Objectives
3 To know the etiquette of working with the fellow work force.
To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
4
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Conduct Experiment to determine Hydraulic
CO1 C-310.1
Coefficients of Orifices, Mouthpieces and notches.
Conduct a test employing Bernoulli’s theorem (i) to
CO2 C-310.2 observe head variation (ii) To determine discharges
by varying the head.
Course Conduct Experiment to determine flow rates,
Outcomes CO3 C-310.3 pressure changes, and major head loss for flow
through pipes.
Conduct open channel flow to measure chezy’s
CO4 C-310.4
constant.
Conduct relevant test to evaluate the performance of
CO5 C-310.5
Hydraulic machines
185
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.1 Determine coefficient of discharge of a small orifice by
LEARNING constant head method and variable head method.
OUTCOMES  Measure dimensions of collecting tank using meter scale
and record its dimensions.
 Measure the diameter of Orifice using Vernier calipers.
 Priming of motor is to be done before switching on.
 Operate outlet valve of collecting tank for taking T & H for
calculation of Qa, without overflowing it.
 Measure the time required (T) to rise the water level to a
desired height (H) after closing outlet valve in the
colleting tank.
 Maintain constant head in supply tank.
 Preparation of graph with the observed values and
adding a trend line, measuring slope of it and finding out
the Cd from graph.
1.2 Determine coefficient of discharge of a small orifice by

variable head method.
 Measure the diameter of Orifice Using Vernier calipers

 Priming of motor is to be done before switching on
 Measure dimensions of orifice tank
 Measure the diameter of Orifice using Vernier calipers
 Switch on the Pump (If pump is not working, go for
Priming)
 Record the time taken to descend the water level in
theorifice tank from head H1to head H2.
1.3 Determine the hydraulic coefficients of an orifice.

 Switching on the motor after priming
 Operation of different valves
 Measure diameter of Orifice Using Vernier callipers
 Measure the internal dimensions of the tank.
 Operation of stop watch
 Operation of sliding Vernier scale
 Reading a piezometer value without parallax by
maintaining the constant head
 Note the time for collecting specified quantity of water
and subsequent valve operations.
 Reading on piezometer has to be taken corresponding to
lower meniscus level.
 Identify the location of Vena-Contracta.
 Note down the Initial co-ordinates taken at vena-
contracta and final co-ordinates taken at any random
point on jet
186
1.4 Determine coefficient of discharge of a mouthpiece by
constant head method.
 Use meter scale to measure dimensions of collecting
tank and recording its dimensions.
 Use vernier calipers to know the diameter of mouthpiece
 Note the time elapsed for collecting specified quantity of
water using stop watch.
 Operate outlet valve to know the rise of water in
collecting tank.
 Operate inlet valve to maintain constant head
 Measure time required to constant rise in collecting tank
after Closing outlet valve.
 Record values accurately.
 Calculate Cd for mouth piece.
 Plot the graph with specific parameters.
 Compare graph with standard values.
1.5 Determine coefficient of discharge of a rectangular

notch.
 Measure the size of Notch and collecting tank
 Fix hook gauge with sharp edge needle in Notch tank.
 Note the least count of point gauge
 Allow the water into notch tank up to crest level of notch
and record the point gauge reading.
 Control Valves to regulate the flow of water to maintain
constant depth over crest of notch.
 Measure the head over Notch.
 Measure the depth of flow.
 Note the time using the stop watch for 10cm rise of
waterin collecting tank.
 Note the Readings of Piezometer at collecting tank
without parallax error.
1.6 Determine coefficient of discharge of a triangular

notch.
 Measure the size of Notch and collecting tank
 Fix hook gauge with sharp edge needle in Notch tank.
 Note the least count of point gauge
 Allow the water into notch tank up to crest level of notch
and record the point gauge reading.
 Control Valves to regulate the flow of water to maintain
constant depth over crest of notch
 Measure the head over Notch.
 Measure the depth of flow.
 Note the time using the stop watch for 10cm rise of
waterin collecting tank.
187
 Note the Readings of Piezometer at collecting tank
without parallax error.
1.7 Verify Bernoulli’s theorem.

 Priming operation is to be done before switching on the
motor.
 Stop watch reading.
 Maintain constant head by operating appropriate valves.
 Measurement of areas and piezometer reading at given
sections without parallax.
 Measure the dimensions of collecting tank.
 Note down the time taken for 10 cm rise in collecting tank
without parallax.
 Calculate actual discharge.
 Calculate velocity and velocity heads at various sections
of piezometers.
 Calculate and verify total heads at various sections.
1.8 Determine coefficient of discharge of a venturimeter.
 Operate the control valve for varying flow rate.
 Check condition of valves for manometer, collecting tank,
 venturimeter conduit or pipe.
 Check for working of stop watch and Pump (If pump
isnot working go for Priming)
 Release air bubbles in U tube manometer by using
respective valves.
 Release valves of collecting tank, noting the time taken
for specific rise in water level in it.
 Adjust control valve for required flow rate
 Record readings of u tube manometer.
 Calculate Cd of venturi meter.
1.9 Determine friction factor in pipe flow.

 Use Vernier callipers to determine diameter of the pipe.
 Perform Priming of Centrifugal Pump.
 Identify the points in the pipe to know the Pressure
difference.
 Regulate the flow in pipe to avoid air bubbles.
 Operate Inlet Valve to Maintain Constant Head.
 Operate Control valves for Reservoir and collecting tank.
 Operate Control valves for Creating Pressure Difference
between two points.
 Take Differential Manometer reading.
 Allow water to a measurement of 100mm rise in
collecting tank.
 Note the time elapsed for 100mm rise by stop watch in
sec.
188
1.10 Determine Chizzy’s constant in open channel flow.
 Before starting the motor, priming should be done is
necessary.
 Operating valves to maintain steady flow.
 Taking the water level reading using the gauge.
 Read the piezometer reading without parallax error.
 Stop watch operation.
 Care should be taken to avoid overflow of the collecting
tank.
 Note down the slope of the channel.
 Maintain steady flow.
 Note the time taken for 10cm rise in the collecting tank
 Head should be read carefully on the point gauge.
 Calculate the values of chezy's constant for different
discharges.
2.0 Tests on Hydraulic machines.
2.1 Conduct performance test on a single stage

Centrifugal pump
 State the Aim / apparatus /equipment required
 Perform test and record observations
 Identify the component parts of a reciprocating pump.
 State the functions of each component.
 State field applications.
2.2 Determine the efficiency of a Reciprocating pump

 State the Aim/apparatus/equipment required.
 Perform test and record observations.
 Identify the component parts of a reciprocating pump.
 State the functions of each component.
 State field applications and compare with Reciprocating
pump.
2.3 Study on Hydraulic Turbines

 Identify the component parts of Pelton wheel, Francis or
Kaplan turbines.
 State function of each component.
 State field applications.
189
COURSE CONTENT:
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I Determination of Hydraulic Coefficients/factors/Constant/Verification of
Principles/ Laws
a. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a small orifice by constant head
method
b. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a small orifice by variable head
Method
c. Determination of Cc of an orifice by finding Cv and Cd.
d. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a mouthpiece by constant
Headmethod.
e. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a triangular notch.
f. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a rectangular notch.
g. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a trapezoidal notch.
h. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem.
i. Determination of coefficient of a discharge of a venture meter.
j. Determination of friction factor in pipe flow.
k. Determination of Chezy’s constant in open channel flow.
II Study of Fluid machines
a. Tests on reciprocating pump and centrifugal pump.
b. Study on turbines – Pelton / Francis / Kaplan.

S. No Experiment Title Competency Key Competency
1) Regulate the flow 1)Regulate the flow
Coefficient of
2) Operate stop clock 2)Operate stop clock
discharge of small
1 accurately accurately
orifice by constant
3) Draw graph between Q vs 3)Draw graph
head. 1/2
H1/2 between Q vs H
1) Note readings of head at
Coefficient of intervals.
discharge of small 2) Operate stop clock
2.
orifice by variable accurately
head 3) Draw graph between Q vs
H1/2
1) Regulate flow.
2) Note co-ordinate values and
Hydraulic
measure volume
3 coefficients of
3) Operate stop clock
orifice.
accurately
4) State the relation.
Coefficient of 1) Regulate the flow
discharge of 2) Operate stop clock
4.
mouth piece by accurately
constant head. 3) graph between Q vs H1/2
190
1)Note readings of head 1)Regulate the flow
Coefficient of 2)Operate stop clock 2)Operate stop clock
5. discharge of accurately accurately
rectangular notch. 3)Draw graph between Q vs
H3/2
1)Note readings of head 1)Regulate the flow
Coefficient of 2)Operate stop clock . 2)Operate stop clock
6. discharge of accurately accurately
triangular notch 3)Draw graph between Q vs
H5/2
1) Note readings of head at Plot hydraulic
Verify Bernoulli’s various locations gradient line and total
7
theorem 2) Plot hydraulic gradient line energy line
and total energy line
1)Note readings of head . 1)Regulate the flow
Coefficient of 2)Operate stop clock . 2)Operate stop clock
8 discharge of accurately accurately
venturi meter. 3)Draw graph between Q vs .
H1/2
1)Note readings of head Observe the
Friction factor in
9 2)Observe the significance of significance of friction
pipe flow.
friction factor of pipe flow. factor of pipe flow
1)Note readings of head Observe the
2)Observe the significance in significance in
10 Chezy’s constant design of section of
design of section of open
channel open channel
191
IV SEMESTER
IV SEMESTER
Instruction
Periods/Week
End
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
C-401 3 45 3 20 80 100
Mathematics-III
Design and
C-402 Detailing of 5 75 3 20 80 100
R.C.Structures
Quantity
C-403 5 75 3 20 80 100
Surveying-I
Transportation
C-404 5 75 3 20 80 100
Engineering
Irrigation
C-405 4 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering
PRACTICAL
Civil
C-406 Engineering 6 90 3 40 60 100
Drawing-II
Concrete & Soil
C-407 Testing 4 60 3 40 60 100
Practice
Communication
C-408 3 45 3 40 60 100
Skills
Surveying-III
C-409 3 45 3 40 60 100
Practice
C-410 CAD Practice-I 4 60 3 40 60 100
Total 22 20 630 300 700 1000
193
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III
Course No. of Total No. Marks for Marks for
Code Course Title Periods/week of periods FA SA
Engineering
C-401 3 45 20 80
Mathematics-III
Higher order Linear Differential

1 equations with constant 15 CO1
coefficients
2 Laplace Transforms 18 CO2
3 Fourier Series 12 CO3
Total Periods 45
(i) To learn the principles of solving differential equations of

secondand higher order.
Course
(ii) To comprehend the concept of Laplace transformations
Objectives
andinverse Laplace transformations.
(iii) To understand the concept of Fourier Series expansion of

functions.
CO1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential

equations of second and higher order.
CO2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various
Course functions.
Outcomes
CO3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range
Fourier Sine and Cosine series.
194
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
Differential Equations of higher order
C.O. 1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equation of second
and higher order.
L.O 1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a, b, c
are real numbers and provide examples.
1.2 Solve higher order homogeneous differential equations with constant
coefficients and provide examples.
1.3 Define complementary function, particular Integral and general solution of
a non- homogeneous differential equation.
1.4 Describe the methods of solving f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial
of nth order and X is a function of the forms k, eax , sin ax, cos ax, and
x, xn
their linear combinations where n is a positive integer, with examples.
Unit-II
Laplace Transforms
C.O. 2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various functions.
L.O. 2.1 Define Laplace Transform and explain the sufficient conditions of
existence of Laplace Transform
2.2. Obtain Laplace transforms of standard functions and solve simple
problems.
2.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First
shifting theorem (without proof) and Change of Scale property and solve
simple problems.
2.4. Write the Laplace Transform of unit step function and second
shiftingtheorem (without proof) and solve simple problems.
2.5. Write formulae for Laplace transform of functions with multiplication by
t n and division by t, Laplace transform of derivatives, evaluation of some definite
integrals using Laplace Transforms and solve simple problems.
2.6 Define inverse Laplace Transform, obtain inverse Laplace Transforms of

standard functions and solve simple problems.
2.7 Write linearity property, first and second shifting theorems (without
proof),change of scale property of inverse Laplace transform and solve
simple problems.
2.8 Write inverse Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals and solve
simple problems.
2.9 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions with multiplication by s and
division by s and solve simple problems.
2.10 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions using partial fractions and
solve some simple problems.
2.10 Define convolution of two functions, state convolution theorem (without
proof) and solve simple problems.
Unit-III
Fourier series
C.O. 3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier Sine
and Cosine series
L.O. 3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the intervals (c, c 2 ) and
(c, c 2l) and write the Euler’s formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series expansion
of a function.
3.4 Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2π) and (-π, π)
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval ( , ) and
( l, l) expand simple functions.
3.6 Write Fourier series expansion of a function over the interval (0, 2l) and
( l, l) and expand simple functions.
3.7 Write half-range Fourier sine and cosine series of a function over the
interval (0, π) and (0, l) and expand simple functions.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
(Common Subject)
Course Content
Unit I: Differential Equations of higher order

1. Solve Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of
order two and higher with emphasis on second order.
2. Solve Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of
the form
ax n
f(D)y = X where X is in the form k(constant), e , sinax, cosax, x , where n is a
positive integer, finding complimentary function, particular integral and general
solution.
Unit II: Laplace Transforms

3. Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of elementary functions,
linearity property, state first shifting theorem, change of scale property,
multiplication by tn, division by t, LT of derivatives and integrals, LT of unit step
function, state second shifting theorem, inverse Laplace transforms- state shifting
theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by sn and division by s,
derivatives, integrals, examples of inverse LT using partial fractions, state
convolution theorem with simple examples.
Unit III: Fourier series

4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier
series over the interval c 2 and c 2l , Euler’s formulae , sufficient
c, c,
conditions for existence of Fourier series expansion of a function, Fourier series
expansion of basic functions limited to k(constant), x, x 2 , sin ax, cos ax, eax and their
combinations over the intervals 0, 2 , , , 0, , Fourier series for
2l , l ,l
even and odd functions over , and l ,l , Fourier half-range sine and
cosine series over 0, and 0, l
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared &
prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers
2. M.R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline of Laplace Transforms, Schaums’ Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers,
Moscow.
Blue print
No of Weight Marks wise Question COs

S. Chapter/ Period age distribution of wise distribution mappe
No Unit title s allotted weightage of weightage d
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I
Higher order
Linear
1 Differential 15 28 11 11 3 3 2 2 1 1 CO1
equations
with
constant
coefficients
Unit - II CO2
2 Laplace 18 33 11 11 11 0 2 2 2 0
Transforms
Unit - III
Fourier
3 12 19 3 3 3 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Series
Total 45 80 25 25 17 13 5 5 4 2

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered
Unit Test-I From LO 1.1 to 2.5
Unit Test-II From LO 2.6 to 3.7
DESIGN AND DETAILING OF R.C. STRUCTURES
Marks for Marks for
Course No. of Total no. of
Course title Formative Summative
code period/week periods
Assessment Assessment
Design and
C-402 Detailing of 05 75 20 80
R.C.
Structures
S. No. of COs
Major Topics
No. Periods Mapped
Introduction to R.C.C and Principles of Working
1. 08 CO1
Stress Method
2. Philosophy of Limit State Design 05 CO2
3. Analysis and Design of Rectangular Beams 15 CO2
4. Design of Slabs 10 CO2
5. Analysis of T-beams 09 CO3
6. Design of continuous slabs and beams 10 CO3
7. Design of columns 09 CO4
8. Design of footings 09 CO4
Total 75
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

(i) Make student to be familiar with the principles of methods of
Course design of R.C. Elements subjected to flexure, compression,
Objectives shear and torsion.
(ii) Enable the student to design various R.C. Building Elements.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C- 402.1 Explain principles of Working stress design
Design singly reinforced & doubly reinforced R.C.C

CO2 C- 402.2 rectangular beams and slabs using Limit state
Course method
Outcomes
CO3 C- 402.3 Design T-beam, Continuous beams & slabs using
Limit state method.
CO4 C- 402.4 Design columns & footings using Limit state method
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Introduction to R.C.C and Principles of Working Stress Method

Outcomes 1.1 Differentiate Cement concrete and reinforced cement
concrete. List the advantages and disadvantages of R.C.C.
1.2 List the material used in R.C.C. and their functions in
R.C.C.State the reasons for using steel as reinforcement.
1.3 List the different codes used in R.C.C. List the Loads to be
considered in the design of R.C. elements.
1.4 State the different grades of concrete and different
permissible stresses in concrete (Working Stress Method) as
per IS 456 – 2000. Differentiate the nominal mix concrete and
design mix concrete.
1.5 Write the equations of tensile strength and modulus of
elasticity of concrete as per IS 456 – 2000. State properties of
concrete viz., Poisson’s ratio, Creep, Shrinkage, Workability
and Unit weight.
1.6 List different types of steel and their permissible stresses in
steel (Working Stress Method) as per IS 456 – 2000.
State modulus of elasticity and unit weight of steel.
1.7 State different methods of designing R.C. elements.
1.8 State the assumptions made in Working Stress Method as per
IS 456 – 2000. Define modular ratio. Write the equation of
modular ratio in working stress method. Sketc.h the stress
distribution and transformed area of R.C. section.
1.9 Define Effective depth, Neutral axis, Lever arm and Moment
of resistance. Describe balanced section, under reinforced
section and over reinforced sections with sketc.hes.
1.10 Calculate Neutral axis, Lever arm and Moment of resistance
for a singly reinforced rectangular beam. Design a singly
reinforced rectangular beam subjected to flexure.
2.0 Philosophy of Limit State Design
2.1 Define Limit State.
2.2 State different limit states.
2.3 Distinguish ‘strength’ and ‘service ability’ limit states
2.4 List different IS: 456 – 2000 code provisions for Limit
statemethod of design.
2.5 Define characteristic strength of materials and characteristic
loads.
2.6 Differentiate Nominal Mix and Design Mix.
2.7 Explain the role of partial safety factors in limit state design.
2.8 Define Design strength of materials and Design loads.
2.9 State the assumptions made in the limit state design.
2.10 State the differences between the Working stress method
and Limit state method of design of R.C. elements.
3.0 Analysis and Design of Rectangular Beams
3.1 Sketc.h stress and strain diagrams for a singly reinforced
rectangular beam indicating appropriate stress and strain
values in compression zone and tension zone of the beam,
also the strain value at the junction of parabolic and
rectangular stress blocks. Calculate the depth of rectangular
and parabolic stress blocks.
3.2 Calculate the total compressive force and total tensile force
resisted by the singly reinforced rectangular beam. Calculate
the depth of neutral axis from the equilibrium condition. Define
lever arm. Write the equation for lever arm for a singly
reinforced rectangular beam.
3.3 Explain – why the over reinforced sections are not
recommended? Calculate the maximum depth of neutral
axis. Calculate the limiting value of moment of resistance with
respect to concrete and steel. Calculate the limiting
percentage of steel.
3.4 State the general design requirements for beams in limit state
design as per IS 456 – 2000 (Effective span, limiting
stiffness, minimum tension reinforcement, maximum tension
reinforcement, maximum compression reinforcement, spacing
of main bars, Cover to reinforcement, side face
reinforcement.)
3.5 Calculate the depth of neutral axis for a given section and
decide whether the section is balanced or under reinforced or
over reinforced and calculate the moment of resistance for the
respective case. Calculate the area of steel for a given beam
with given cross section and loading.
3.6 Design a singly reinforced beam as per IS 456 – 2000 for
flexure only with the given grade of steel and concrete and
check the designed beam for deflection as per IS 456 –
2000.
3.7 Explain the effect of shear on beam. Explain the shear stress
distribution across a homogeneous section and reinforced
concrete section with sketc.hes. Explain the design shear
strength and maximum shear stress in different grades of
concrete as per IS 456 – 2000. Explain the need for shear
reinforcement and different forms of shear reinforcement
provided in beams. Explain the critical section for shear.
3.8 Calculate the shear strength of concrete, shear resistance of
vertical stirrups, shear resistance of bent up bars as per IS
456 – 2000. State the minimum shear reinforcement and
maximum spacing of shear reinforcement as per IS 456 –
2000. Calculate the nominal shear stress, shear resisted
bybent up bars and spacing of vertical stirrups.
3.9 Design the shear reinforcement for beams. Design a singly
reinforced beam as per IS 456 – 2000 with the given grade of
steel and concrete and check the designed beam for shear
and deflection as per IS 456 – 2000 and design the shear
reinforcement as per 456 – 2000.
3.10 State the situations which require doubly reinforced beams.
3.11 Determine the moment of resistance for a given doubly
reinforced section (given d’/d – fsc values). Design a
doubly reinforced beam with the given data.
3.12 Calculate the allowable working load on singly reinforced
beam and doubly reinforced rectangular beam for the given
span.
3.13 Calculate the development length of bars in compression,
tension, and the curtailment position for main tension bars.
State the importance of anchorage values of reinforcement.
3.14 Design a singly / doubly reinforced simply supported
rectangular beams for the given grades of materials, span
and loading for flexure including shear design with the
curtailment of reinforcements and check for the deflection
using simplified approach of the code.
3.15 Design an independent lintel subjected to triangular loading.
4.0 Design of Slabs

4.1 Distinguish one-way slabs and two-way slabs.
4.2 List the types of slabs based on support conditions.
4.3 Explain the general design requirements of slabs as per IS
456 – 2000.
4.4 Explain the functions of distribution steel in slabs.
4.5 Sketc.h the general reinforcement details for a
1) One-way slab simply supported on two parallel sides
2) One-way slab simply supported on four sides
3) Two way simply supported slab
4) One-way continuous slab
5) Cantilever slab continuous over a support and
4.6 Explain the edge strip and middle strip of a two-way slab.
4.7 Sketc.h the general reinforcement details for a continuous
two- way slab for its edge strip and middle strip using straight
bars and bent up bars.
4.8 Design one-way slab for given grades of materials, loads and
span for flexure and including shear check, check for
deflection using stiffness criteria.
4.9 Explain Load distribution in two-way slabs. Design two-way
slab with different end conditions for flexure including shear
using B.M and S.F coefficients. Calculate the area of torsional
reinforcement in the restrained slabs. Check the deflection
using simplified approach of stiffness criteria.
4.10 Classify the stairs based on the structural behaviour or
support condition. Sketc.h the detailing of reinforcement in
stairs spanning longitudinally (Dog legged staircase only)
5.0 Analysis of T-beams

5.1 Distinguish T- beam and L- beam.
5.2 List the advantages of a T- beam.
5.3 Write formula for effective width of flange of a T- beam
andL- beam as per IS 456 – 2000.
5.4 Calculate the effective width of flange of an isolated T-
beam as per IS 456 – 2000.
5.5 Describe the three cases of determining Neutral axis of T-
beams with sketc.hes and notations.
5.6 Calculate the depth of neutral axis and moment of resistance
of the given Tee section using the expressions given in the
code.
5.7 State the minimum and maximum reinforcement in T- beams
as per 456 – 2000.
6.0 Design of Continuous beams and slabs

6.1 Explain the behaviour of continuous beams and slabs
subjected to loading.
6.2 List the advantages of continuous beams or slabs.
6.3 Draw the line diagram of a continuous beam or slab and
indicate the bending moment and shear force values at
salient points as per IS 456 – 2000.
6.4 Sketc.h the position of sagging (+ve) and hogging (-ve)
bending moments along the continuous beam or slab.
6.5 Sketc.h the general reinforcement details for a
continuousbeam or slab.
6.6 Calculate the B.M and S.F of continuous beams and slabs
(Minimum of three spans) at critical sections using B.M and
S.F coefficients given in the code.
6.7 Design a continuous beam or slab as per code at a
givensection only.
7.0 Design of columns
7.1 Define a column/compression member. Differentiate among
Column, Strut, Pedestal and Post
7.2 Explain the need for providing reinforcement in column.
7.3 State the effective length of column for different end
conditions as per theory and as per code.
7.4 Classify the columns based on type of reinforcement,
loading and slenderness ratio.
7.5 State the slenderness limits for column to avoid buckling of
column.
7.6 State the minimum eccentricity of column.
7.7 Calculate the load carrying capacity of a short column with
lateral ties and with helical reinforcement as per IS 456 –
2000.
7.8 Differentiate between short and long columns and
understand their failure behaviour.
7.9 Explain the design requirements of columns as per IS 456
–2000.
7.10 Design a Short Square, rectangular, circular column with
lateral ties (subjected to axial load only).
8.0 Design of Footings
8.1 Define Footing
8.2 State different types of Footings (Square/ Rectangular
Isolated footings of Uniform/Tapered sections).
8.2 State the Rankine’s formula for minimum depth of
foundation.
8.3 State the code provisions for the design of R.C.C footings.
8.3 Explain the procedure of checking the footing for one-way
shear, two-way shear, bearing stress and for development
length.
8.5 Design isolated square footing of uniform thickness under a
column for flexure only.
Note: Students may be encouraged to use design aids SP-16, SP-34 and SP-23 for
design of slabs, beams for general practice. I.S.456 – 2000 is allowed in
theExamination.
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction to R.C.C and Principles of working stress method
Introduction - advantages and disadvantages of R.C.C - Loads to be
considered in design - Introduction to I.S Codes - Assumptions in working
stress method - Behaviour of concrete and steel under working loads -
Modular ratio – critical percentage of steel - Balance, under reinforced,
over reinforced sections - Critical and actual depth of neutral axis of a singly
reinforced beams – M.R of simply supported singly reinforced beam sections
-Design of singly reinforced rectangular beam for flexure.
2.0 Philosophy of limit state Design
Codes of practice of R.C.C design - Characteristic compressive strength -
Modulus of elasticity of concrete - Nominal Mix – Design Mix –
differences - Loads to be adopted in R.C.C. design – Dead load, Live load,
Wind load (IS 875-1987) - Earth quake load (IS-1893) - Strength and
serviceability limit states - Characteristic strength of materials and
characteristic loads - Partial safety factors - Design strength of materials and
design loads - Assumptions made in the limit state design.
3.0 Analysis and design of rectangular beams
Stress-strain diagram of singly reinforced R.C.C. beam - Depth of neutral axis,
lever arm – M.R of singly reinforced Rectangular section – Balanced, under
and over reinforced sections - Critical percentage of steel - Calculation of
moment of resistance of the given section - Design of singly reinforced
rectangular beam for the given load as per IS 456-2000 - Doubly reinforced
sections – Necessity – use - Calculation of neutral axis - moment of
resistance for the given section and grades of concrete and steel (no
derivation of the equations) - Shear in singly reinforced beams - Nominal
shear stress - Permissible shear stress - Methods of providing shear
reinforcement in the form of vertical stirrups - combination of vertical stirrups
and bent up bars - Code provisions for spacing of stirrups and minimum shear
reinforcement (no derivation of equations) - Development of bond stress in
reinforcing bars - Design bond stress - Development length – Bond and
anchorage concepts and their importance - Curtailment of tension
reinforcement - Simple problems on development length - Design of simply
supported singly and doubly reinforced rectangular beams for flexure
including shear and check for
deflection using stiffness criteria - Use of design aids (SP-16) - Design of an
independent lintel subjected to triangular loading.
4.0 Design of slabs
Slabs as structural and functional members - One way and two way slabs -
Minimum reinforcement and maximum spacing of reinforcement concrete
cover - Stiffness criterion- stiffness ratios for simply supported, cantilever and
continuous slabs - One way and two way slabs with various end conditions as
per I.S:456 code - Design of one-way slab for flexure and shear for the given
grades of concrete, steel, span and loading - Check for deflection using
simplified approach of stiffness criteria - Design of two-way slabs with
different end conditions, using B.M and S.F coefficients for the unrestrained
and restrained conditions as per code - Design of torsion reinforcement for the
restrained slabs - Deflection check using stiffness criteria - Use of design aids
(SP-16) - Detailing of reinforcement in stairs spanning longitudinally.
5.0 Design of T-beam
Conditions needed for design of a beam as T-Section – Advantages - Code
provisions for effective flange width - Three cases of tee beams - Neutral axis,
lever arm and moment of resistance for under reinforced, balanced sections
using the equations given in the code (no derivations of equations) -
Calculation of the moment of resistance of Tee section using the equations
given in the code - Use of design aids (SP16).
6.0 Design of Continuous beams and Slabs
Behaviour of continuous members - Advantages of continuous beams and
slabs - Determination of B.M and S.F of continuous beams and slabs of
minimum three spans using BM & SF coefficients given in the code - Use of
design aids (SP-16) - Design the tension and shear reinforcement at a given
section only.
7.0. Design of columns
Definition of column – Difference between Column and Pedestal - Types of
columns (Long and Short) - Effective length for different end conditions - Code
provisions for design of columns - Square, rectangular and circular columns
with lateral ties - Determination of Load carrying capacity of short column -
Square, rectangular, circular, helically reinforced column subjected to axial
load only - Design of short square, rectangular and circular columns (with
lateral ties only).
8.0 Design of Footings
Footings - Need for footings - Footings under isolated columns - Loads on
footings - Code provisions for design of footings - Size of footings for given
bearing capacity - Procedure of checking the footing for one-way shear - Two-
way shear - Bearing stress - Development length - Design of an isolated
square footing of uniform thickness under a column for flexure only.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. I.S:456- 2000 Code Book

2. I.S:875 – 1987 Code Book
3. SP-34 - Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing (1987).
4. Limit state design of R.C.C structures, Dr. B.C. Punmia, Ashok K.Jain,
Laxmi Publication.
5. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpatrai
publishing company.
6. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures, V.N. Vazirani and M.M.
Ratwani –Khanna publishers.
7. Limit state design of reinforced concrete, P.C. Verghese, PHI Learning
8. Reinforced Concrete Design, N. Krishna Raju & R N Pranesh, New age
international publishers.
9. Reinforced Concrete Design, S. Unni Krishna Pillai & Devdas Menon,
McGrawHill Education.
MODEL BLUE PRINT

No. Distribution Distribution of
Weight COs
of of Weightage Weightage
Major Topics age of Mappe
S. perio
marks A d
No ds R U Ap R U Ap An
n
Introduction to
R.C.C and 0 0
06 -- -- 1 1 - --
1. Principles of 08 3 3 CO1
Working Stress
Method
Philosophy of 0 0
06 -- -- 1 1 -- --
2. Limit State 05 3 3 CO2
Design
Analysis and
0 0
Design of 14 08 -- 1 1 1 --
3. 15 3 3 CO2
Rectangular
Beams
0
11 -- 03 -- 1 1 --
4. Design of Slabs 10 8 CO2
0
Analysis of T- 11 -- 08 -- 1 -- 1 --
5. 09 3 CO3
beams
Design of
0
continuous 03 -- -- -- 1 -- -- --
6. 10 3 CO3
slabs and
beams
0
Design of 11 -- 08 -- 1 -- 1 --
7. 09 3 CO4
columns
Design of 8 -- -- 08 -- -- -- 1 --
8. 09 CO4
footings
Higher order CO1,C
question from 1
-- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 O2,CO
Chapter- 0
1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8 3,CO4
1 1 1
Total 75 80 35 6 4 5 1
8 7 0
Test-II

II
QUANTITY SURVEYING – I
Marks for Marks for

Course Course No. of Total no.
Formative Summative
code title period/week of periods
Quantity
C-403 05 75 20 80
Surveying-I
S. No. Major Topics No. of COs

Periods Mapped
1 Introduction, Units and 05 CO1
Specifications
2 Types of Estimates of Buildings 13 CO2
3 Detailed Estimates 30 CO3
4 Analysis of Rates and Abstract 15 CO3
Estimates
5 Earthwork Calculations 12 CO4
TOTAL 75
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Familiarize with the fundamentals of quantity surveying, cost
(i)
estimating & specifications
Course Prepare detailed estimates and abstract estimates for
Objectives (ii)
buildings
(iii) Calculate the volumes of earthwork and reservoir capacities
COURSE OUTCOMES:
C- Explain the basic concepts of Quantity Surveying,
CO1
Course 403.1 Units and Specifications
Outcomes C-
CO2 Explain different types of estimates
403.2
C- Prepare Lead statement, Data Sheet, Detailed and
CO3 Abstract estimates for the given Civil Engineering
403.3
Structure
C- Compute the volumes of earth work and reservoir
CO4
403.4 capacity
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Basic concepts of Quantity Surveying, Units and

Outcomes Specifications
1.1 Define:
a) Quantity Surveying
b) Estimate
1.2 State the need for quantity surveying
1.3 List different types of estimates
1.4 Explain the need for different estimates
1.5 Distinguish among element of structure, item of a
work& materials of construction
1.6 List the duties of Quantity Surveyor
1.7 State the units of measurements, data and payment
for different items of work and materials using IS: 1200
1.8 State two types of taking out measurement.
1.9 Explain Centre Line Method & Long and Short Wall
Method
1.10 Explain the process of taking measurements
for different works and tolerances
1.11 Define specifications
1.12 State the need for specifications
1.13 List different types of specifications
1.14 State the general specifications for
important items of work
2.0 Different types of estimates

2.1 List different types of estimates
2.2 Explain:
a) Approximate or preliminary estimate
b) Detailed estimate
c) Abstract estimate
2.3 State the methods of preparing approximate estimates
2.4 Explain:
a) Plinth area method
b) Cubical content method
c) Service unit method
2.5 Prepare approximate estimates for residential and non-
residential buildings with given data of size/capacity and rates
considering cost of building services and other over heads
2.6 Explain ‘Detailed Estimate’ and ‘Abstract Estimate’
2.7 Differentiate between ‘Detailed estimate’ and ‘Abstract
estimate’
2.8 Write formats of detailed estimate and abstract
estimate
3.0 ‘Detailed estimates’ for various Civil Engineering

Structures
3.1 State the information required for preparation of detailed
estimates of a building
3.2 List different methods of taking out quantities
3.3 Explain different methods of taking out quantities
3.4 Prepare the detailed estimates for various buildings
from the given drawings, specifications and site
conditions:
a) Compound wall and Steps
b) Single Room with Verandah (Load bearing
structure)
c) Single storied Residential building with one bed
room (1 BHK) (Load bearing structure)
d) Single storied Residential building with two bed
rooms (2 BHK) (Load bearing structure)
e) Two storied residential building (Framed
structure)
f) Buildings with Sloped roofs like pitched roof, lean
to roof, hipped & valley roof
3.5 Prepare the estimation for various roof elements of
hipped roof.
3.6 Prepare the estimation for various elements of a steel
roof truss for an Industrial building
3.7 Prepare the estimation of a Septic tank with Soak pit.
4.0 Analysis of Rates and Abstract estimate
4.1 Define analysis of rates
4.2 Explain the purpose of analysis of rates
4.3 Explain the following in rate analysis:
a) Standard data book
b) Standard schedule of rates
c) Standard data sheet
4.4 Explain the following terms:
a) Blasting charges
b) Seigniorage charges
c) Cess charges
d) Stacking charges
e) Water charges
f) Crushing charges
g) Lead charges
h) Area allowances on labour component
i) Loading and Unloading charges for material
j) Overhead charges
4.5 Explain cost of material at source and site
4.6 Define lead statement, write the format for Lead
Statement, Prepare Lead Statement for different
materials
4.7 List different types of labour wages as per latest SSR
4.8 Prepare the data sheet for finished items of works using
standard data and SSR
4.9 Tabulate the material requirement of mortars and
concrete of different proportions
4.10 State different items involved in Abstract
estimation of a building
5.0 Volume of Earth work and Reservoir capacity
4.3 Explain terms:
a) Embankment
b) Cutting
c) Volume of earth work
4.4 Define the terms: a) Lead b) Lift
4.5 State the standard values of ‘Lead’ and ‘Lift’
4.6 Calculate the lead and lift for a given section
4.7 List different methods of computing the areas and
volumes
4.8 Explain:
a) Mean sectional area method
b) Mid sectional area method
c) Trapezoidal rule
d) Prismoidal rule
4.9 State the limitations of Prismoidal rule
4.10 Compute the volumes of an embankment for a
given data
4.11 Compute the volumes of a cutting for a given
data
4.12 Prepare detailed estimates for earth work for
roads, canals and earthen bunds
4.13 Compute gross and effective capacity of a
reservoir from the areas of different elevations
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction of Unit measurements and Specifications

Quantity surveying – Definition of estimate – Need for estimation – Types
of estimates – Approximate estimate – Detailed estimate – Abstract
estimate – Duties of Quantity Surveyor – Elements of a structure – Item of
Work – Materials of construction – Line diagram for preparation of abstract
estimate
Units of measurements for various items of civil engineering works as per IS:
1200 - Degree of accuracy in measurement – Deductions for openings in
masonry, R.C.C. and Plastering – Painting coefficients
Different Methods of taking out quantities – Centre Line Method – Long and Short
Wall Method - Specifications – Necessity – Types of specifications – General
specifications of: Earth works, Brick/Stone Masonry with C.M, Reinforced Cement
Concrete, Plastering with C.M, Floor finishes with ceramic tiles and marbles and
White washing/Colour washing
2. Types of Estimates of Buildings

Types of estimates – Preliminary or Approximate Estimate – Detailed Estimate
– Abstract Estimate – Definitions – Formats for detailed and abstract
estimates - Preliminary or Approximate Estimate – Plinth area method – Cubic
rate method –Service Unit method - Problems on Preliminary estimates
3. Preparation of detailed estimates for various Civil Engineering structures
Compound wall and steps - Single Room with verandah - Single Storied
Residential building with one bed room (1 BHK) - Single Storied Residential
building with two bed rooms (2 BHK) - Two storied residential building - Buildings
with Sloped roofs like pitched roof, lean-to-roof, hipped & valley roof - Estimation
of a steel roof truss - Septic tank with soak pit
4. Analysis of Rates and Abstract Estimates:
Cost of materials at source and at site - Standard Schedule of Rates of different
materials in buildings works - Types of labour – Wages as per S.S.R - Lead and
Lift – Preparation of Lead Statement - Data Sheets – Standard data for
materials and labour components for different items of work - Preparation of unit
rates for finished items of works using Standard data and S.S.R. - Methods of
calculating quantities of ingredients of various proportions of cement concrete.-
Provisions for different building services and other overhead charges - Prepare
abstract estimate for Single bedroom building (1 BHK), Two bedroom building
with verandah (2 BHK).
5. Earth Work Calculations
Lead and Lift – Initial and subsequent values - Mid-Ordinate Method –
Mean Sectional Area Method – Trapezoidal Rule – Prismoidal Rule for
computing volumes in level sections for roads and Canals - Taking out
quantities from Longitudinal Section and Cross Section in cutting and
embankment of level sections - Capacity of Reservoir from the table of areas
and contours
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering by B.N. Dutta -CBS Publishers and
Distributors Pvt Ltd
2. Estimating and Costing by S. C. Rangwala, Charotar Publishing House Pvt Ltd
3. Estimating Construction Costs by Robert L. Peurifoy & Garold D. Oberlender –
McGraw-Hill Education
MODEL BLUE PRINT

S. No. of Weightage Distribution of Distribution COs
Major Topics Weightage of Weightage Mapped
No periods of marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Introduction,
1. Units and 05 03 03 -- -- -- 1 - - -- CO1
Specifications
Types of
2 estimates of 13 14 -- 06 08 -- -- 2 1 -- CO2
buildings
Detailed
3. 30 22 -- 06 16 -- -- 2 2 -- CO3
estimates
Analysis of
Rates and
4. 15 17 09 08 -- -- 3 1 -- CO3
Abstract
Estimates
Earth work
5. 12 14 -- 06 08 -- -- 2 1 -- CO4
calculations
Higher order
question
from any or CO3 &
-- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1
combination CO4
of 3,4 & 5
Chapters
Total 75 80 03 27 40 10 1 9 5 1
TABLE SPECIFYING THE SCOPE OF SYLLABUS TO BE COVERED FOR UNIT

TEST-I & II

TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING
Course No. of
code period/week
Transportation
C-404 04 60 20 80
Engineering
No. of
S.No. Major Topics COs Mapped
Periods
Introduction to Highways and
1 11 CO1
Geotechnical Engineering.
2 Highway Surveys and Traffic Engineering 11 CO2
Highway Constructions and
3 12 CO3
Maintenances
Introduction and Permanent way of
4 11 CO4
Railways
Station yards and Maintenance of
5 07 CO4
Railways
6 Basics of Bridge Engineering 8 CO5
Total 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the syllabus, the student shall be able to
(i) Understand the functions of various components of roads
and learn the fundamentals of Geotechnical Engineering
(ii) Understand the importance of surveys, alignment
and geometric features of Highways, bridges and Railways.
Course
(iii) Differentiate between types of highway pavements, their
Objectives
construction and maintenance
(iv) Understand the concepts of permanent way, points and
crossings, station yards in railways, basics terms used in
bridge engineering and state different types of bridges.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C-404.1 Explain the technical terms of Geo-technical

Engineering related to highway engineering
CO2 C-404.2 Describe different surveys to be conducted for
Course fixing the alignment of highway.
Outcomes Discuss the (i) construction of roads (ii)
CO3 C-404.3
equipment used for high way construction (iii)
Maintenance of WBM Road
Describe the components of (i) Permanent
CO4 C-404.4 way (ii) Station Yards (iii) Maintenance
measures of a railway track
CO5 C-
Explain the basics of bridge engineering.
404.5
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Introduction to Highways and Geotechnical
Engineering
Outcomes
1.1. State the importance of transportation engineering.
1.2. State the importance of I.R.C & List the functions of I.R.C
1.3. Classify roads as per I.R.C
1.4. Define the terms:
1. Width of pavement, 2. Shoulder,3. Formation width,
4. Right of way, 5. Camber, 6. Gradient,
7. Super elevation, 8. Sight distance.
1.5. Explain the components of a road with a sketc.h.
1.6. State the three types of gradients
1. Ruling gradient, 2. Limiting gradient and
3. Exceptional gradients and their recommended
values.
1.7. State recommended values of gradients by I.R.C
1.8. State the need for providing super elevation and write the
formula for super elevation
1.9 State the need for curves in highways and state the
different types of horizontal curves adopted in road. State
the different types of vertical curves adopted in road
1.10. List physical properties of soils & define the following
properties of soils:
1. Plasticity, 2. Cohesion, 3. Consolidation, 4.
Compaction,
5. Permeability, 6. Compressibility
1.11. State the different systems of classification of soils
&explain the textural classification of soils and I S
Classification of soils.
1.12. Define the following terms:
1. Ultimate bearing capacity of soil,
2. Safe bearing capacity, and
3. Net safe bearing capacity.
2. Highway Survey and Traffic Engineering
2.1. Define alignment of road.
2.2. State the factors influencing selection of alignment for a
road in plain and hilly areas.
2.3. List the surveys required for fixing alignment.
2.4. State the different data required for the preparation of
highway project.
2.5. Explain various engineering surveys conducted to fix the
alignment of a road.
2.6. State the importance of traffic census/traffic surveys.
2.7. List various traffic surveys conducted.
2.8. Explain the following with sketc.hes:
1. Traffic islands
2. Interchanges.
2.9. State types of pavement markings with sketc.hes and
state its functions
2.10. State the purpose of traffic signs. State the
functions of traffic signs with sketc.hes.
3. Highway construction and Maintenance
3.1. State the need for road drainage.
3.2. Explain the methods of providing surface and sub-
surface drainage.
3.3. State the materials used in construction of different types
of roads
3.4. List the tests on Bitumen.
3.5. State the equipment/machinery used in construction of
different roads.
3.6. Explain the methods of construction of different types of
roads.
3.7. Explain the maintenance of WBM of roads.
3.8. Explain the different types of joints used in C.C roads
with sketc.hes.
3.9. State the need for joints in C.C roads.
4. Introduction to Permanent way of Railways

4.1. State the advantages of Railways.
4.2. Define gauge and
4.3. Classify gauges.
4.4. State the component parts of a permanent way
4.5. List the functions of each component parts of a
permanent way
4.6. State the requirements/characteristics of
1. Good rail,
2. Rail joint,
3. Sleeper and
4. Ballast.
4.7. State the different types of
1. Rails,
2. Joints,
3. Rail fittings,
4. Sleepers,
5. Ballast used in Indian Railways with
sketc.hes(where ever required).
5. Station yard and Maintenance of Railways
5.1 Describe different types of turnouts with sketc.hes.
5.2 Describe different types of crossings with sketc.hes
5.3 Classify stations.
5.4 State different maintenance measures of a
railwaytrack.
5.5 State the duties of a permanent way inspector.
6. Basics of Bridge Engineering

6.1. Classify the bridges based on materials, position of
bridge floor and form/type of super structure.
6.2. Define the terms:
1. Waterway,
2. Linear waterway,
3. Afflux,
4. Vertical clearance,
5. Scour depth, and
6. Free board.
6.3. State the factors influencing selection of site for a bridge.
6.4. State component parts of a bridge sub-structure with
sketc.hes
6.5. List the functions of a bridge sub-structure
6.6. Distinguish between deck and through bridge.
6.7. Draw different types of bridge super structures.
6.8. List different types of 1. Causeways and 2. Culverts.
6.9. State suitability of different types of culverts and
causeways.
6.10. Sketc.h different types of causeways and culverts
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction to Highways and Geotechnical Engineering

Importance of transportation engineering- Importance of I.R.C - List the
functions of I.R.C – Classification of roads as per I.R.C – Define (i) Width
ofpavement (ii) Shoulder (iii) Formation width (iv) Right of way (v) Camber
(vi) Gradient (vii) Super elevation and (viii) Sight distance
components of a road - types of gradients and their recommended values by
I.R.C - need for providing super elevation and its formula – Necessity of
curves in highways - types of horizontal curves and vertical curves adopted in
roads – Physical properties of soil like plasticity, cohesion,
consolidation,
compaction, Permeability and compressibility - Soil moisture content –
Specific gravity and density - Types of soils – Residual soil – Transported
soil – sand – silt – clay – peat – Till – Tull – loess – Bentonite –
Soils in India - Different systems of classification of soils – Textural
classification – I S classification of soils - Bearing Capacity –
Definition – Importance in foundation design.
2. Highway Survey and Traffic Engineering
Alignment of Road - Definition - factors influencing selection of alignment for
a road in plain and hilly areas - List the surveys required for fixing alignment -
Different data required for the preparation of highway project - Various
engineering surveys conducted to fix the alignment of a road - Traffic
census/traffic surveys - Importance – Types – Traffic islands and
Interchanges
- types of pavement markings and its functions - purpose of traffic signs and
its functions
3. Highway construction and Maintenance
Necessity of road drainage - Methods of providing surface and sub-surface
drainage - materials used in construction of different types of roads - Tests on
Bitumen - equipment/machinery used in construction of different roads -
Methods of construction of different types of roads - maintenance of WBM of
roads - Different types of joints used in C.C roads - necessity for joints in C.C
roads
4. Introduction and Permanent way of Railways
Railways - advantages – Definition and classification of gauges –
Functions of each component part of a permanent way and its
requirements/characteristics - Different types of 1. Rails, 2. Joints, 3. Rail
fittings, 4. Sleepers, 5. Ballast used in Indian Railways with sketc.hes
(wherever required).
5. Station yard and Maintenance of Railways
Classification of stations - Types of turnouts and crossings with sketc.hes
maintenance measures of a railway track - Duties of a permanent way
inspector.
6. Basics of Bridge Engineering
Classification of bridges based on materials, position of bridge floor and
form/type of super structure - Factors influencing selection of site for a bridge -
Data required for preparation of bridge project. Definitions - 1. Waterway 2.
Linear waterway 3. Afflux 4. Vertical clearance 5. Scour depth, and 6. Free
board - Formulae for economical span and afflux - component parts of a
bridge sub-structure with sketc.hes - Functions of a bridge sub-structure -
Distinguish between deck and through bridge – sketc.hes of different types of
bridge super structures - List different types of 1. Causeways and 2. Culverts -
suitability of different types of culverts - suitability of different types of
causeways – Sketc.hes of different types of causeways – Sketc.hes of
different types of culverts
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Highway Engineering by S. C. Rangwala,Charotar Books Distributors
2. Railway Engineering by S. C. Rangwala,Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
3. Bridge Engineering by S. C. Rangwala,Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
4. Highway Engineering by Khanna and Justo-Nem Chand & Sons
5. Transportation Engineering by L.R.Kadiyali,Khanna Publishing House
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Question
Mark wise wise
Distribution of Distribution
S. Major Topics No of Weightage COs
Weightage of
No periods of Marks Mapped
Weightage
R U Ap An R U A An
Introduction to
1 Highways and 09 03 06 1 2 CO1
11
Geotechnical
Engineering
Highway Surveys
2 andTraffic 11 11 03 08 1 1 CO2
Engineering
Highway
3 Constructionsand 12 14 03 03 08 1 1 1 CO3
Maintenances
Introduction and
4 Permanent way of 14 03 03 08 1 1 1 CO4
11
Railways
Station yardsand
5 Maintenance of 07 03 03 08 1 1 1 CO4
Railways 14
Basics ofBridge 8
6 Engineering 8 08 1 CO5
Higher order
question from any CO2,
or combinationof 10 10 1 CO3,
the chapters2,3,4,5 CO4
Total 60 80 15 23 42 8 8
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I &
Unit Test-II

II
IRRIGATION ENGINEERING
Marks for Marks for
Course Course No. of Total no. of
Formative Summative
code title period/week periods
Irrigation
C-405 04 60 20 80
Engineering
No. of
S. No. Major Topics COs Mapped
Periods
Nature and scope of Irrigation

1. 6 CO1
Engineering
2. 8 CO2
Elements of Hydrology
3. 8 CO2
Head works
4. 12 CO3
Gravity dams and Earth dams
5. 10 CO4
Distribution works
Soil Erosion, Water logging, River
6. Training works and Water 10 CO5
management
7. 6 CO5
Water and Watershed Management
60
Total
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Aware of necessity and scope of Irrigation Engineering,
(i) Hydrology, calculation of average annual rainfall of an
area and maximum flood discharge
Enable to gain knowledge about Storage and diversion
(ii) Head Works, component parts, effect of percolation,
Course Gravity dams and Earthen dams –failures of these dams
Objectives and remedial measures.
Know about the Distribution works, maintenance of
canals, uses of Cross drainage works, causes, effects and
(iii) prevention of Soil erosion, Water logging, types and uses
of river training works, Systems of Water management
and Watershed Management.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C-405.1 Explain various methods of irrigation.

Describe the (i) Elements of Hydrology (ii)Diversion
CO2 C-405.2
and storage head works.
Analyse different types of failures of dams in
Course CO3 C- 405.3
construction
Outcomes Discuss the alignment of canals, cross drainage
CO4 C- 405.4
works and their maintenance
Describe 1. Soil erosion 2. Water logging 3. Systems
CO5 C- 405.5
of Water management and Watershed Management
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Nature and scope of Irrigation
1.1 Define Irrigation
Outcomes
1.2 State the necessity of irrigation.
1.3 List advantages and disadvantages of irrigation.
1.4 State different types of irrigation
1.5 Distinguish between
1. Perennial and inundation irrigation,
2. Flow and Lift irrigation, and
3. Storage and Direct irrigation.
1.6 State Principal crops in India and their seasons and
explain Kharif crops and Rabi Crops
1. Duty,
2. Delta,
3. Base period and
4. Crop period
1.8 Explain different methods of expressing duty
1.9 State the relationship between duty and delta.
1.10 Explain the factors affecting duty
1.11 State the duty figures for principal crops and Solve
simple problems on duty
2.0 Elements of Hydrology
2.1 Describe Hydrological cycle
2.2 Explain the term Precipitation
2.3 State different types of rain gauges and explain the
method of measurement of rainfall using Simon’s Rain
gauge and Float type automatic recording rain gauge
2.4 Explain precautions in setting and maintenance of rain
gauges. State uses of rain fall records
2.5 Explain method of calculation of average annual rainfall of
an area by Theissen’s Polygon method and solve the
problem on calculation of average annual rainfall by
Theissen’s Polygon method
2.6 Define the following:
1. Catchment,
2. Intercepted catchment,
3. Free catchment and
3. Combined catchment area
2.7 State the characteristics of
1. Good catchment,
2. Average catchment and
3. Bad catchment
2.8 Explain the term Run-off and factors affecting runoff
2.9 Explain methods of estimating runoff and solve the
problems on estimating run-off
2.10 Understand the term maximum flood discharge and
explain various methods of determining maximum flood
discharge from rain fall records.
2.11 State Ryve’s and Dicken’s Formulae and solve simple
problems on estimating maximum flood discharge
2.12 Explain the importance of river gauging and lists
the factors for selecting suitable site for a gauging station
3.0 Head works
3.1 Classify the head works and state the suitability of
different types of head works under different conditions
3.2 State the factors for selecting suitable site for diversion
head works
3.3 Describe the component parts of Diversion works with
sketc.h
3.4 Distinguish between barrages and Weirs
3.5 Describe head regulator and scouring sluice with sketc.h
3.6 Describe flood banks and other protective works
3.7 Define the terms: Percolation, Percolation gradient, Uplift,
scour and uplift pressure
3.8 Explain the effects of percolation on irrigation works
4.0 Gravity dams and Earth dams
4.1 Distinguish between Rigid dams and non-rigid dams
4.2 State factors influencing selection of site for reservoirs
and dams.
4.3 Define the terms: Full reservoir level, Maximum water
level, Top bund level, Dead storage, Live storage, Free
board, Gravity dam and Spillway.
4.4 Explain the causes of failure of gravity dams and their
remedies.
4.5 Draw the elementary profile of a gravity dam for a given
height and draw the practical profile of a low dam.
4.6 Explain uplift pressure and explain need for drainage
galleries with sketc.hes
4.7 Explain construction and contraction joints with sketc.hes
4.8 State need and types of grouting of foundations and
explain the method of grouting of foundations in gravity
dams
4.9 State different types of spillways and their suitability and
draw sketc.hes
4.10 State the situations in which earth dams are suitable
4.11 State the three types of earth dams with sketc.hes
oftypical cross sections
4.12 Explain causes of failure of earthen dams and their
precautions
4.13 Explain the terms with sketc.hes Saturation gradient
andPhreatic line
4.14 Explain drainage arrangements in earth dams with a
neat sketc.h
4.15 Explain the maintenance of earth dams
5.0 Distribution works
5.1 Classify canals.
5.2 State the different methods of canal alignment and the
situations
in which each is suitable.
5.4 Sketc.h typical cross sections of canals in cutting,
embankment and
Partial cutting. Explain balanced depth of cutting and
its necessity
5.5 State the need for canal lining and State advantages and
disadvantages of canal linings. Explain different types of
canal linings
5.6 Explain the maintenance required for canals and their
regulation
5.7 Explain Lacey’s regime theory and Kennedy’s silt theory
(only explanation of formulae) (No problems)
5.8 State need for cross drainage works and State different
types of cross masonry works (cross regulator, drainage
& communication) and their objectives.
5.9 Describe the following with sketc.hes
1. Aqueduct,
2. Super passage,
3. Under tunnel, siphon,
4. Level crossing and
5. Inlet and outlet
6.0 Soil erosion, water logging, River training works
6.1 Explain terms: Soil erosion, Reclamation and Water
logging.
6.2 State causes of soil erosion and ill effects of soil erosion
6.3 Explain various methods of prevention of soil erosion.
6.4 State causes of water logging and ill effects of water
logging
6.5 Explain various methods of prevention of water logging
6.6 State methods of land reclamation.
6.7 State different stages of flow of rivers
6.8 Explain characteristics of Delta Rivers
6.9 Explain term meandering of river
6.10 State objectives of river training works and explain
various types of groynes and bell’s bunds with sketc.hes
7.0 Water and watershed management
7.1 State soil-water plant relationship.
7.2 Describe the following irrigation methods: Broader
irrigation, Check basin irrigation, Furrow irrigation,
Sprinkler irrigation and Drip irrigation
7.3 Explain on farm development and Describe 1. Warabandi
system and 2. Water user associations
7.4 State the duties of water user associations
7.5 Explain the concept of Water shed and Water shed
management
7.6 State need for watershed development in India and
Describe different approaches to water shed management
7.7 Explain water harvesting and explain methods of 1. Rain
water harvesting and 2. Catchment harvesting
7.8 Explain soil moisture conservation methods
7.9 Explain method of water harvesting through check dams
7.10 Explain different methods of artificial recharge of
ground water
7.11 Explain artificial recharges of ground water using
percolation tanks
COURSE CONTENT
1. Nature and scope of Irrigation Engineering
Definitions- Necessity of irrigation - Advantages and disadvantages -

Perennial and Inundation irrigation - Flow and Lift Irrigation-Direct and
Storage irrigation.
Principal crops - Kharif and Rabi crops -Dry and wet crops - Definition of
duty, delta, base period, and crop period, Duty-different methods of
expressing duty-base period-relationship between duty and delta- factors
affecting duty – Requirements for precise statement of duty - Duty figures
for principal crops-simple problems on duty.
2. Elements of Hydrology
Precipitation – Types of rain gauges – Simon’s rain gauge - Float
type automatic - recording gauge – precautions in setting and maintenance
– rain fall records – Hydrological cycle-average annual rainfall of an
area - Theissen’s polygon method.
Catchment basin in catchment area - Free catchment - combined catchment
- Intercepted catchment – Run- off - Factors affecting run-off - Nature of
catchment, run off coefficient - Methods of estimating run off - Empirical
formulae Maximum flood discharge - Methods of determining maximum
flood discharge from rainfall records, Ryve’s and Dicken’s formulae, H.F.L
Marks, Gauge reading – Simple problems on M.F.D. - River gauging –
Importance –Site selection for river gauging
3. Head Works
Classification of head works - Storage and diversion, head works - their
suitability under different conditions - Suitable site for diversion works -
General layout of diversion works-brief description of component parts of
diversion works, brief description of component parts of a weir - Barrages
and Weirs.
Head Regulator-scouring sluice-flood banks and other protective works.
Percolation -Percolation gradient-uplift pressures - Effect of percolation on
irrigation works.
4. Gravity dams and Earth dams

Dams - Rigid and non-rigid dams - main gravity dams-failures of gravity
dams and remedial measures - elementary profile – limiting height of dam
- low dam and high dam - free board and top width – Practical profiles of
low dam - uplift pressure - drainage gallery - Contraction joints - Grouting
of foundations - spillways
Earth dams – situations suitable for Earth Dams - Types of earth dams -
Causes of failure of earth dams and precautions – Saturation gradient
and phreatic line-drainage arrangements - Construction details of earth dams
- breaching sections - breach filling - Maintenance of earth dams.
5. Distribution works
Canals-classification-different methods of canal alignment-typical cross
section of canal in cutting, embankment, partial cutting and embankment
– Berms - standard dimensions - balancing depth of cutting - canal lining
- Necessity - types – Maintenance of canals.
Lacey’s regime Silt Theory and Kennedy’s Silt Theory (only explanation of
formulae)- Comparison of two theories (No problems)
Cross drainage works - Necessity – General description of aqueducts –
Super passage – Under tunnel - siphon level crossing- Inlet and outlet.
6. Soil erosion, Water logging and River Training works

Soil erosion-methods of prevention of soil erosion-causes and effects- of
water logging-preventing water logging methods-land reclamation - Different
stages of flow of rivers-characteristics of Delta Rivers - Meandering - Object
of river training - River training works- List out the various types of groynes
and Bell’s bunds.
7. Water and Watershed management

Soil - water plant relationship -Irrigation methods-Broader Irrigation, check
basin irrigation-Furrow Irrigation-Sprinkler irrigation-Drip irrigation –
farm
development, water user associations & Warabandi system, Concept of
Watershed Management – Objectives of watershed Management – Need for
watershed development in India – Integrated and multidisciplinary approach
for water shed management, Water Harvesting: Rainwater harvesting,
Catchment harvesting – Soil moisture conservation – Check dams –
Artificialrecharges and percolation tanks.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Irrigation and Water Power Engineering, B.C. Punmia, Dr. Pande B.B. Lal,
Ashok Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain – Laxmi Publication.
2. Irrigation and Water Power Engineering Das and Madan Mohan Das & Mimi
Das Saikia , PHI Publication
3. Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic structures, Santhosh Kumar Garg ,
KHANNA PUBLISHERS
4. Irrigation Engineering, N NBasak , McGrawHill Publications
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Mark wise Question wise
S. Chapter Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution COs
No Name allocated allotted Weightage of Weightage Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Nature and
scope of CO1
1. 6 3 8 -- 1 -- 1 --
Irrigation
17 --
Engineering
Elements of CO2
2. 8 3 3 -- 1 -- 1 --
Hydrology
3. Head works 8 11 3 -- 8 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO2
Gravity dams
4. and Earth 12 14 6 -- 8 -- 2 -- 1 -- CO3
dams
Distribution 14 CO4
5. 10 6 -- 8 -- 2 -- 1 --
works
Soil Erosion,
Water
logging,
River CO5
6. 10 14 3 8 -- -- 1 1 -- --
Training
works and
Water
management
Water and
7. Watershed 6 3 -- -- 1 -- -- -- CO5
Management
Higher
order
question
from any or 10 -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1 CO3,CO4
combination
of the
chapters 4,5
Total 60 80 27 8 35 10 9 1 5 1

TEST-I & II

CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING – II
Total No. Marks for Marks for

Course No. of
Course Title of Formative Summative
code periods/week
Civil
C-406 Engineering 06 90 40 60
Drawing –
II
No. of
S.No. Chapter/Unit title Name COs Mapped
periods
1. Culverts & Bridges 30 CO1
2. Public health engineering drawings 15 CO2
3. Irrigation drawings 45 CO3
Total Periods 90
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1 Prepare to scale the different views of culverts, T-beam bridge,
Course public health buildings and basic irrigation engineering
drawings.
Objectives
2 Impart skills to student to prepare different views of Irrigation
Engineering & Public Health Engineering works using CAD.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Draw plan, cross section and longitudinal
C-406.1
section of Culverts and Bridges from given data
Draw plan, cross section and longitudinal
CO2 section of Public health engineering works viz.,
C-406.2
Septic tank, Sanitary block, Overhead tank for a
Course given set of specifications
Outcomes
Draw Plan, cross section and Longitudinal
CO3 section of Earthen bund, Tank surplus weir,
C-406.3
Canal drop, Tank sluice with tower head and
canal regulator for a given set of specifications
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Culverts & T-Beam bridges
Outcomes 1.1 Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal
sectional elevation of 1.Pipe culvert, 2. R.C.C slab culvert
1.2 Identify the component parts of the pipe culvert and R.C.C.
slab culvert from the given set of specifications.
1.3 Label the component parts of a given R.C.C.T-beam bridge
1.4 Draw the sectional elevation, plan and cross section of
Twospan R.C.C. T-beam bridge with square wing walls & with
splayed wing and return walls from the set of given specifications
2.0 Public health Engineering works
2.1 Label the component parts of given Public health
engineering structures
2.2 Draw the sectional elevation, plan and cross section of Public
health Engineering works viz., septic tank, sanitary block, overhead
tank, from the set of given specifications
3.0 Irrigation Engineering structures
3.1 Label the component parts of given Irrigation Engineering
different Irrigation engineering structures bridge from the set of given
specifications
COURSE CONTENT
1. Simple Culverts & Bridges
Draw the plan, cross-sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation of
1. Pipe culvert (Single Pipe)
2. R.C.C slab culvert with square returns.
3. R.C.C slab culvert with splayed wings
4. Two-Span R.C.C T-beam bridge with square return walls
5. Two-Span R.C.C T-beam bridge with splayed wing walls and return walls
2. Public health engineering drawings
1. Septic tank with details of connections to a dispersion trench/soak pit
2. Sanitary block for a public building
3. R.C.C. rectangular/square overhead tanks
3. Irrigation engineering drawings
1. Earthen bunds – Three types.
a) Homogeneous type b) Zoned embankment type c) Diaphragm type
2. Tank surplus weir with splayed wing walls.
3. Canal drop (Notch type)
4. Head sluice (Head wall type)
5. Tank sluice with tower head.
6. Canal regulator
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Civil Engineering Drawing-II by N.Srinivasulu -Radiant Publishing House
2. Civil Engineering Drawing-II by M.Chakraborthy -UBS Publications
3. Civil Engineering Drawing-II by Bajaj,Kataria& Raheja -North publication
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Question
Marks wise
wise
No. of Weightag Distribution of CO’s
S. Major Distribution
period e of Weightage Mappe
N Top of Weightage
o ics s marks d
A A A A
R U R U
p n p n
Culverts & 2
1. 30 20 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- CO1
Bridges 0
Public
health 1
2. 15 10 -- -- -- -- 1 -- -- CO2
engineerin 0
g drawings
Irrigation 3
3. 45 30(10+20) -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- CO3
drawings 0
6
Total 90 60 6
0
Note: In question paper Part-A consists of two questions of 10 marks each, one from
Public health
Engineering drawings and other from Irrigation drawings. Part-B consists of two
questions of 20 marks each, one from Culverts & Bridges and other from Irrigation
drawings.
CONCRETE & SOIL TESTING PRACTICE
Total no. Marks for Marks for
Course Course No. of
of Formative Summative
code title period/week
Concrete &
Soil
C-407 04 60 40 60
Testing
Practice
S. No. of COs
Major Topics
No. Periods Mapped
1. Tests on Aggregates 16 CO1
2. Tests on Concrete 20 CO2
3. Non-Destructive Tests 8 CO3
4. Tests on Soils 16 CO4
Total 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Familiarize with the knowledge of different materials and tools
used in Concrete and Soil Testing.
(ii) Use various basic implements used in testing of various Civil
Course
Engineering construction materials.
Objectives
(iii) Know the etiquette of working with the fellow work force
(iv) Reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
COURSE OUTCOMES
Determine the Specific Gravity of fine and coarse
CO1 C- aggregate, Impact value, Crushing value, Abrasion
407.1 value, Flakiness index and Elongation index of coarse
aggregate
Perform the Workability test of concrete by Slump Cone
CO2 C- Test, Compaction factor test and determines the
Course
407.2 compressive strength and the split tensile strength of
Outcomes
concrete and learns to Design a concrete mix
Perform the Rebound hammer test and Ultrasonic Tests
CO3 C-
on concrete to know the strength and durability of
407.3
concrete structures
CO4 C-
Perform various tests on soil to know its properties
407.4
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Tests on Aggregate

Learning 1.1 Specific Gravity of fine and coarse aggregate
Outcomes  Study the importance of specific gravity of fine and
coarse aggregate
 State the range of specific gravity values for various
naturally available fine and coarse aggregate
 Use the apparatus required for conducting
specificgravity test on both fine and coarse
aggregate
 Perform the specific gravity tests for both fine
andcoarse aggregate
1.2 Impact value of coarse aggregate

 Study the significance of impact value of aggregate used
for road construction
 State the standards on impact value of aggregate used
for various civil engineering works as per IS-383
 Use the apparatus required for conducting impact test
on aggregate
 State the procedure for preparing the sample and no.
ofsamples required for the given work
 Explain the procedure for conducting impact test on
aggregate
 Perform impact test on given sample of coarse
aggregate
 Draw inferences by conducting impact test on different
types of natural aggregate
1.3 Crushing value of coarse aggregate

 Study the significance of crushing value of aggregate
used for various civil engineering works
 State the standards on crushing value of aggregate
used for various civil engineering works as per IS-383
 Use the apparatus required for conducting crushing test
on aggregate
 State the procedure for preparing the sample and no.
ofsamples required for the given work
 Explain the procedure for conducting crushing test on
aggregate
 Perform crushing test on a given sample of coarse
aggregate
 Draw inferences by conducting crushing test on different
1.4 Abrasion value of coarse aggregate
 Study the significance of abrasion value of aggregate
used for various civil engineering works
 State the standards on abrasion value of aggregate
used for various civil engineering works as per IS-383
 Use the apparatus required for conducting abrasion test
on aggregate
 State the procedure for preparing the sample and no. of
samples required for the given work
 Explain the procedure for conducting abrasion test on
aggregate
 Perform abrasion test on given sample of coarse
aggregate
 Draw inferences by conducting abrasion test on different
1.5 Flakiness Index of coarse aggregate
 Study the significance of flakiness index of aggregate on
strength and workability properties of concrete
 State the standards on flakiness index of aggregate
 Use the apparatus required for conducting flakiness
index of coarse aggregate
 Explain the procedure for conducting the flakiness index
test on coarse aggregate
 Determine the flakiness index of a given sample of
coarse aggregate
1.6 Elongation Index of coarse aggregate
 Study the significance of elongation Index of aggregate
on strength and workability properties of concrete
 State the standards on elongation Index of aggregate
 Use the apparatus required for conducting elongation
Index of coarse aggregate
 Explain the procedure for conducting the elongation
Index test on coarse aggregate
 Determine the flakiness index of a given sample of
coarse aggregate
2.0 Tests on concrete
 Determine suitability of fresh and hardened concrete for
the given conditions of workability and strength
 Study the importance of workability on strength
properties of concrete
 State various types of tests used for measuring the
workability of fresh concrete
 State standards on workability of concrete used for
different places of construction work
2.1 Slump cone test
 Use apparatus required for conducting slump test
 Explain the procedure for conducting slump test of
workability
 Perform slump test on the concrete made of given
sample of ingredients
 Draw inference from test results on slump test of
workability of concrete made with coarse aggregate
having different elongation index
 Draw inference from test results on slump test of
workability of concrete made with coarse aggregate
having different flakiness index
 Compare the slumps of concrete made with gap graded
coarse aggregate and well graded coarse aggregate
 Study the changes in workability with different water-
cement ratios
 Study the changes in workability by adding dry cement
to poorly workable concrete
2.2 Compaction factor test
 State the purpose of compaction of concrete
 Use apparatus required for conducting compaction
factor test
 Explain the procedure for conducting compaction factor
test of workability
 Perform compaction factor test on the concrete made of
given sample of ingredients
 Draw inference from test results on compaction factor
test of workability of concrete made with coarse
aggregate having different elongation index values
 Draw inference from test results on compaction factor
test of workability of concrete made with coarse
aggregate having different flakiness index values
 Compare the compaction factors of concrete made with
gap graded coarse aggregate and that made with well
graded coarse aggregate
 Study the changes in compaction factor of a poorly
workable concrete by admixtures
 Study the methods of enhancing workability of concrete
without using any admixtures
2.3 Casting of Cement concrete cubes
 Study the purpose of casting of concrete cubes
 Use equipment required for casting of cement concrete
cubes
 Explain the procedure for casting concrete cubes
 Cast the concrete cubes with given ingredients
2.4 Testing of cement concrete cubes for compression
 Study the importance of testing concrete cubes
 Use equipment required for conducting compression
test concrete cubes
 State the precautions to be taken for testing of concrete
cubes
 Explain the procedure for conducting compression test
on concrete cubes
 Draw inference from test results on compressive
strength of concrete cubes made with coarse aggregate
having different elongation index values
 Draw inference from test results on compressive
strength of concrete cubes made with coarse aggregate
having different flakiness index values
 Compare the compressive strengths of concrete cubes
of concrete made with gap graded coarse aggregate
and that made with well graded coarse aggregate
 Compare the compressive strengths of concrete cubes
made and cured with potable water and concrete cubes
made and cured with non-potable water
2.5 Split Tensile Strength of concrete
 Study the importance of split tensile strength of concrete
 Cast the concrete cylinders with given ingredients
 Explain the procedure for conducting split tensile
strength test on concrete cylinders
 Perform split tensile strength test on concrete cylinder
2.6 Design mix of concrete proportion as per IS: 10262
– 2009
 Study the various elements of design mix of concrete as
per IS:10262-2009
 Conduct tests to find specific gravity, bulk density and
sieve analysis of aggregate for the preparation of design
mix of concrete
 Write the procedure for design mixing of concrete
 Calculate the proportions of ingredients of concrete as
per IS:10262-2009
 Cast cubes of trail mixes to decide the proportion of
concrete
 Perform the compression tests on concrete cubes
casted as per design mix
3.0 Non-Destructive Tests on concrete
 State the importance of non-destructive tests
 State the apparatus/equipment required for the non-
destructive tests
 Explain the procedure for conducting non-destructive
tests
 Perform the non-destructive tests like Rebound hammer
tests, ultrasonic tests on the given hardened concrete
 Record the observations of tests
 Draw the inferences from the test results
4.0 Tests on Soils
4.1 Sieve Analysis – Classification of soil
 Study the classification of various types of soils
 Use apparatus required for conducting sieve analysis of
soils
 Explain the procedure for conducting sieve analysis of
soils
 Perform sieve analysis over a given soil sample
4.2 Atterberg Limits of Soil
 Study the significance of Atterberg limits of soil in civil
engineering activities
 Study Atterberg limits of soils
 Use apparatus required for conducting tests to
determine Atterberg limits of soil
 Explain the procedure for conducting (a) Liquid Limit (b)
Plastic Limit (c) Shrinkage Limit tests
 Perform Limit Test, Plastic Limit Test & Shrinkage Limit
Test over given sample of soil
 Compare the observations of tests conducted on
different types of soils
 Calculate the Plasticity Index value of a given soil
sample from the observations of test
 Classify given soil sample based on sieve analysis and
Atterberg limits
4.3 Field Density of soil (Sand Replacement Method)
 Study the significance of field density of soil
 Use the apparatus required for conducting field density
of soil
 Explain the procedure for conducting field density test
on soil by sand replacement method
 Perform field density test of soil by sand replacement
method
4.4 Proctor Compaction Test
 Study the significance of proctor compaction test
 Use the apparatus required for conducting Proctor’s
compaction test
 Explain the procedure for conducting Proctor
compaction test
 Perform Proctor compaction test over given sample of
soil
 Compare the observations of tests conducted on
different types of soils
 Draw the graph for Proctor’s compaction test
 Calculate the values OMC and MDD of given soil
sample from the observations of test
S. Key Competency
Experiment Title Competencies
No
 Take weights of empty  Take weights of
pycnometer, pycnometer empty pycnometer,
Specific Gravity of with water and pycnometer pycnometer with
1 fine and coarse with aggregate accurately water and
 Record the observations pycnometer with
aggregate
accurately aggregate accurately
 Calculate the values
correctly
 Prepare of sample
correctly
Impact value of  Weigh the cup and
2 aggregate accurately
coarse aggregate
 Count number of strokes
accurately
 Weigh residue retained on
2.36 mm sieve correctly
 Prepare of sample  Apply the load at
correctly required rate and to
 Weigh the mould and the required period
Crushing value of aggregate accurately accurately
3 coarse aggregate  Apply the load at required
rate and to the required
period accurately
2.36 mm sieve correctly
 Weigh the aggregate
Abrasion value of accurately
4 coarse aggregate  Count the required number
of rotations correctly
1.70 mm sieve accurately
 Arrangement of sieves in
Flakiness Index of correct order
5 coarse aggregate  Weighing the aggregate
passing through thickness
gauge correctly
Elongation Index  Arrange the sieves in
of coarse correct order
6  Weigh the aggregate
aggregate
retaining over length
gauge correctly
 Weigh the material  Measure the
accurately subsidence
Slump cone test  Apply required no. of accurately
7 tampings for each layer of
on concrete
concrete
 Measure the subsidence
accurately
 Weigh the material
accurately
8
Compaction factor  Weigh the mould and
test on concrete concrete accurately
 Calculate the compactor
factor correctly
 Weigh the material  Weigh the material
accurately accurately
Casting of  Vibrate the concrete filled  Vibrate the concrete
9 Cement concrete in moulds to the required filled in moulds to the
cubes time correctly required time
 Cure the demoulded cubes correctly
to the required period
 Apply the load at required  Apply the load at
Testing of cement rate correctly required rate
10 concrete cubes for  Record the load at correctly
FAILURE accurately
compression  Calculate the compressive
strength accurately
 Apply the load at
 Apply the load at required
required rate
Split Tensile rate correctly
correctly
 Record the load at
11 Strength of  Calculate the split
FAILURE accurately
concrete tensile strength
 Calculate the split tensile accurately
strength accurately
Design mix of  Calculate the proportions  Calculate the

of material correctly proportions of
concrete
12  Weigh the ingredients of material correctly
proportion concrete accurately as per
design mix calculations
 Applying the load at  Applying the load at
Non-destructive required rate as per required rate as per
13 tests on concrete procedure correctly procedure correctly
 Calculating the strength of
hardened concrete from
graphs accurately
 Arrangement of sieves in
Sieve Analysis correct order
14 –Classification  Sieving the soil to the
required time
of soil
 Weigh of residue in each
sieve accurately
 Weigh the material
accurately
 Prepare the soil sample
and place in the mould
correctly
15 Atterberg Limits
 Count the blows correctly
 Record the readings
accurately
 Draw the graphs
accurately
 Calibrate the apparatus  Calibrate the
Field Density of correctly apparatus correctly
16
soil(Sand  Weigh the samples  Weigh the samples
Replacement accurately accurately
Method)  Calculate the density
accurately
 Weigh the soil correctly  Weigh the soil
 Measure the water correctly
accurately  Measure the water
17
Proctor  Apply required no. of blows accurately
Compaction Test of compaction accurately  Draw graph correctly
 Record the observations
correctly
 Draw graph correctly
COURSE CONTENT
1. Tests on aggregate
a. Specific Gravity of fine and coarse aggregate
b. Impact value of coarse aggregate
c. Crushing value of coarse aggregate
d. Abrasion value of coarse aggregate
e. Flakiness index of coarse aggregate
f. Elongation index of coarse aggregate
2. Tests on concrete
a. Workability test by Slump Cone Test
b. Workability test by Compaction factor test
c. Casting of Cement concrete cubes
d. Testing of Cement concrete cubes for compression
e. Split tensile strength of concrete
f. Design mix of concrete proportion
3. Non-destructive tests on concrete
a. Surface hardness of concrete by Rebound hammer test
b. Ultrasonic Test
4. Tests on Soil
a. Sieve analysis-classification of soil.
b. Atterberg Limits
c. Field density of soil by sand replacement method
d. Proctor Compaction Test
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Concrete Technology, M.S. Shetty & A.K. Jain, S.CHAND Publication
2. Concrete Technology, M.L. Gambhir , McGrawHill Publications.
3. Soils Mechanics and Foundations, B.C. Punmia, Dr. Ashok K. Jain &Dr.
Arun K. Jain, Laxmi Publications
4. Engineering Properties of soils and their measurement, Joseph E.
Bowles, McGraw Hill Book Company.
Communication Skills
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks

Code Periods/Wee Periods for FA for SA
k
C-408 Communicatio 3 45 40 60
n Skills
No of
S.
Unit Title Periods COs Mapped
No.
1 Listening Skills 6 CO1
2 Introducing Oneself 3 CO1, CO2, CO3
3 Short Presentation (JAM) 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
4 Group Discussion 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
Preparing Resume with Cover
5 3 CO3
Letter
6 Interview Skills 9 CO1, CO2, CO3
7 Presentation Skills 9 CO1, CO2
8 Work place Etiquette 3 CO1, CO2
Total Periods 45
To comprehend the features of communication needed for

professional success and display the use of these competently
Course
To present ideas, opinions in group discussions and
Objectives
presentations on topics of general and technical interest
To prepare for job selection processes

CO1 Interacts in academic and social situations by comprehending what is
listened to when others speak.
CO2 Demonstrates effective English communication skills while presenting
ideas, opinions in group discussions and presentations on topics of
general and technical interest.
CO3 Exhibits workplace etiquette relevant in classroom situations for easy
adaptation in professional setting in the future.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:
Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following
parameters of communication in the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource (Vocabulary)
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Good/ Competent / Fair /Poor' for Communication
LEVEL OF Fluency and Lexical Grammatical

COMPETENCE Coherence Resource Range and
(Vocabulary) Accuracy
Speaks at length Uses vocabulary Uses a range of

without noticeable effort resources flexibly complex structures
or loss of coherence. during discussion. with some flexibility.
May demonstrate Uses paraphrase
language-related effectively.
hesitation at times, or
some repetition and/or
GOOD self-correction.
(9-10*) Uses a range of Uses some less Mostly produces
connectives and common error-free
discourse markers with vocabulary and sentences.
some flexibility. shows some
Articulates and awareness of
adapts to near style and
naturalization. collocation
Is willing to speak at Has enough Uses a mix of

length, though may vocabulary to simple and complex
lose coherence at times discuss topics structures, but with
due to occasional and make limited flexibility.
repetition, self- meaning clear in
COMPETENT correction or hesitation. spite of
inappropriacies.
(6-8)
Uses a range of Generally May make mistakes
connectives and paraphrases with complex
discourse markers but successfully structures though
not always these rarely cause
appropriately. comprehension
problems.
Tries to maintain a flow Manages to talk Produces only basic
of speech but t uses about familiar and sentence forms,
repetition, self- unfamiliar topics however, errors
correction and/or slow but uses persist.
speech to keep going. vocabulary with
limited flexibility.
FAIR
Produces simple Attempts to use Uses a limited range
(3-5)
speech fluently, but paraphrase but of more complex
more complex with mixed structures, but these
communication causes success. usually contain
fluency problems. errors and may
cause some
comprehension
problems
Speaks with long Uses simple Attempts basic

pauses. Pauses vocabulary to sentence forms but
lengthy before most convey personal with limited success,
words. Merely imitates information or relies on
apparently
memorized
POOR utterances
(0 *-2) Has limited ability to Has insufficient Makes numerous
link simple sentences vocabulary for errors except in
less familiar memorized
topics expressions
Gives only simple Only produces Struggles to
responses and is isolated words or produce basic
frequently unable to memorized sentence forms
convey basic message utterances
*10 marks to be awarded only if competence level shows flawless expertise in

English.
*0 marks to be awarded when student shows incoherence and gives irrelevant
responses.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.
Perio Marks allotment for each Mapping
ds Marks Student in the Rubric* of COs
Questions based Alloc Wise
S. on Course ated Distribut Poo Compete Goo
Fair
No Outcomes for ion of r nt d
3-5
pract Weighta 0-2 6-8 9-10
ical ge
work
1 Describe the given CO 2
6 10
object in a minute
Exchange ideas/ CO1, CO
views in a group 2
discussion on
2 6 10
issue
(academic,
technical or social )
Present your ideas CO1,
/opinions on the CO2, CO
3 given issue/ topic 9 10 3
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1,
4 imaginary work- 6 10 CO2, CO
place situation 3
Individual CO1,
interaction with the CO2, CO
Examiner duly 3
submitting Resume
5 ( Facing the 12 10
Interview) –
Introducing oneself
and answering
questions
*Listen to and CO1,
comprehend any CO2, CO
6 audio 6 10 3
communication/
content
TOTAL 45 60
*Listen to and comprehend the given audio content: Giving the Students time to
read the questions (Fill in the Blanks, Select from Alternatives, True or False, Table
fill, etc..) in chunks before listening to audio inputs also played in chunks.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for Formative

Assessment:
Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following
parameters in the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence

 Lexical Resource
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy
Marks Marks allotment for each Mapping

Periods Wise Student in the Rubric* of COs
Questions based
S. Allocat Distrib
on Course Poo Compete Goo
No ed for ution Fair
Outcomes r nt d
. practic of 3-5
0-2 6-8 9-10
al work Weight
age
Formative Assessment - 1
Describe the given 10
1 3
object in a minute CO 2
Exchange ideas/
2 views in a group CO1, CO
discussion on 6 10 2
issue
(Academic,
technical or social)
Present your ideas

/opinions on the CO1,
3
given issue/ topic 6 10 CO2, CO
(individual to an 3
audience)
4 *Listen to and
comprehend any CO1,
audio 3 10 CO2, CO
communication/ 3
content
Total 18 40
Formative Assessment -2
Present your ideas
1 /opinions on the
given issue/ topic 10
3
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1,
2 imaginary work- CO2, CO
6 10
place situation 3
Individual
interaction with the
Examiner duly CO1,
submitting CO2, CO
3 Resume (Facing 3
15 10
the Interview) –
Introducing
oneself and
answering
questions
*Listen to and
comprehend any CO1,
4 audio 10 CO2, CO
3
communication/ 3
content
TOTAL 27 40
Learning Outcomes
1. Listening Skills:
1.1 Listen to audio content (dialogues, interactions, speeches, short
presentations) and answer questions based on them
1.2 Infer meanings of words / phrases / sentences / after listening to audio
content as mentioned above
2. Introducing Oneself:
2.1 Prepare a grid different aspect for presentation about a person /
oneself
2.2 Present a 1- or 2-minute introduction of oneself for an audience
3. Short Presentation:
3.1 Define an object
3.2 Describe an object, phenomenon, event, people
3.3 Speak on a topic randomly chosen
4. Group Discussion:
4.1 Practice Group Discussion. Techniques
4.2 Participate in group discussions
5. Resume Writing and Cover Letter:
5.1 Prepare resumes of different sorts – one’s own and others.
5.2 Write an effective cover letter that goes with a resume
6. Interview Skills:
6.1 Prepare a good Curriculum Vitae
6.2 Exhibit acceptable (Greeting, Thanking, Answering questions with
confidence)
7. Presentation Skills:
7.1 Prepare Posters, Charts, PPT’s on issue of general and technical
interest
7.2 Present one’s ideas before an audience with confidence using audio
visual aids and answer questions that are raised.
8. Workplace Etiquette:
8.1 Show positive attitude & adaptability / appropriate body language to
suit the work place
8.2 Display basic of etiquette like politeness, good manners.
SURVEYING – III PRACTICE
Course No. of
code periods/week
40 (30 for
class
Surveying-III
C-409 04 60 exercises + 60
Practice
10 for survey
camp)
S.No. Major Topics No. of Periods
1 Field Exercises using Total Station 48
2 Global Positioning System 8
3 Digitization of Maps 4
Total 60
4 Survey camp for 3 days during 6 AM to 12 3 days
noon & 2PM to 5 PM on each day immediately (additional
after completion of exercises on Total station instructional
(25% of total sessional marks shall be duration &
allocated to this activity) NOT to be
included in the
above 60
periods)
Survey Camp: one of the following Surveying activities involving Total Station
operations shall be allotted to one or two batches of the students:
a) Land Survey
b) Road Survey
c) Contour Survey
d) Other Surveys
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Develop knowledge about Modern surveying instruments
& methods adopted to carry out Field Survey with a
Course professional approach.
Objectives
(ii) Develop skills in students in using Total Station, GPS and
acquire knowledge in digitization of Maps
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C- Apply the knowledge of Total Station in different

Course 409.1 operations in Civil Engineering projects
Outcomes CO2 C- Perform precise operations/skills involved in using
409.2 GPS and digitization of Maps.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0. Field Exercises using Total Station
1.1 Study of component parts, accessories and functions
Outcomes
Total Station, Initialization of Total Station over ground
station and measure the distance between two given
points, Measure area of given field.
1.2 Conduct traversing survey (closed Traverse).
1.3 Find the Height and width of an elevated object.
1.4 Determine the elevation of Instrument point by making
observation to point with known elevation and measure
multiple sets (rounds) of observations.
1.5 Perform a station setup on a known point by making
observations to one or more back sight points and
establish the position of an occupied point relative to a
base line or a boundary line.
1.6 Mark or establish points, Lines and Arcs on the
ground.
1.7 Mark Centre line of a building on the ground.
1.8 Conduct survey for L.S and C.S of a proposed
road/canal/pipe line on the ground.
1.9 Perform post processing.
1.10 Plot contour map of an area using surfer software.
2.0. Global Positioning System

2.1 Identify the components and the functions of Global
Positioning System.
2.2 Determine the Coordinates of various points on the
ground.
2.3 Perform the linking the G.P.S data with Total Station.
3.0. Digitization of Maps

3.1 Study the concept of digitization.
3.2 Digitization of any given contour map Using the
available soft wares
3.3 Digitization of given Town map and creating different
layers for roads, railways, water supply lines and
drainage lines etc.., Using the available soft wares
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Field Exercises using Total Station
a) Study of component parts, accessories and functions Total Station,
Initialization of Total Station over ground station and measure the distance
between two given points, Measure area of given field.
b) Conduct traversing survey (closed Traverse).
c) To find Height and width of an elevated object.
d) To determine the elevation of Instrument point by making observation to
point with known elevation, to measure multiple sets (rounds) of
observations.
e) To perform a station setup on a known point by making observations to
one or more back sight points and to establish the position of an occupied
point relative to a base line or a boundary line.
f) To mark or establish points, Lines and Arcs on the ground.
g) To mark Centre line of a building on the ground.
h) L.S and C.S of proposed road/canal/pipe line on the ground.
i) Understand post processing.
j) To plot contour map of an area using surfer software.
2.0 Global Positioning System

a) Identifies the components and the functions of Global Positioning System.
b) Determines the Coordinates of various points on the ground.
c) Linking the G.P.S data with Total Station.
3.0 Digitization of Maps

a) Study the concept of digitization.
b) Digitization of any given contour map Using the available soft wares
c) Digitization of given Town map and creating different layers for roads,
railways, water supply lines and drainage lines etc.., Using the
availablesoft wares

1 Field Exercises  Places total station on tripod, checks batteries
using Total Station and switches on total station
a) Ex 1.1  Centering of total station over a given point
b) Ex 1.2 andsighting reflecting prism to measure
distance
c) Ex 1.3
 Measure area of given field
d) Ex 1.4  Conduct traversing survey (closed Traverse)
e) Ex 1.5 andgets plotting
f) Ex 1.6  Finds Height and width of an elevated object
g) Ex 1.7  Finds the elevation of Instrument point by making
h) Ex 1.8 observation to point with known elevation
i) Ex 1.9  Understands errors by taking multiple sets
(rounds) of observations
 Knows station setup on a known point by making
observations to one or more back sight points
 Establish the position of an occupied point
relative to a base line or a boundary line
 Establish points, Lines and Arcs on the ground
 Locates Centre line of a building on the ground
 Collects data for L.S and C.S of
proposed road/canal/pipe line on the
ground
 Understand post processing
 Plots contour map of an area using
SURFERsoftware
2 Global Positioning  Identifies the parts and the functions and
System learnsoperating GPS
a) Ex 2.1  Determines the Coordinates of various points
onthe ground
b) Ex 2.2  Linking the G.P.S data with Total Station
c) Ex 2.3
3 Digitization of Maps  Understands software
a) Ex 3.1  Digitizes of any given contour map using
available software.
b) Ex 3.2  Digitizes of given Town map and creating
different layers for roads, railways, water supply
lines and drainage lines etc.., Using the available
c) Ex 3.3
software.
CAD PRACTICE-I

Course No. of
code periods/week
C-410 CAD Practice-I 06 90 40 60
No. of COs
S. No. CHAPTER/UNIT TITLE
Periods Mapped
1. Introduction to Computer Aided Drafting CO1
12
2. Practice on CAD software 24 CO2
Preparation of 2-D drawings for residential
3. buildings using CAD Software as per building
36 CO3
bye laws in Panchayat /
Municipality/Corporation
4 Preparation of 3-D drawings using CAD software 18 CO4
Total
90
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Know the importance of Computer Aided Drafting (CAD)

and to Practice CAD, drawing editor and to perform different
Course operations using CAD Commands
(ii) Prepare drawings of different components of building, site
Objectives
plans, single storeyed buildings, line drawings of public &
industrial buildings, working drawings by using CAD 2D and
3D.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Dimensions a given drawing using standard notation

CO1 C-410.1 and desired system of dimensioning, Practices drawing
different components of buildings.
Practices drawing plan, elevation and section and site
CO2 C-410.2 plan of residential buildings, and framed structures as
Course
per local bye laws
Outcomes
Practices drawings to be submitted to
CO3 C-410.3 Panchayat/Municipality/Corporation for Residential and
Commercial building approval
CO4 C-410.4 Practices 3-D drawings using CAD software
LEARNING OUTCOMES: `
Learning 1.0 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
Outcomes  State the applications and advantages of CAD
 State the advantages of CAD
 State the features of CAD as drafting package
 State the hardware requirements to run CAD
2.0 PRACTICE ON CAD SOFTWARE

 Study the drawing editor screen.
 Practice the methods of selecting/entering commands to

start new drawing accessing CAD commands by
selecting from menus, tool bars and entering Commands
on command line.
 Set the limits of the drawing to get the needed working
area.
 Practice the ‘setting commands’ Grid, Snap, & Ortho
Commands.
 Practice ‘Draw commands’- point, line, pline, rectangle,
circle, tangent, ellipse, arc, polygon and spline.
 Dimension the given figures.
 Practice ’modify commands’ – erase, copy, mirror, move,
rotate, scale, stretc.h, trim, extend, break, chamfer, fillet,
explode, Pedit, Mledit.
 Practice ‘construct commands’ – offset, array, Divide
measure.
 Practice ‘edit commands’ – Undo, Redo, Oops, Copy
Clip, Paste Clip, Del.
 Practice ‘view commands’ – Redraw, Regen, Zoom,
Pan.
 Practice ‘Hatch commands’ – Bhatch, Hatch.
 Practice ‘insert commands’ – Block, Wblock, Insert,
Minsert.
 Practice dividing a line into number of segments.
 Practice drawing external/internal common tangents for
circles of same/different radii.
 Practice drawing external/internal common arcs for
circles of same/different radii.
 Practice construction of ellipse, parabola, hyperbola,
cycloid, and helix
3.0 Practice 2-D drawings of residential buildings using CAD

Software
 Practice conventional signs used in civil engineering.

 Practice drawing elevation of panelled door partly
panelled and partly glazed door/window shutter.
 Practice drawing cross section of Load bearing wall
 showing different components.
 Practice drawing Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of
 one roomed building.
 Practice drawing Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of
 2BHK building.
 Practice drawing Double line diagram of primary school
 building.
 Practice drawing Plan of Rural Hospital.
 Practice drawing typical floor Plan of Apartment
4.0 Preparation of 3-D drawings using CAD Software
 Practice 3D commands. – View commands – solids

 command – solid editing/modify commands.
 Draw 3-D view of different simple objects.
 Draw 3D view of Isolated Column footing.
 Draw 3D view of wall foundation.
 Draw Single roomed building in 3D.
 Draw double roomed building in 3D.
1. Introduction to computer  Open/close CAD program

 Understands CAD Graphic User
Interface(GUI) and various toolbars
2 Practice on CAD software  Practices the methods of
Geometric Constructions selecting/entering commands
 Sets the limits of the drawing
 Learns Draw commands
 Learns Modify commands
 Learns Edit commands
 Learns View commands
 Learns Hatch commands
 Learns Dimensioning Commands
 Draws simple geometrical shapes
like circles, tangents
3 Preparation of 2-D drawings  Draws 2-D drawings
using CAD Software  Practice conventional signs used in
civil engineering.
 Draws elevation of panelled door
partly panelled and partly glazed
door/window shutter.
 Draws cross section of Load bearing
wall showing different components.
 Draws Plan, Elevation, section and
site plan of one roomed building.
 Draws Plan, Elevation, section and
site plan of 2BHK building.
 Draws Double line diagram of
primary school building.
 Draws Plan of Rural Hospital.
 Draws typical floor Plan of
Apartment
4 Preparation of 3-D drawings  Learns 3-D commands
using CAD software  Draws simple 3-D elements
 Draws 3-D views of Isolated
Columnfooting
 Draws 3-D views of wall foundation
 Draws 3-D Views Single roomed
anddouble roomed building in 3D
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction to computer aided drafting (CAD)
a) Computer graphics
b) Definition of CAD
c) Applications of CAD
d) Advantages of CAD
e) Introduction to CAD as drafting package
2.0 Practice on CAD
a) Study of drawing editor screen
b) List the methods to access CAD commands.
c) Practice of setting up of drawing area using utility commands, and using
setting commands.
d) Practice entity draw commands.
e) Draw the given geometrical figures using draw commands.
f) Practice of Modify commands.
g) Practice of construct commands.
h) Practice of edit commands
i) Practice of view commands.
j) Practice of Hatch commands.
k) Practice of insert commands.
l) Dimension the figures using dimensioning commands.
m) Practice of Print/Plot commands
n) Divide a line into number of segments.
o) Draw an external/internal common tangent for two given circles of
same/different radii.
p) Draw external/internal arcs for two given circles of same/different radii.
q) Construct ellipse, parabola, hyperbola, cycloid, and helix.
Draw conventional signs, symbols used in civil engineering drawing.
a) Draw the elevation of fully panelled door, partly glazed and partly panelled
door/window shutter.
b) Draw the section of a load bearing wall.
c) Prepare Building Drawing – One roomed building with site plan.
d) Prepare Building Drawing – 2BHK building with site plan.
e) Prepare plan of primary school Building.
f) Prepare Plan of Rural Hospital building.
g) Prepare a typical floor plan of Apartment consisting of G+5 floors.
a) Practice 3D commands. – View commands – solids command –
solid editing/modify
commands.
b) Draw 3-D view of different simple objects.
c) Draw 3D view of Isolated Column footing.
d) Draw 3D view of wall foundation.
e) Draw Single roomed building in 3D.
f) Draw double roomed building in 3D.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Drafting and Design (Engineering Drawing Using Manual and CAD
Techniques), Kicklighter & Brown – Goodheart-Willcox Publisher
V SEMESTER
V SEMESTER
Instruction
Periods/Week
End
Marks
THEORY
C-501 Steel Structures 4 60 3 20 80 100
C-502 Environmental 5 75 3 20 80 100
Engineering
C-503 Quantity 4 60 3 20 80 100
Surveying-II
C-504 Construction 3 45 3 20 80 100
Failures, Repairs
& Maintenance
C-505 Quality Control 4 60 3 20 80 100
and Safety in
Construction
C-506 Construction 3 45 3 20 80 100
Management &
Entrepreneurship
PRACTICAL
Structural
Engineering 3 45 3 40 60 100
C-507 Drawing
C-508 Life Skills 3 45 3 40 60 100
C-509 Field Practices 7 105 3 40 60 100
C-510 CAD Practice-II 6 90 3 40 60 100
Total 23 19 630 280 720 1000
STEEL STRUCTURES

Course Course No. Of
Of Formative Summative
Steel
C-501 04 60 20 80
Structures
No. Of Cos
S.No. Major Topics
Periods Mapped
Introduction and Fundamentals of Limit State
1. 04 CO1
Design of Steel structures
2. Design of fillet welded joints 10 CO2
3. Design of Tension members 10 CO3
Design of Compression members, Columns
4. 17 CO4
&Column bases
5. Design of Beams 15 CO5
6. Roof Trusses 4 CO5
Total 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Understand the fundamentals of Limit state design of
Course steel structures and design aspects of fillet welded joint.
Objectives (ii) Design tension members, compression members and
flexural members by following IS Codal provisions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1 C- Explain the fundamentals of limit state design
501.1 of steel structures.
CO 2 C- Design Fillet Welded Joints
501.2
Course CO 3 C- Design of Tension Members in Steel
Outcomes 501.3 Structures
CO 4 C- Design Compression Members, Columns and
501.4 Column bases
CO 5 C- Design Steel Beams and State different types
501.5 of roof trusses and their suitability
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Introduction and fundamentals of limit state design of steel

Learning structures
Outcomes 1.1 State common types of steel structures, their merits and
demerits.
1.2 List the loads considered in the design of steel structures as
per I.S:875-1987 and describe them
1.3 Understand the code of practice I.S. 800-2007
1.4 List physical and mechanical properties of structural steel.
1.5 Sketc.h different types of rolled steel sections and explain
itsclassification based on their cross sections.
1.6 List types of elements.
1.7 Explain the concept of Limit State Design, define ‘limit state’
and state the types.
1.8 Define Characteristic action, Design action and Design
strength.
1.9 State the partial safety factor values for loads in limit state
ofstrength and serviceability and for materials in limit state.
1.10 State the deflection limits for Simply supported beam,
Cantilever beam and Purlins
2.0 Design of Fillet Welded Joints

2.1 State different types of joints.
2.2 Differentiate the welded joints and Riveted joints
2.3 Sketc.h the different forms of welded joints.
2.4 Explain the features of a fillet welded joint.
2.5 State stresses in welds as per I.S.800-2007.
2.6 State formula for design strength of a fillet welded joint.
2.7 Calculate the design strength of a fillet welded joint.
2.8 Design a fillet welded joint for a given load, thickness of
aplate and
permissible stresses as per code. Design a fillet welded joint
for a single angle connected to the gusset plate by fillet welds
along the sides and at ends carrying axial loads. Design a
fillet welded joint for a double angle connected to the gusset
plate by fillet welds along the sides and at ends carrying axial
loads.
3.0 Design of Tension Members

3.1 Define ‘ tie’
3.2 State the applications of tension members.
3.3 Sketc.h different forms of tension members and
understand their behaviour of tension members.
3.4 State and describe different modes of failures of
tensionmembers with sketc.hes
3.5 State the maximum values of effective slenderness ratios as
per code.
3.6 Determine the net effective area of single angle connected to
gusset plate by welding.
3.7 Determine the design strength due to yielding of gross
section, rupture of critical section and block shear failure of a single
angle connected by welding
3.8 Understand design procedure of tension members. Design
a single angle tension member connected by welding only.
4.0 Design of Compression Members, Columns and Column

bases
4.1 Understand, State and sketc.h different types
ofcompression members (like column, strut)
4.2 Sketc.h different forms of compression members and
understand and their behaviour and state the classification of
cross sections.
4.3 Define the terms 1. Least radius of gyration and 2.
Slenderness Ratio and distinguish between actual length and
effective length and also state effective lengths to be used for
different end conditions.
4.2 Understand buckling class of cross section based on
Imperfection factor, stress reduction factor and column
buckling curves and state maximum values of effective
slenderness ratios as per code
4.3 Understand the design compressive stress for different
column buckling Classes, Determine the design strength of
compression members
4.4 Understand design procedure of compression
membersand design columns with I sections and built-up
channel sections.
4.5 Understand design details, effective sectional area, codal
provisions for angle struts and design single angle and double
angle struts.
4.6 Understand codal provisions of lacing and battening
systems for built-up columns.
4.7 Design a slab base along with a cement concrete
pedestal and also design the welded connection.
5.0 Design of Steel Beams
5.1 Understand the concept of limit state design of beams,
Define the terms: Elastic moment of resistance, Plastic
moment of resistance, Elastic section modulus, Plastic section
modulus and Shape factor.
5.2 Determine the shape factor values for rectangular, Tee and
I-sections.
5.3 Understand the behaviour of steel beams, classify beams
based on lateral restraint of compression flange.
5.4 Determine the design strength in bending (flexure) and in
shear of laterally supported beams and list the factors affecting
lateral stability and influence of type of loading.
5.5 Distinguish between web buckling and web crippling and
understand the failure of beams by flexural yielding and list the
types of failure of beams by flexural yielding
5.6 Understand laterally supported beam, holes in tension
zone, shear lag effects and design bending strength.
5.7 Understand laterally unsupported beam, lateral torsional
buckling of beams (theoretical concept only – no problems)
and explain effective length of compression flanges.
5.8 Understand concept of shear in beams and resistance to
shear buckling., shear buckling design methods like Simple
post critical method and Tension field method and also
understand the design of simple beams with solid webs.
5.9 Understand component parts of plate girders with
sketc.hes and describe different types of Stiffeners with
theirsuitability.
5.10 Design laterally supported simply supported beam
considering all codal requirements.
6.0 Roof Trusses
6.1 List types of trusses viz., Plane trusses and Space trusses.
6.2 Understand the situations where roof trusses are used.
6.3 Sketc.h different types of roof trusses with their suitability for
agiven span.
6.4 Sketc.h a roof truss and name the component parts.
6.5 Understand the configuration of trusses like Pitched roof and
Parallel chord trapezoidal trusses.
6.6 Understand cross sections of truss members.
6.7 Understand the loads on roof trusses as per I.S – 875-1987
6.8 Calculate the live load on roof covering and live load on truss.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction and fundamentals of limit state design of steel structures
Merits and demerits of steel structures – Loads considered in the design
ofsteel structures as per I.S:875 -1987 – Introduction to I.S. 800-
2007 – Mechanical properties of structural steel – yield stress (fy),
ultimate tensile
stress (fu) and maximum percent elongation (table -1 of IS:800-2007) –
Standard structural sections – Classification of cross sections – class
1(plastic) class2(compact) class3(semi compact) and class4(slender) – types
of elements – internal elements, outstands and tapered elements –
Concept of Limit State Design – limit state of strength – limit state of
serviceability – classification of actions – strength – partial safety
factors for loads and materials – deflection limits.
2. Design of Fillet Welded Joints

Different types of joints – lap joints – butt joints – Differentiation of
welded joints and riveted joints – Different forms of welded joints –
sketc.hes of fillet and butt weld joints – Fillet welded joint – detailed
sketc.h showing the component parts – Stresses in welds as per
I.S.800-2007 – Codal
requirements of welds and welding – Problems on calculation of strength of
a fillet welded joint – Design of fillet welded joint for a given load, thickness
of a plate and permissible stresses as per code – Design of fillet welded
joint forsingle or double angles carrying axial loads.
3. Design of Tension Members

Introduction – different forms of tension members – Behaviour of tension
members – Different modes of failures – gross section yielding, net
Section rupture and block shear failure – Maximum values of effective
slenderness ratios as per code – Calculation of net effective sectional area
of single angle with welded connection only – Calculation of the design
strength due to yielding of gross section, rupture of critical section and
block shear – problems on single angle with welded connection only –
Design procedure of tension members – Problems on design of tension
members single angle with welded connection only.
4. Analysis and design of Compression Members, columns and column

Basis
Introduction – different forms of compression members – Behaviour of
compression members – classification of cross sections – class 1 (plastic),
class2 (compact), class3 (semi compact) and class4 (slender) – Effective
lengths to be used for different end conditions – table 11 of I.S:800 –
Buckling class of cross section – imperfection factor and stress reduction
factor for different buckling classes – column buckling curves – Maximum
values of effective slenderness ratios as per code – design compressive
stress for different column buckling classes – Calculation of design
strength of compression members – problems – Design procedure of
compression members – problems on simple sections only (no built-up
sections) – Design details – effective sectional area – codal provisions for
angle struts – single angle and double angle – discontinuous and
continuous struts –Codal provisions of single / double lacing and
battening for built-up columns (no problems) – Design of slab base along
with a cement concrete pedestal, design of welded connection of base
plate and column – problems.
5. Analysis and design of Steel Beams

Concept of limit state design of beams – shape factor and plastic properties of
beams – Problems on shape factor – Behaviour of steel beams –
design strength in bending (flexure) – Factors affecting lateral stability –
influence of type of loading – web buckling and web crippling – Beams
failure by flexural yielding – Laterally supported beam – holes in tension
zone – shear lag effects – design bending strength – lateral torsional
buckling of beams – (theoretical concept only – no problems) – Effective
length of compression flanges - Concept of shear in beams – resistance
to shear buckling – Shear buckling design methods – simple post critical
method – tension field method – Design of laterally supported simple
beams with solid webs – Component parts of plate girders with sketc.hes
– brief description of different types of stiffeners - Design of laterally
supported simply supported beam considering all codal requirements.
6. Design of Roof Trusses
Types of trusses – plane trusses, space trusses – Sketc.hes of different
roof trusses with their suitability for a given span – Cross sections of
truss members – Loads on roof trusses as per I.S. 875 -1987 –Determination
of live load given pitch of the truss.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. IS 800-2007 –Indian Standard General construction in steel — code

ofpractice
2. Design of Steel Structure by N Subramanian, Oxford University Press, New
Delhi.
3. Limit state design of steel structures by S K Duggal, Tata McGraw Hill
Education, New Delhi
4. Fundamentals of structural steel design M L Gambhir, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, New Delhi
5. Steel Structures: Design and Practice by N Subramanian, Oxford Publishers,
New Delhi
6. Design of steel structure by Limit State Method as per IS 800- 2007
byBhavikatti S S, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi
7. Limit state design of Steel Structure by Ramchandra & Gehlot, Scientific
Publishers, Pune.
8. Teaching Resource Material : http://www.steel-insdag.org
MODEL BLUE PRINT
Question
Marks wise
wise
No. Of Weightag Distribution of Cos
Major Distribution
period e of Weightage Mappe
S. Topic of Weightage
N s s marks d
o A A A A
R U R U
p n p n
Introduction
and
Fundamenta
0
1. ls of Limit 04 03 -- -- -- 1 - - -- CO1
3
State Design
of Steel
structures
Design of
0 0
2. fillet welded 10 14 08 -- 1 1 1 -- CO2
3 3
joints
Design of 0
3. 10 11 -- 08 -- 1 -- 1 -- CO3
Tension 3
members
Design of
Compressio
n members, 0 0
4. 17 25 16 -- 2 1 2 -- CO4
Columns 6 3
&Column
bases
Design of 0 0
5. 15 14 08 -- 1 1 1 -- CO5
Beams 3 3
0
6. Roof trusses 4 03 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- CO5
3
Higher
order
question CO3,
from any or -- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1 CO4 &
combinatio CO5
n of 3,4&5
Chapters
2 0
Total 60 80 40 10 7 3 5 1
1 9
Test-II

II
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

Course No. Of
Course Title No. Of Formative Summative
code periods/week
Environmental
C-502 05 75 20 80
Engineering
No. Of
S.No. Major Topics Cos Mapped
periods/week
1. Environment and Ecology 5 CO1
2. Water Supply Scheme & Sources 8 CO1
and Conveyance of Water
3. Quality and Purification of Water 14 CO2
4. Distribution system and water 4 CO2
supply arrangements in a Building
5. Introduction to Sanitary 8 CO3
Engineering & Quantity of Sewage
6. Laying of Sewers & Sewer 5 CO3
appurtenances
7. Characteristics of Sewage, 13 CO4
treatment & disposal
8. Solid waste disposal and Sanitation 8 CO5
in buildings
9. Rural Water Supply and Sanitation 7 CO5
10. Air Pollution 3 CO5
Total Periods 75
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Familiarise with basic knowledge on environment and ecology,
history of water supply, Understand the sources, quality &
quantity, collection, conveyance, testing and treatment
techniques of water.
(ii) Understand the storage, distribution and water supply
Course arrangements in buildings.
Objectives (iii) Learn basic knowledge of the sanitary Engineering, Sewerage
works, methods of sewage collection, basic concepts of design
of sewers, their laying with appurtenances
(iv) Explain the methods of sewage treatment and disposal,
methods of solid waste collection & disposal and sanitation in
buildings, in Rural areas and fundamentals of air pollution.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C- Explain the terms (i) Environment and ecology (ii)

502.1 Water supply scheme (iii) Per capita demand (iv)
Sources (v) conveyance of water
CO2 C- Explain the quality and treatment of water,
502.2 systems of distribution, methods of water supply
and water supply arrangements in buildings
CO3 C- Describe the basics of sanitary engineering,
Course 502.3 sewer design, laying of sewers and sewer
Outcomes appurtenances.
CO4 C- Explain the methods of Sewage treatment and

502.4 disposal
CO5 C- Discuss (i) Methods of disposal of solid waste (ii)
502.5 Sanitation in Building (iii) Rural water supply and
sanitation(iv) Fundamentals of air pollution.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1. Environment and Ecology

Outcomes 1.1. Define Environment, Ecology and Ecosystem.
1.2. Describe the various global environmental issues like Define
Acid rain, Greenhouse effect, Global warming and Ozone layer
depletion.
1.3. List the causes and effects of Acid rain, Greenhouse effect,
Global warming and Ozone layer depletion.
1.4. Differentiate renewable and non-renewable energy sources
and List examples for renewable and non-renewable energy
sources.
1.5. List the components of Ecosystem and explain the flow of
matter and energy in an ecosystem.
1.6. List the factors affecting the stability of an ecosystem.
1.7. Explain the concept of sustainable development.
2. Water supply scheme, Sources and conveyance of water

2.1. Explain the importance and development of water supply
2.2. States the need for protected water supply, objectives of
protected water supply scheme and draw the flow chart of a
typical water supply scheme of a town.
2.3. List the factors affecting per capita demand of a town/city and
state the requirements of water for various purposes: Domestic
purpose, Industrial use, Firefighting, Commercial and
institutional needs and public use. Explain the variation in
demand for water supply.
2.4. Estimate the quantity of water required by different towns, State
the need and methods of forecasting population, Solve
problems on forecasting population by different methods.
2.5. State the common sources of water for a water supply scheme,
different types of surface & sub surface sources of water, merits
and demerits of surface and sub surface water sources, salient
features of surface sources.
2.6. Define Aquifer, Aquiclude and Ground water table, classify
wells according to construction, Define Draw down, Critical
depression head, Circle of influence, Cone of depression,
Confined aquifer, unconfined aquifer and Specific yield, Explain
the procedure for determining yield of a well by pumping tests
(Constant Pumping and Recuperation Tests).
2.7. Explain with sketc.hes: Infiltration galleries and Infiltration wells
2.8. Explain intakes for collection of water (reservoir intake, river
intake, canal intake and Lake Intake) with sketc.hes.
2.9. Explain different methods of conveyance of water, merits and
demerits of different types of pipes, different joints used for
connecting pipes with sketc.hes, method of Pipe laying and
testing.
3. Quality and purification of water
3.1. State different types of impurities, need for laboratory tests,
explain the method of obtaining samples for testing, different
tests for analysing quality of water with their significance.
3.2. Define: Ecoli index and Most Probable Number (MPN), State
the significance of Ecoli in water analysis, Explain the
importance of chemical and bacteriological analysis of water
used for domestic purpose.
3.3. State the various water borne diseases in India, State the
maximum acceptable limits of Turbidity, Hardness, Nitrates and
Fluorides for the public drinking water.
3.4. State the objectives of treatment of water, Sketc.h the layout
of a water treatment plant indicating the different stages, List the
points to be considered in locating a treatment plant.
3.5. State the objectives and explain the process of Aeration, Plain
sedimentation, Sedimentation with coagulation, Filtration and
Disinfection.
3.6. Describe different types of sedimentation tanks.
3.7. Describe the construction and operation of slow sand filters,
Rapid sand filters and pressure filters and compares them.
3.8. Define disinfection of water, Explain the need for disinfecting
water, methods of disinfection of water and types of
Chlorination.
3.9. List the substances responsible for causing colour, taste and
odour, Explain the temporary hardness and permanent
hardness, various methods of removal of hardness.
4. Distribution system and Water supply arrangements in
Buildings
4.1. State the requirements and classification of distribution system,
explain different systems of distribution with sketc.hes
4.2. List and explain the different methods of water supply system
and state their merits and demerits.
4.3. State the necessity for service reservoirs, draw sketc.hes of
rectangular overhead service reservoir showing all accessories.
4.4. Explain with sketc.hes the different layouts in distribution
system, state their merits and demerits and their suitability for a
given locality.
4.5. List and explains with sketc.hes the location and functioning of
various appurtenances used in a distribution system.
4.6. Explain methods of detecting leakages, methods of rectification
and prevention of leakages in water supply mains.
4.7. Define terminology used while making water supply
arrangements in buildings, State the principles in laying
pipelines within the premises of a building.
4.8. Explain the general layout of water supply connections of
buildings, explain water Supply arrangements for single and
multi-storeyed buildings as per I.S. Code.
4.9. State the general precautions to be taken in plumbing work for
buildings.
4.10. Explain the water supply connection to a building from a water
main and uses of different fittings: ferrule, goose neck,
stopcock.
5. Introduction to sanitary engineering and quantity of sewage

5.1. State the objectives of sewage disposal works.
5.2. Define the terms: Sewage, Sewer and Sullage, Sewerage,
Refuse and Garbage
5.3. List the objectives of sewerage works and explain various
methods of sewage collection works and compare them.
5.4. Explain the different sewerage systems, compare them, discus
their suitability
5.5. State the main constituents of sewage for calculating quantity,
define Dry weather flow, discuss the factors affecting, state the
factors affecting the quantity of storm sewage and explain the
variation in rate of sewage.
5.6. Estimate the quantity of storm water flow using 1. Rational
method and 2. Empirical formulae.
5.7. List the requirements of good surface drains, explain different
types of surface drains with their merits and demerits.
5.8. State the limiting velocities of flow in sewers, works out simple
problems on design of sewers running half full only.
5.9. Explain the use of nomograms in detail in the design of sewers.
6. Laying of sewers and Sewer appurtenances

6.1. State various shapes of sewers, explain them with sketc.h,
discuss their merits and demerits.
6.2. Mention different materials used for sewers discuss their merits
and demerits.
6.3. Explain the method of laying the sewers as per given alignment,
the necessity of providing sewer appurtenances on the sewer
lines.
6.4. Explain the construction, function and location of the different
sewer appurtenances.
6.5. State the situations under which sewage pumping is necessary,
explain the component parts of a pumping station and factors
influencing its location.
6.6. Explain the construction and working of Shone’s ejector with the
help of a sketc.h.
6.7. Describe the testing of sewers.
7. Characteristics of sewage, Treatment and disposal

7.1. Define strength of sewage, describe the method of sampling
sewage.
7.2. State the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of
sewage.
7.3. Define C.O.D and B.O.D. State the significance of tests like i)
Total Solids (ii) C.O.D. (iii) B.O.D. (iv) PHValue (v) Chlorides.
7.4. State the characteristics of industrial waste water, explain the
principles of treatment of industrial waste water.
7.5. State the objects of sewage treatment. Draw the conventional
sewage treatment plant of a town and indicate the units.
7.6. State the function of screens, skimming tanks and grit
chambers and explain their working.
7.7. Explain with sketc.h wherever necessary the treatment works:
Sedimentation tank, trickling filters, Activated sludge process,
Oxidation ditch, Oxidation Pond, Aerated lagoons, Anaerobic
lagoons, Sludge digesters
7.8. Compare activated sludge process and trickling filters. List out
various methods of sludge disposal and briefly explain them.
7.9. Explain with sketc.h the treatment of sewage by septic tank
andsoak pit.
7.10. List and explain the various methods of sewage disposal.
8. Solid waste disposaland Sanitation in Buildings

8.1. Define the term’ Refuse’
8.2. State the classification of solid wastes
8.3. Explain the methods of disposal of solid wastes, state the
merits and demerits for each.
8.4. Define composting, explain the methods of composting, Explain
the equipment required and preparation of compost by
mechanical composting.
8.5. State the aims of building drainage and requirements of good
drainage system in buildings.
8.6. Define the terms: soil pipe, waste pipe, vent pipe, anti-
siphonage pipe.
8.7. Describe the layout of sanitary fittings and house drainage
arrangements for buildings (single and multi-storeyed).
8.8. Explain with sketc.hes the different types of plumbing systems.
8.9. Describe different sanitary fittings like water closets, flushing
cisterns, urinals, inspection chambers, traps, anti-siphonage
pipes.
8.10. Explain the procedures involved in the inspection, testing and
maintenance of sanitary fittings.
9. Rural water supply and sanitation

9.1. Explain the process of disinfection of wells by two pot method.
9.2. Explain the methods of rural sanitation.
9.3. Describe with sketc.hes the construction of sanitary latrines in
rural areas.
9.4. State the advantages of biogas plant, factors on which the
production of biogas depends, describe the construction and
working of K.V.I.C. model and Janata model biogas plant with a
neat sketc.h.
9.5. State vermicomposting and explain the procedure of vermi
composting and mention its advantages.
10. Air pollution
10.1 Define the term air pollution, state and explain the sources of air
pollution.
10.2 Explain the effects of air pollution on human health & vegetation
and on atmosphere & materials.
10.3 State methods of control of air pollution.
10.4 State various types of controlling devices and equipment.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Environment and Ecology

Environment – Biosphere – Atmosphere – Acid rain, Greenhouse effect,
Global warming – Ozone layer depletion. Renewable and non-renewable
energy sources with examples. Ecology and Ecosystem – components of
ecosystem – Flow of matter in an ecosystem (food pyramid) – Flow of energy
in an ecosystem –Ecological balance and stability of an ecosystem –
Sustainable development with examples.
2. Water Supply Scheme &Sources and Conveyance of Water
General importance of water supply –Development of Water supply–Need for

protected Water supply-Flow chart of a typical water supply scheme– Total
quantity of water for a town, per capita demand and factors affecting demand
- Water requirements for domestic purposes, industrial use, firefighting,
commercial and institutional needs, public use –Variation in demand peak
demand – seasonal, daily and hourly variation– Forecasting population
by
arithmetical, geometrical and incremental increase methods-problems on
above methods.
Surface source Lakes, streams, rivers and impounded reservoirs –

Underground sources-springs, wells, infiltration wells and galleries – Yield
from wells by constant pumping and recuperation tests. (No problems
required) - Comparison of surface and subsurface sources Types of intakes
- Reservoir intake, River intake, Canal intake, Lake Intake - Conveyance of
water-open channels, aqueduct pipes - Pipe Materials C.I Pipes, Steel Pipes,
concrete pipes, A.C. Pipes, G.I. Pipes Plastic Pipes (PVC &HDPE), merits
and demerits of each type - Pipe joints spigot and socket joint, flange joint,
expansion joint for C.I. Pipe, joints for concrete and asbestos cement pipes -
Pipe Laying and testing, Leak detection, prevention and rectification.
3. Quality and Purification of water.
Impurities of water need for laboratory test – sampling grab and

composite sampling– Tests of water physical, chemical and bacteriological
tests – PH value of water. – Standard quality for domestic use and
industrial purposes - Flow diagram of different treatment units. –Aeration
methods of aeration- Sedimentation plain sedimentation and
sedimentation with coagulation - Filtration Construction and operation of
slow sand, rapid sand and pressure filters - Disinfection of water necessity
and methods of chlorination, perchlorinating, break point chlorination -
Colour, taste and odour control. Hardness – Types of Hardness, Removal
of hardness. NOTE: No design of treatment units.
4. Distribution system and water supply arrangements in a Building.

General requirements– systems of distribution - gravity system,
combined system, direct pumping - Methods of supply
Intermittent and continuousStorage – underground and overhead
service reservoirs - necessity andaccessories – Types of layout
dead end, grid, radial and ring system theirmerits and demerits and their
suitability– Location and functioning of: Sluicevalves, Check valves or
reflux valves, Air valves, Drain valves or blow offvalves, Scour
valves, Fire Hydrants, Water meters– Water supply
arrangements in building – Definition of terms; water main, service pipe,
communication pipe, supply pipe, distribution pipe, air gap - General layout of
water supply arrangement for single and multi-storeyed buildings as per I.S
Code of practice general principles and precautions in laying pipelines within
the premises of a building - Connections from water main to building with
sketc.h - Water supply fittings, their description and uses stopcock, ferrule,
goose neck etc..
5. Introduction to Sanitary Engineering and Quantity of Sewage

Object of providing sewerage works - Definition of terms : sullage, sewage,
sewer and sewerage – classification of sewage - System of sewage disposal
water carriage systems –Types of sewerage systems and their suitability
–
separate, combined and partially separate systems –Quantity of discharge in
sewers, dry weather flow, variability of flow Determination of storm water flow
– run off coefficient, time of concentration, rational method and empirical
formulae for runoff - Surface drainage requirements, shapes, laying and
construction – Simple problems on design of sewers (running half full
only) using Manning’s and Hazen Williams formulae - Use of nomograms as
per I.S.1742 to determine the unknown values of gradient, diameter,
dischargeand velocity.
6. Laying of Sewers and Sewer Appurtenances

Different shapes of cross section for sewers – circular and noncircular –
merits and demerits of each - Brief description and choice of types of sewers
- stone ware, cast iron, cement concrete sewers and A.C Pipes - Laying of
sewers setting out alignment of a sewer, excavation, checking the gradient ,
preparation of bedding, handling, lowering, laying and jointing, testing and
back filling - Brief description, location, function and construction of
Manholes, Drop manholes, Street inlets, Catch basins, Flushing tanks,
Regulators, Inverted siphon - Necessity of pumping sewage location and
component parts of a pumping station.
7. Characteristics of Sewage, treatment & disposal

Strength of sewage - sampling of sewage, characteristics of sewage
physical, chemical and biological Analysis of sewage – significance of the
following tests for (No details of tests) Solids, C.O.D, B.O.D, Ph
Value, Chlorides Characteristics of Industrial waste water–principles of
treatment– Reduction of volume and strength of wastewater, Equalization,
Neutralization and proportioning Preliminary treatment Brief description and
functions of following units Screens, Skimming tanks and Grit chambers -
Primary treatment - Brief description and functions of Plain sedimentation -
Secondary treatment Brief description of Trickling filters - Activated sludge
process, Oxidation ditch, Oxidation pond, Aerated lagoons, Anaerobic
lagoons Sludge digestion – Process and methods of sludge disposal -
Miscellaneous treatments septic tank Sewage disposal dilution, disposal on
to lands, ground water recharge, reuse etc..
8. Solid Waste Disposal and Sanitation in Buildings

Types of Solid wastes - Methods of disposal- uncontrolled dumping, tipping
or sanitary land fill – Incineration – composting Preparation of compost
equipments required such as storage hoppers, grinders conveyors etc.., in
mechanical composting Aims of building drainage and its requirements –
General layout of sanitary fittings to a house drainage arrangements for
single and multi-storeyed buildings as per IS code of practice plumbing
systems Sanitary fittings – traps, water closets, flushing cisterns, urinals,
inspection chambers, anti-siphonage Inspection, testing and maintenance of
sanitary fittings.
9. Rural Water Supply and Sanitation
Disinfection of wells -Rural sanitation and sanitary latrines, biogas production
technology brief description and operational details of biogas plants using
animal waste, night soil and agricultural wastes KVIC and JANATA models
merits and demerits – maintenance of biogas plant vermicomposting –
procedure –advantages.
10. Air Pollution

Definition sources of air pollution – effects of air pollution – methods
of Control of air pollution – Knows Air pollution control equipment.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Water Supply & Sanitary Engineering – Including

Environmental Engineering &
Pollution Control Act’s, G. S. Birdie, Dhanapati Rai publishing company
2. Elements of Environmental engineering, K.N. Duggal, S. Chand

Publications
3. Textbook of Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering, S.K. Hussain,
CBS Publishers and
distributors Pvt Ltd.
4. Environmental Engineering,N.N.Basak, Tata Mc Graw-Hill education
5. Water Supply Engineering, Santosh Kumar Garg, Khanna Publishers
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Weight
Periods Distribution of Distribution of Linked
S. age
Chapter Name allocate Weightage Weightage with
No d of CO
R U A A R U A A
marks
p n p n
1. Environment and 5 3 3 1 C01

Ecology
2. Water Supply 8
Scheme & Sources 8 C01
and Conveyance of 3 8 1 1
Water
3. Quality and 14 6 3 1 C02
Purification of Water
4. Distribution System 4 11 3 8 1 1 C02
5. Introduction to 8
11 3 8 1 1 C03
Sanitary Engg &
Quantity of Sewage
6. Laying of Sewers & 5
3 3 1 C03
Sewers
appurtenances
7. Characteristics of 13
Sewage, treatment 11 3 8 1 1 C04
& disposal
8. Solid waste disposal 8
11 3 1 C05
and Sanitation in
buildings 8 1
9. Rural Water Supply 7 3 3 1 C05
and Sanitation
10. 3 3 3 1 C05
Air Pollution
Higher order
question from any
1 C04,
or combination of 10 1
0 C05
the chapters
7,8,9,10
5 1
Total 75 80 27 03 5 1
0 0
Test-II

II
QUANTITY SURVEYING – II
Marks for Marks for

Course No. Of Total no.
code period/week Of periods
Quantity
C-503 04 60 20 80
Surveying-II
S. No. Of Cos
Major Topics
No. periods Mapped
1 Detailed estimate of R.C.C. elements 06 CO1
2 Estimation of quantity of steel in R.C.C. elements 06 CO1
3 Detailed estimates of Roads and Culverts 16 CO2

Detailed estimates of Irrigation and Public Health
4 16 CO3
Engineering works
5 Valuation of buildings 8 CO4
6 Rent Fixation 8 CO4
Total 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Familiarize with the preparation of detailed estimate of
(i) various R.C.C. elements and calculation of quantity of
steel in R.C.C. elements
Course
Prepare detailed estimates of roads and culverts, irrigation
Objectives (ii)
and public health engineering works.
Learn the methods of valuation of properties and methods
(iii)
of rent fixation and solve simple problems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Prepare the estimate for various R.C.C. Structural
CO1 C-503.1 elements and quantity of steel reinforcement in different
Course R.C.C elements
Outcomes Prepare detailed estimates of quantities required for
CO2 C-503.2
construction of Roads and Culverts
CO3 C-503.3 Prepare detailed estimates of quantities required for
construction of irrigation and public health engineering
structures.
Explains the Methods of valuation of Properties and
CO4 C-503.4 Apartments and method of Rent fixation of building
using principles and by CPWD guidelines
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Estimation of R.C.C. Structural elements

Outcomes 1.1 List various components of Dog legged staircases
1.2 Prepare detailed estimate of Dog legged staircase
2.0 Estimation of steel reinforcement in different R.C.C
elements
2.1 State the codal provisions for reinforcement in
R.C.C.elements of a building as per IS 456: 2000
2.2 Distinguish between straight bars and cranked bars
usedin simply supported beams
2.3 Compute the lengths of straight, cranked bars and stirrups
used in Simply supported beams
2.4 Distinguish between main reinforcement and distribution
reinforcement used in R.C.C. slabs
2.5 Compute the quantity of steel reinforcement for different
elements of R.C.C works in a building by preparing a
barbending schedule
3.0 Detailed estimates of roads and culverts
3.1 Prepare a detailed estimate for different types of roads
3.2 Prepare a detailed estimate for (a) Pipe culvert (b) Slab
culvert
4.0 Detailed estimates of Irrigation and Public Health
Engineering works
4.1 Prepare a detailed estimate for the following items:
a) Open well
b) R.C.C. Square/Rectangular overhead tank
c) Sanitary block
d) Tank sluice with tower head
4.2 State the items to be included in the abstract
estimatesof above structures
5.0 Valuation of buildings
5.1 Definition – Value, Cost and Price, Scrap value, Salvage
value, Market value, Book value, sinking fund and its
meaning – purpose of valuation – factors governing
valuation.
5.2 Depreciation – Sinking fund – Annuity –
Capitalized value.
5.3 Methods of valuation – Land & building
method,
Development method, Depreciation method, Rental
method, Capitalization method, Profit method, Simple
problems on each of the above method.
5.4 Valuation of Apartments- ownership concept-factors
contributing the value of flat – methods of valuation of
flat –comparable sale insurance method, land & building
method, Investment method, Rent capitalization method
5.5 Valuation of properties of wealth tax, valuation for
purpose of capital gains tax – examples for each
5.6 Valuation for purpose of cost of construction – valuation
for mortgage – valuation for fire insurance – Valuation
by use of valuation tables
6.0 Rent fixation
6.1 Rent fixation of building – principles of rent fixation by
CPWD – Fair rent method.
6.2 Simple problems on rent fixation
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Detailed estimate of R.C.C. elements:

Various components and detailed estimate of Dog legged staircase
2.0 Estimation of quantities of steel in R.C.C. elements:
Simply supported singly reinforced R.C.C. beams/Lintel – Simply supported
one-way slab – R.C.C. column with square footing – Preparation of Bar bending
schedule for the above
3.0 Detailed Estimates of Roads and Culverts:
Gravel Road – Water bound macadam road – Surface dressing with bitumen
– Cement concrete road – Pipe culvert – R.C.C. slab culvert with i)
straight returns and ii) splayed wing walls – Different items in abstract estimate
(Labour charges, Traffic diversion etc..)
4.0 Detailed Estimates of Irrigation and Public Health Engineering works:
Open well with masonry staining – R.C.C. Rectangular/square overhead tank
–Sanitary block – Tank sluice with tower head – Different items to be
included inthe abstract estimates of the above
5.0 Valuation of buildings
Definition – Value, Cost and Price, Scrap value, Salvage value, Market
value, Book value, sinking fund and its meaning – purpose of valuation –
factors governing valuation – Depreciation – Sinking fund – Annuity –
Capitalized value
– Methods of valuation – Land & building method, Development method,
Depreciation method, Rental method, Capitalization method, Profit method,
Simple problems on each of the above method – Valuation of Apartments-
Ownership concept-factors contributing the value of flat – methods of
valuation of flat –comparable sale insurance method, land & building method,
Investment method, Rent capitalization method – Valuation of properties of
wealth tax, valuation for the purpose of capital gains tax – examples for
each of these –
Valuation for purpose of cost of construction – valuation for mortgage
–valuation for fire insurance – Valuation by use of valuation tables
6.0 Rent fixation

Rent fixation of building – Principles of rent fixation by CPWD – Fair
rent method – Simple problems. On rent fixation
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Estimating and Costing in Civil Engineering, B N Dutta, CBS Publications

2. Estimating,Costing,Specification & Valuation In Civil Engineering, by M
Chakraborti, Chakraborti publishers
3. Estimating, Costing and Valuation, Rangwala, Charotar Publications
4. Civil Estimating & Costing: Including Quality Surveying, Tendering and
Valuation,A.K. Upadhyay, S K Kataria and Sons Publications
MODEL BLUE PRINT

No. Of Weighta Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
S.
Major Topics period ge of Weightage Weightage Mappe
No
s marks d
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Detailed estimate
1 of R.C.C. 06 06 -- 06 -- -- -- 2 - -- CO1
elements
Estimation of
2 quantity of steel
06 11 -- 03 08 -- -- 1 1 -- CO1
in R.C.C.
elements
Detailed
3 estimates of
14 14 -- 06 08 -- -- 2 1 -- CO2
Roads and
Culverts
Detailed
estimates of
4 Irrigation and
14 14 -- 06 08 -- -- 2 1 -- CO3
Public Health
Engineering
works
Valuation of
5 12 14 -- 06 08 -- -- 2 1 -- CO4
buildings
6 Rent fixation 11 -- 03 08 -- -- 1 1 CO4
8
Higher order CO1,C
question from 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1 O2&
any or CO3
combination of
1,2,3,4 Chapters
1
Total 60 80 -- 30 40 10 -- 5 1
0

TEST- I & II

CONSTRUCTION FAILURES, REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE

Course No. Of
Course title no. Of Formative Summative
code period/week
CONSTRUCTION
FAILURES,
C-504 03 45 20 80
REPAIRS AND
MAINTENANCE
No. Of CO’s
S.No. Major Topics
periods/week Mapped
1. Introduction 4 CO1
2. Subsurface construction failures and 10 CO1
repairs
3. Surface construction failures and 6 CO2

repairs
4. Masonry and concrete failures, 9 CO3
repairs
5. Manmade and Natural failures, 6 CO4
rehabilitation
6. Maintenance problems and their 10 CO5
solutions
Total Periods 45
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
(i) Understand the methods of identifying failures and their
causes in various types of construction.
Course (ii) Learn the necessary repairs for various failures observed
Objectives in construction.
(iii) Learn the maintenance procedures of a construction to
keep it safe and durable.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Course CO1 C-504.1 Analyse the causes of failures in foundations and

Outcomes repairs involved, sub surface construction failures
and repairs
CO2 C-504.2 Analyse(i) surface construction failures (ii) failures in
retaining wall and abutments and repairs involved in
rectifying these failures.
CO3 C504.3 Explain the types of failures in masonry and concrete
and their repairs
CO4 C504.4 Analyse(i) failures due to manmade and natural
disasters (ii)ignorance and negligence and preventive
methods to overcome these failures
CO5 C504.5 Explain (i) Defects in buildings (ii) Dampness control
(iii) Causes, preventive and corrective methods of
cracks in buildings, (iv) method of maintenance of
roads, canal linings, leak proofing of R.C.C. roofs with
chemicals.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning 1.0 Introduction

Outcomes 1.1 Define
1. Error,
2. Defect and
3. Failure
1.2 State different types of errors causing failures.
1.3 State the causes of failures.
2.0 Understand subsurface construction failures and
repairs
2.1 Describe construction failures in foundations due to
Under mining safe support, Load transfer failure,
Lateral movement, Unequal support, settlement
and differential settlement, Uplift in expansive soils,
Design error, Construction error, flotation and water
change, vibration effect, earthquake effect.
2.2 Describe the repairs involved for rectifying the
above failure.
2.3 Describe Sub surface construction failures,
Trenches, sheeting and bracing, piles and
caissons, Sewer and tunnels, dams.
2.4 Describes the repairs involved for rectifying the
above failures.
2.5 Examine case studies
3.0 Understand Surface construction failures and repairs
3.1 Describes the failures in surface construction,
Slopes and slides, Subsidence, failure of retaining
walls and abutments
3.2 Describes the repairs involved for rectifying the
above failures.
4.0 Understand Masonry and concrete failures, repairs
4.1 Describe types of failures in masonry, Wall failure,
construction error, aging, joints and cracks,
weather tightness, masonry cladding, partitions,
ornamental screens, plaster.
4.2 Explain the repairs involved for rectifying the above
failures.
4.3 Explain the types of failures in concrete due to
Improper mix design, curing, placement of
reinforcement, rusting of embedded steel, handling
of pre cast elements, shrinkage, expansion and
plastic changes, surface disintegration due to fire,
spalling of concrete, compression failure, erection
difficulty, temperature change, Deformation and
cracking.
failure and use of expansion filler.
5.0 Understand Manmade and natural failures and repairs
5.1 Describe the types of failures in manmade and
natural disasters due to Demolition, deterioration,
overload, alteration collapses, fire, explosion and
vibration, collision, wind damages, towers and
masts, storm at sea, storm on land, lightening
damage, rain-ponding effect
5.2 Explain the repair’s involved for rectifying the above
failure.
5.3 Describe the failures due to ignorance and
negligence, incompetence, control and supervision,
responsibility.
failures.
6.0 Understand the Maintenance problems and their
solutions
6.1 Describes the list of defects in buildings bringing
out the investigation and remedial details.
6.2 State the methods of solving dampness problems
in buildings.
6.3 Explain the causes, preventive and corrective
methods of cracks in building.
6.4 Explain the maintenance operations for the Water
supply and sanitary components of building.
6.5 Explain the methods of maintenance of roads /
road berms / side drains.
6.6 Explain methods of repairs to canal linings.
6.7 Use of Leak proof chemicals for R.C.C roofs.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction
Definition of error, defect, and failure – Causes of failures.
2. Sub-surface construction failures and repairs
Failures in Foundations – Under mining – Load transfer failures – Lateral
movement – Unequal support – Settlement and Differential Settlement –
Uplift in expansive soils compression failure, erection difficulty, temperature
change, Deformation and cracking – Drag down and heave – Design
error – Construction error – Flotation and water change – Vibration
effect – Earthquake effect – repairing techniques to be adopted-Failures
during excavation – Sheeting and bracing – piles and caissons – sewers
and tunnels
– measures to be taken- Case Studies
3. Surface construction failures and repairs
Earthen bunds – failures – slope failures and sliding – subsidence –
measures to be taken to prevent surface construction failures – measures
to be taken – retaining walls and abutments – geo-membranes –
Revetment and pitching- Case Studies.
4. Masonry and concrete failures, repairs
Wall failures – Construction error – Aging – Joints and cracks –
Water tightness – Masonry cladding – Partitions – Ornamental screens –
Plastering failures – repairs-Concrete failures – Improper mix design,
curing, placement of reinforcement and handling of pre cast elements –
shrinkage failures – expansion and plastic changes – surface disintegration
due to fire – spalling of concrete – repairs- Case Studies
5. Man-made and natural failures, rehabilitation
Demolition – Deterioration – Overload – Alteration collapses – Fire
– Explosion and Vibration – Collision – wind damages of towers and
masts – Storm at sea – Storm on Land – Lighting damage – rain-
ponding – effects –rehabilitation measures- Case Studies
6. Maintenance problems and their solutions
Water proofing, leakage of basements and roofs – Treating dampness in walls
– Omission of DPC – Window sills, down pipes and other areas of damp
penetration – CICO water proofing-Cracks in walls – Horizontal, Vertical,
diagonal – causes and prevention of cracks in buildings – Care of floors,
removing stains from floors – Inks, rust, oil, paint and varnish-
Maintenance problems of plumbing, heating, hot water supply, clogged
drains, sewers, leaking pipe joints, electrical installations, other building
services, septic tanks and soak pits-Maintenance of roads, road-berms and
side drains- Strengthening of canals, embankments, silt clearance weed
removal, repairs
to canal lining-Leak proofing of water tanks and roofs use of chemicals for
RCC roofs.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Construction Failure ,by Jacob Feld , Kenneth L. Carper, John Wiley &
Sons Publications
2. Failures & Repairs of Concrete Structures, S. Champion, John Wiley &
Sons Publications
3. Engineering Structural Failures,RoltHammond,Odham Press, London
4. Learning from Failures: Deficiencies in Design, Construction and
Service,R.N.Naika,R &D Centre, Structwel Designers & Consultants
5. Building Failures Diagnosis and Avoidance,W.H.Ransom,Routledge
Publications
6. Maintenance Engineering for Civil Engineers,NayakB.S.,Khanna Publishers
7. Repair and Rehabilitation Of Concrete Structures,Modi I Poonam,Chirag N
Patil, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
8. Maintenance, Repair & Rehabilitation & Minor Works of
Buildings,P.C.Varhese,
Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited
9. SP: 25-1987: Causes and prevention of cracks in buildings, BIS, New Delhi
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Period Weighta Distribution of Distribution of Linke
S.N s ge Weightage Weightage
Chapter Name d with
o. allocat
allotted R U A A R U A A CO
ed
p n p n
1 Introduction 4 03 CO1
3 1
.
2 Subsurface 10 14 CO1
. construction
3 3 8 1 1 1
failures and
repairs
3 Surface 6 11 CO2
. construction
3 8 1 1
failures and
repairs
4 Masonry and 9 14 CO3

. concrete failures, 3 3 8 1 1 1
repairs
5. Manmade and 6 14 CO4
Natural failures, 3 3 8 1 1 1
rehabilitation
6 Maintenance 10 14 CO5
. problems and 3 3 8 1 1 1
their solutions
Higher order CO1,

question from CO2,
any or 1
10 1 CO4
combination of 0
the chapters
1,2,3,5
1 1 5
Total 45 80 6 4 5
8 2 0
Test-II

II
QUALITY CONTROL AND SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION
Course No. Of
code period/week
Quality Control
C-505 and Safety in 04 60 20 80
Construction
S. No. Of Cos
Major Topics
No. periods Mapped
1 Specifications and Standards 12 CO1

Quality control, Statistical Analysis and
2 12 CO2
Tolerance
Introduction to safety in construction
3 08 CO3
Activities
4 Causes of Accidents and Safety Measures 22 CO4
5 Preventive measures for Accidents 06 CO4
Total 60
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand the fundamentals of quality control in

(i)
Course construction
Objectives Familiarize with the fundamentals of safety aspects and
(ii)
preventive measures of accidents in construction
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Explain the specifications and standards for

CO1 C505.1
various works
Analyse the aspects of quality control, statistical

CO2 C505.2 analysis and tolerance limits for different types
Course construction activities.
Outcomes
Analyses the safety measures to be taken in
CO3 C505.3
constructions
Analyse the causes and preventive measures of

CO4 C505.4
accidents
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
LEARNING 1.0 Specifications and standards

OUTCOMES 1.1 List different specifications of buildings.
1.2 Explain functional aspects of different structures.
1.3 Describe detailed specification for various items of
work.
1.4 Prepare detailed specification from general
description.
1.5 List relevant IS codes.
1.6 Identify sizes for building components and Identify
the standards.
1.7 Understand standards for industrial buildings.
1.8 Explain Management aspects of quality control.
1.9 Describe Advisory Organization, Describe
Management Functions and Regulations.
1.10 State PWD & CPWD Guidelines for field officers.
2.0 Quality control, Statistical Analysis and Tolerance
2.1 Describe control aspects of batching and mixing.
2.2 Explain the inspection of reinforcement grills.
2.3 Explain the inspection and examination of formwork.
2.4 Describe the quality of the filler materials.
2.5 Establish relationship between the strength of
brickwork and
strength of mortar.
2.6 Describe Mathematical probability.
2.7 Explain sampling plan and sampling risks
ofacceptance and
rejections.
1.1 State the tolerance levels in construction industry.
2.10 Explain visual appearance and dimensional
accuracies.
3.0 Introduction to safety in construction Activities
3.1 Describe the safety requirements against fire
hazards
3.2 Describe the safety measures while using
construction machinery
3.3 Describe the safety precautions to be taken during
the demolition of buildings
3.4 Describe the preventive methods of accidents
4.0 Causes of Accidents and Safety Measures

4.0 Define accidents, List the causes of accidents.
4.1 Explain role of loss control approach in the cost of
the accidents.
4.2 Describe the cost aspects of accidents and
measures.
4.3 Describe the General safety program, Prepare
accidents reports
4.4 Describe the safety measures to be taken for
storage and handling of building materials.
4.5 Describe the safety requirements in formwork and
scaffolding.
4.6 Explain the safety measures to be taken in
excavation & pile driving in foundation.
4.7 Describe the safety measures to be taken in
construction of building elements.
demolition of buildings.
4.9 Describe the safety measures to be taken for hot
bituminous works.
supporting structural work.
5.0 Prevention of accidents
5.0 Define 1. Risk and 2. Risk management.
5.1 Explain the role of risk management.
5.2 Describe the planning for accident prevention.
5.3 Evaluate risks and losses and cost control works
5.4 Describe the management measures for controlling
losses
COURSE CONTENT
1) Specifications and Standards

Specification for buildings – functional aspects of residential, commercial and
industrial structures – Detailed Specifications for various items of work –
preparation of detailed specification from general description – Modular
Coordination – relevant IS codes – Preferred size for building components
– Performance standards – Standards for industrial buildings-Management
aspects of quality control – advisory organization management functions –
Statutory regulations – State PWD & CPWD guide lines for field officers.
2) Quality control, Statistical Analysis and Tolerance
Production & quality control of concrete – general – batching –
mixing – inspection of reinforcement grill and form work-Quality control in
Masonry works – quality of filler materials – Brick – stone – quality of
mortar – relation between strength of brick work Vs strength of bricks Vs
strength of mortar- Statistical basis for modern quality control – Simple
examples of mathematical probability – Sampling plan – Sampling risks of
acceptance and rejection- Tolerance levels in construction industry –
Visual appearance – dimensional accuracies.
3) Introduction to safety in construction Activities
Introduction – safety against fire hazards – Fire & firefighting – Fire rating
of building materials – fire prevention standards – safety in use of
construction machinery – lifting machinery, earth moving machinery and
conveyors, demolition of buildings – Loading standards for buildings –
The safety programme – Accident due to fall – preventive methods.
4) Causes of Accidents and Safety Measures
Causes of accidents – Classification of construction accidents – Cost of
accidents – loss control approach in the cost of accidents – measurement
of accidents – Salient features of ‘A safety programme’ – General
safety programmes for construction – Accident report-Safety Measure for
storage & handling of building materials – Safety Measure in construction of
elements of building – Safety in excavation & pile driving –foundations
– form work – scaffolding – roofing – safety on fragile roof – other
items of work – Safety Measure in demolition of buildings – Safety Measure
for hot bituminous works
– Safety Measure for scaffolding, Ladders, formwork and other equipment
– erection of prefabricated components and transportation – erection of
steel structures – Safety measures for excavation.
5) Preventive measures for Accidents
Planning for accident prevention – Evaluation of risk and loss potential in
the work. Vis-a-vis cost control measures – loss control approach through
accident prevention and other risk management measures for controlling
losses due to personnel, legal, liability losses – property losses.
REFERENCES:
1. Specification Writing,A.J and C.J.Willis, Crossby Lockwood, London
2. Quality Control and Reliability ,Norbert L Enrick , Industrial Press Inc.,NY
3. Standards in Buildings ,R.Nagarajan,Pitman publishing
4. Safety in Construction Industry,VincentG.Bush, OSHA
5. Safety in Construction Industry ,S.Purushotham&G.Vaidyanathan, Central
Labour Institute, Bombay
6. Accident Prevention in Construction, Associated General Contractors of
America:
7. Standards on safety, BIS, New Delhi.
MODEL BLUE PRINT

No. Of Weighta Distribution of Distribution of Cos
S.
Major Topics period ge of Weightage Weightage Map
No
s marks A ped
R U Ap An R U An
p
Specifications
1 12 09 09 -- -- -- 3 - - -- CO1
and Standards
Quality control,
Statistical
2 12 14 -- 14 -- -- -- 3 -- -- CO2
Analysis and
Tolerance
Introduction to
safety in
3 08 11 -- 11 -- -- -- 2 -- -- CO3
construction
Activities
Causes of
Accidents and
4 22 22 06 16 -- -- 2 2 -- -- CO4
Safety
Measures
Preventive
5 measures for 06 14 06 08 -- -- 2 1 -- -- CO4
Accidents
Higher order
question from CO2,
any or CO3
-- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1
combination &
of 2,3,4 & CO4
5Chapters
Total 60 80 18 52 -- 10 7 8 -- 1
Test-II
Unit Test – From 3.4 to .5

II
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Course No. Of
code period/week
Construction
C-506 Management and 03 45 20 80
Entrepreneurship
S. No. Of Cos
Major Topics
No Periods Mapped
1. Introduction 3 CO1
2. Organizational Aspects 6 CO1
3. Management Tools 8 CO2
4. Contracts and Tenders and Arbitration 10 CO3
5. Management of Resources in Construction 8 CO4
6. Entrepreneurship 6 CO5
7. Human Relations and Professional Ethics 4 CO5
Total 45
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Familiarize with the Preliminary Planning &
(i) Organizational aspects, constructional planning, contracts
Course and tender systems.
Objectives
Gain adequate knowledge in managing different
(ii) resources in construction field and human relations and
professional ethics.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
State the importance of project management and

CO 1 C-506.1
Organizational aspects.
Analyse the tools of Management for construction
CO 2 C-506.2
projects in planning.
Course Discuss different types of contracts, Tendering
CO 3 C-506.3
Outcomes systems and Arbitration.
Analyse the principles of management of Resources
CO 4 C-506.4
like Men, Material and Machinery.
Discuss the role of Entrepreneur for better outcome
CO 5 C-506.5 in construction industry by inculcating better Human
Relations.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Introduction
Learning 1.1. Define Management.
Outcomes 1.2. State the functions of Management.
1.3. State the need for scientific Management of projects.
1.4. Describe the fields level management.
1.5. Describe the sequencing of work
2.0 Organizational Aspects
2.1. Explain the organizational structure of any Engineering
department (Government).
2.2. List the duties of different officers of an Engineering
department.
2.3. Define Preliminary estimate, Detailed estimate,
administrative approval and technical sanction.
2.4. State the limit of powers of sanction by various officers
in an Engineering Department (Government).
2.5. Give the Organizational structure of a public sector
construction company.
2.6. Compare the Headquarters versus Regional and
Project Management.
2.7. List the duties of Chief Engineer in a construction
company.
2.8. List the duties of a Resident Engineer.
3.0 Management Tools
3.1 Define CPM and PERT.
3.2 State the advantages of CPM and PERT.
3.3 Explain the use of bar chart and its limitations
3.4 Define Network, Activity, Event, Activity duration,
Dummy activity, EST, EFT, LST, LFT, Total float, free
float and Critical path.
3.5 Prepare Network diagram using basic rules of network
formation.
3.6 Calculate Project duration using CPM network identifying
critical activities, critical path, free float and total float.
3.7 State the limitations of CPM.
3.8 Distinguish between CPM and PERT.
4.0 Contract, Tendering systems and Arbitration
4.1 Define contract, State the contents of a contract
document, and explain different contract systems
available for construction works.
4.2 List the merits and limitations of each of the
contractsystems, List
the general conditions of contract for a civil engineering
construction project.
4.3 Define tender, Explain the need for calling of tenders,
List the steps involved in fixing up agency through
tender system.
4.4 Draft a tender notice for a work, Prepare tender
documents.
4.5 Explain the need of earnest money and security
deposits.
4.6 Prepare a comparative statement.
4.7 Explain the method of selecting a contractor from the
tenders, List out the conditions of contract agreements.
4.8 Define the terms Dispute and Arbitration, Explain the
scope for disputes in a construction industry.
4.9 State the need for arbitration, List the qualifications of an
arbitrator, List the advantages of arbitration.
5.0 Management of Resources in construction
5.1 Explain the scope of materials management, Classify the
common building materials based on the procurement,
Explain different Stages of materials management.
5.2 Explain the points to be observed in the storage of
perishable and non-perishable store materials, Explain
the terms Indent, Invoice and Bin card, Explain the
importance of verification of stores.
5.3 Explain the need for mechanization, Explain the need for
optimum utilization of plant and equipment, Explain the
financial impact of mechanization.
5.4 Explain about the preventive maintenance of plant and
equipment.
5.5 Explain the importance of training of operators.
5.6 Explain the need for overhauling or replacement.
5.7 Explain the requirements of centering, shuttering and
scaffolding
5.8 State the importance of finance as a resource.
5.9 Explain the different stages at which cost control can be
achieved.
5.10 Explain the financial control at head office level and site
level.
6.0 Entrepreneurship
6.1 Define 1. Entrepreneur and 2. Entrepreneurship.
6.2 Outline the concepts of entrepreneurship.
6.3 State the role of entrepreneur in economic
development.
6.4 List the characteristics of an entrepreneur.
6.5 Evaluate the risks and rewards of an entrepreneur.
6.6 State the role of financial institutions in entrepreneurial
development.
7.0 Human relations and professional ethics
7.1 State role of Human relations and Performance in
organization.
7.2 State the role of Interpersonal relationship for effective
work culture.
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction
Definition and concept of management – need for scientific management
of projects – need for attitudinal change – Scope and characteristics
of construction Industry.
2. Organizational Aspects
Govt. Organizations: Organizational structure of P.W.D. – duties of various
officers – Preliminary estimates – detailed estimate – budget provision
– administrative approval and technical sanction – powers of sanction-Public
sector organizations: Organizational structure of a construction company –
Headquarters versus Regional and Project Management–Duties of Chief
Engineer – preparation of bids – duties of Resident Engineer.
3. Management Tools
Different Management Tools – Gantt Bar chart, modified Gantt bar chart –
Limitations of bar charts – Introduction CPM and PERT – advantages of CPM
and PERT – terms used in CPM – formation of network – Basic
rules – Problems on determination of critical path – limitations of CPM –
comparison of CPM and PERT.
4. Contracts, Tenders and Arbitration
Contracts – Legality of contracts – contract document – types of
contracts – piece work contracts – item rate contracts – Lump sum
contracts – percentage contracts – negotiated rates – departmental
execution of works – merits and limitations of each contract system –
conditions of contract for civil engineering works-Tenders – Necessity of
tenders – Sealed tenders – tender notice – tender documents – Earnest
Money and Security Deposits – Opening of tenders – comparative
statement – acceptance of tenders – work order – contract agreement –
conditions of contract-Arbitration – Disputes – disputes in construction
industry – arbitration – need for arbitration – arbitrator –
qualifications of arbitrator – advantages of arbitration.
5. Management of Resources in Construction Industry
Materials management – Scope – Classification of common building materials
based on the procurement – procedural formalities for acquisition – stages
ofmaterials management-
Plant and Equipment – Need for mechanization – Optimum utilization of plant
and equipment – Financial impact of mechanization – Preventive
maintenance –Overhauling and replacement – Cantering, shuttering and
scaffolding requirements-Financial Management – Finance as Resource –
Purpose of cost control – stages of cost control – pre contract stage and
postcontract stage – Financial control at head office level and site level.
6. Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneur – concept, definition, role, expectation – characteristics of
entrepreneur – risk and rewards of an entrepreneur – role of financial
institution in entrepreneurial development.
7. Human Relations and Professional Ethics

Human relations and performance in organization – Understand self and
others for effective behaviour – Interpersonal relationship for effective
work culture – Need for professional ethics.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Management in construction Industry, P.Dharwadker,Oxford& IBH Publishing

Co. Pvt., Ltd.
2. Construction Management And Accounts, V.N.Vazirani& S.P. Chandola,
Khanna Publishers.
3. Construction Planning and Management,U.K. Shrivastava,Galgotia
Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Construction Management and Planning,B. Sengupta & H. Guna , Tata Mc.
Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd
.
5. Construction Management and Accounts, Harpal Singh,Tata Mc. Graw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd.
MODEL BLUE PRINT

No. Distribution of Distribution of
Weighta Cos
Of Weightage Weightage
Major Topics ge of Map
S. perio
marks A ped
No ds R U Ap An R U An
p
1 Introduction 3 03 03 -- -- -- 1 - - -- CO1
2 Organizational
6 11 03 08 -- -- 1 1 -- -- CO1
Aspects
3 Management
8 11 03 08 -- -- 1 1 -- -- CO2
Tools
Contracts and
4
Tenders and 10 14 03 11 -- -- 1 2 -- -- CO3
Arbitration
Management of
5 Resources in 8 14 03 11 -- -- 1 2 -- -- CO4
Construction
6 Entrepreneurshi
6 06 06 -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- CO5
p
Human
7 Relations and
4 11 03 08 -- -- 1 1 -- -- CO5
Professional
Ethics
Higher order CO2,
question from CO3,
any or
-- 10 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 1 CO4,
combination
of 3,4,5,6 & 7 &
Chapters CO5
Total 45 80 24 46 -- 10 8 7 -- 1
Test-II

II
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWING
Marks for Marks for

Course No. Of Total no.
code period/week Of periods
Structural
C-507 Engineering 03 45 40 60
Drawing
S. Major Topics No. Of Cos

No. Periods Mapped
Structural Planning and marking of Frame
1. 6 CO1
components
2. R.C.C. Drawings 33 CO2
Reading and interpretation of Structural
3. 6 CO3
Drawings
Total 45
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

(i) Prepare the working drawings for steel reinforcement in different
RCC members and able to read and understand the given
Course drawings.
Objectives (ii) Calculate Steel quantity required from the given drawings.
(iii) Gain knowledge on how to draw and read the different structural
steel members.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 C507.1 Draw the individual RCC members and the

Course placement of reinforcement in it.
Outcomes CO2 C507.2 Draw the working drawings and evaluate the bar
bending schedule for the given drawings.
CO3 C507.3 Read and understand the working drawings.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 structural planning and marking of Frame components
Learning 1.1 Understand Positioning and Orientation of columns
Outcomes 1.2 Understand Positioning of beams
1.3 Understand Spanning of slabs
1.4 Explain layout of stairs
1.5 List types of footings
1.6 Prepare member reference scheme of Column reference
scheme and Grid reference scheme (Scheme
recommended by IS:5525 – recommended for detailing of
reinforced concrete works and SP-34)
2.0 Draw the detailed working drawings of R.C.C.
2.1 Draw the longitudinal section and cross sections of singly
reinforced simply supported beam, prepare schedule of
reinforcement and quantity of steel for singly reinforced simply
supported beam
2.2 Draw the longitudinal and cross section of lintel cum
sunshade, Prepare schedule of reinforcement and quantity of
steel for lintel cum sunshade
2.3 Draw the plan and longitudinal section of one-way slab showing
reinforcement details, Prepare schedule of reinforcement and
quantity of steel for one-way slab showing reinforcement
details
2.4 Draw the details of reinforcement of two-way simply
supported slab with corners not held down condition, Draw
top and bottom plan and section along short and long spans
of two-way simply supported slab with corners not held down
condition, Prepare schedule of reinforcement of two-way
simply supported slab with corners not held down condition
2.5 Draw the details of reinforcement of two-way simply
supported slab with corners held down conditions, Draw top
and bottom plan and section along short and long spans have
to be drawn. (Scheduling of reinforcement is not necessary).
2.6 Draw the details of reinforcement of one-way continuous slab
along with T- beam with details of slab and T-beam (plan and
section of continuous slab and longitudinal section of T-beam
have to be drawn). (Scheduling of steel is not necessary)
2.7 Draw the details of column and square footing (plan and
sectional elevation) prepare schedule of reinforcement of
column and footing and quantity of steel required.
2.8 Draw the reinforcement details of dog legged stair case
(section only) prepare schedule of reinforcement for one flight
including landing.
3.0 Read and interpret the drawings
3.1 Understand the details of reinforcement from the given
drawings
3.2 Fill in the details of reinforcements in a drawing.
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Structural planning and marking of Frame components
Draw the position of columns, beams, slabs, stairs and footing in a given line
diagram of building – Prepare member reference scheme of Column
reference scheme as per IS:696 code of practice for general engineering
drawing and Grid reference scheme as per IS:5525 – recommended for
detailing of reinforced concrete works and SP-34
2.0 R.C.C Drawings

Draw the longitudinal section and cross sections and Prepare schedule of
reinforcement and quantity of steel for – Singly reinforced simply
supported rectangular beam – Lintel cum sunshade –Simply supported
one-way slab – Two-way slab simply supported corners not held down –
Two-way slab simply supported corners held down – One-way continuous
slab and T-beam (with details of slab and T-beam) – Column with square
footing of uniform thickness.- Stair case – stairs spanning longitudinally (Dog
legged stair case)
3.0 Reading and interpretation of Structural Drawings
Understand the details of reinforcement from the given drawings - Fill in the
details of reinforcement in a drawing.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Designing and detailing hand book SP-34
MODEL BLUE PRINT

S. No. Of Weightage Distribution of Distribution CO’s
Major Topics
No periods of marks Weightage of Weightage Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Structural
Planning and
1. marking of 6 10 -- 10 -- -- -- 1 -- -- CO1
Frame
components
R.C.C.
2 33 40 -- 40 -- -- -- 2 -- -- CO2
Drawings
Reading and
interpretation of
3. 6 10 -- 10 -- -- -- 1 -- -- CO3
Structural
Drawings
Total 45 60 60 4
Note: In question paper Part-A consists of two questions of 10 marks each, one from
Structural Planning and marking of Frame components and other from Reading
and interpretation of Structural Drawings. Part-B consists of two questions of 20
marks each from R.C.C. Drawings.
LIFE SKILLS
Course Course No. Of Total No. Of Marks Marks for

Code Title Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
C-508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60
S. No. Unit Title No of Periods Cos Mapped

1 Attitude 4 CO1
2 Adaptability 4 CO1, CO2
3 Goal Setting 4 CO1, CO2, CO3
4 Motivation 4 CO1, CO2, CO3
5 Time Management 4 CO2
6 Critical thinking 4 CO3
7 Creativity 4 CO3
8 Problem Solving 5 CO3
9 Team Work 4 CO4
10 Leadership 4 CO4
11 Stress Management 4 CO4
Total Periods 45
To understand the importance of Life skills for acceptable, sustainable

Course and ethical behaviour in academic, professional and social settings
Objectives To exhibit language competence appropriate to acceptable social and

professional behaviour.

CO1 Demonstrates positive attitude and be able to adapt to people and events
CO2 Fixes personal and professional goals and manages time to meet targets
CO3 Exhibits critical and lateral thinking skills for problem solving.
CO4 Shows aptitude for working in teams in a stress free manner and
sometimes/ very often/ mostly display leadership traits.
To demonstrate time management, stress management, team

skills, problem solving ability to manage oneself in academic,
professional and social settings.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:
Note: Every Activity based Question that focuses on Cos and responses as
exhibited through communication has to be given marks for the following parameters
 Clarity of Thinking as Exhibited through Content

 Features of Etiquette
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good/ Satisfactory/ Poor’ levels

of competence
Level of Parameters of Assessment

Competence Clarity of thinking as exhibited through
Features of etiquette
content
Thinking is extremely logical and suggested
course of action is feasibile
Exhibits courtesy to all
Shows creativity and uniqueness
Outstanding most appropriately
10 Exhibits expert use of expression
with confidence
(organizational devices and discourse markers)
that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical
Suggested course of action is feasible
Exhibits courtesy to all
Shows traces of creativity
Very Good to a considerable
8/9 Exhibits good expression (organizational
level.
devices and discourse markers) that denote
clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical most of the Exhibits courtesy /

Good time. Lacks creativity or out of the box thinking politeness to an
6/7
as expressed through content. acceptable level.
Thinking is logical; However, expressing Has courtesy but often
Satisfactory
4/5 content is disjointed and disorganized. fumbles with language.
Poor Thoughts as expressed through content are Fails to show courtesy
3 or less
incoherent. Language skills are very limited. to others.
than 3
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.
Perio
ds
Ma Ver
Alloc
S Questions based on x Po Satisfa Go y Outstan
ated
N Course Outcomes Mar or ctory od Go ding
for
o. ks >3 4 /5 6/7 od 10
practi
8/9
cal
work
1 Short presentation on
GOALS with Timeline and 12 10
Action Plan
2 State what you will do in
the given situation
(Assesses adaptability and 12 10
critical thinking skills,
leadership, team skills )
3 In how many different and
creative way can you use
8 10
(Object) other than
its primary use
4 What solutions can you
13 10
think of for problem.
Total 45 60
Note: The marks that are awarded for the student for 40 to be increased
proportionally for 60.
Learning Outcomes
1. Attitude Matters:
1.1 Understand the importance of positive attitude and the consequences of
negative attitude.
1.2 Demonstrate positive attitude in dealing with work-related issues and in
personal life.
2. Adaptability…. makes life easy:
2.1 Understand the significance of adaptability.
2.2 Show adaptability whenever needed, both at place of work and on personal front.
3. Goal Setting … life without a Goal is a rudderless boat!
3.2 Understand the SMART features of goal-setting.
3.3 State one’s short-term and long-term goals and spell out plans to achieve
them.
4. Motivation … triggers success!
4.2 Comprehend the need for motivation in order to achieve success in life.
4.3 State how one is motivated in life.
4.4 Show the impact of motivation on one’s life
5. Time Management… the need of the Hour!
5.2 Understand the value of time management and prioritizing in life
5.3 Demonstrate the effect of time management on one’s professional work.
6. Critical Thinking … logic is the key!
6.1 Distinguish between facts and assumptions
6.2 Use logical thinking in dealing with professional matters
7. Creativity … the essential you!
7.2 Understand the importance of thinking out of the box in dealing with
critical issues
7.3 Solve problems using creativity / imagination
8. Problem Solving … there is always a way out!
8.2 Understand the need for and importance of problem solving.
8.3 Use logic or creativity to solve a problem at workplace or home.
9. Team Work… together we are better!
9.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
9.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
10. Leadership… the meaning of a leading!
10.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
10.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
11. Stress Management… live life to the full!
11.1 Understand what causes stress and how to cope with stress at workplace.
11.2 Demonstrate how stress can be overcome in a healthy way.
FIELD PRACTICES

Course Course No. Of
Of Formative Summative
Field
C-509 07 105 40 60
Practices
No. Of
S.No. Chapter/Unit title Name CO’s Mapped
periods/week
1. Marking for the earth work of a

07 CO1
pillar &for the junction of two walls
2. Marking the centre line of a one
07 CO1
roomed building
3. Marking for the earth work of a 07
CO2
simple two roomed building
4. Marking for the centre line of a one 07
room in a residential building with
CO2
reference to the given point using
Total Station
5. Preparation of cement mortar with
specified mix proportion by manual
07 CO3
mixing and volumetric
proportioning.
6. Construction of 230mm thick brick
wall in English Bond at the corner
10 CO3
of a Wall and check for
horizontality and verticality.
7. Supervisory skills of Plastering of a
10 CO4
wall.
8. Supervisory skills for construction
of Cement Concrete Flooring and
10 CO4
of fixing of floor trap, gully trap and
their connections to drain.
9. Placement of reinforcement in an
Isolated Column Footing with
proper cover & Positioning of 10 CO5
shuttering to the column
reinforcement
10. Placement of reinforcement for sun
shade (with specific attention of 10 CO5
location).
11. Placement of reinforcement for 10 CO5
stairs spanning longitudinal case
(with specific attention at the
junction of waist and landing
slabs).
12. Placement of reinforcement for
slab (with specific attention of
chairs). OR
Placement of reinforcement for a 10 CO5

Beam column junction (with
specific attention to Earth quake
resistance design).
Total Periods 105
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the syllabus, the student shall be able to
Learn the marking for earthwork, footings,

(i) basement and walls/columns of simple
buildings.
COURSE (ii) Familiarise with the process of plastering,
OBJECTIVES concreting and fixing of traps
Gain knowledge on the placement of
(iii) reinforcement for different components of a
building.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Mark for earthwork of pillars, junction of

CO 1 C-509.1
two walls, simple buildings.
CO 2 C-509.2 Mark centre line for simple buildings.
Prepare cement mortar mix by
COURSE CO 3 C-509.3 volumetric batching, arrange bricks in
OUTCOMES different bonds to plumb.
Supervise plastering of walls, C.C.
CO 4 C-509.4
Flooring and fixing of traps.
Position shuttering and reinforcement
CO 5 C-509.5
in various components of building.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Marking for the earth work of a pillar & for the earth work
of a junction of two walls
1.1 Note down the measurements of pillar at
superstructure and measurements of earth work
excavation.
1.2 Mark the centre lines of pillar in either direction.
1.3 Mark the size of pillar with reference to the centre lines.
1.4 Mark the size by pouring the lime.
1.5 Read the width of walls at super structure
fromdrawing.
1.6 Mark the centre line of main walls from the markings
onmarking pedestals.
1.7 Mark the centre line of cross wall perpendicular to
main wall with the help of wooden set square or by
other means.
1.8 Transfer the same by pouring the lime on the centre
line.
2.0 Marking the centre line of a one roomed building

2.1 Read the width of walls at super structure and width
ofearth work excavation from drawing.
LEARNING 2.2 Mark the centre line of main wall from the markings
OUTCOMES onmarking pedestals.
2.3 Mark the centre line of cross wall perpendicular to
main wall with the help of wooden set square or by
other means.
2.4 Mark the width of walls with reference to centre lines
ofwalls.
2.5 Transfer the same by pouring the lime to proceed for
excavation.
2.6 Mark the width of excavation with the help of threads
placed parallel to the centre line and at a distance
equal to half the width of excavation on either side of
centre line.
2.7 Transfer the same by pouring lime to proceed
forexcavation.
3.0 Marking for the earth work of a simple two roomed

building
3.1 Prepare the centre line diagram from a given drawing.
3.2 Note down width of earthwork excavation.
3.3 Mark the centre lines on the ground with the help
ofplumb bob.
3.4 Check the accuracy by measuring length of two
diagonals and their equality.
3.5 Mark the width of excavation with the help of threads
placed parallel to the centre line and at a distance
equal to half the width of excavation on either side of
centre line.
3.6 Transfer the same by pouring lime to proceed for
excavation.
4.0 Marking for the centre line of a one room in a residential

building with reference to the given point using Total
Station
4.1 Place the total station at the point of known co-
ordinates.
4.2 Perform temporary adjustments.
4.3 Key in the known co-ordinates of the point.
4.4 Place the target prism on the ground to locate the first
corner point of known/calculated co-ordinate of centre
line of the room.
4.5 Transfer the first corner point on to the ground.
4.6 Repeat the procedure to locate the second, third, fourth
corner points of known co-ordinates and transfer the
points on to the ground.
5.0 Preparation of cement mortar with specified mix

proportion by manual mixing and volumetric
proportioning
5.1 Note the mix proportion and take the respective
quantities of cement and sand (volume of 1bag of
cement = 0.035 cubic meter).
5.2 Place the measured quantity of sand to a suitable stack
on an impervious hard surface.
5.3 Spread the cement uniformly over the sand stack.
5.4 Dry mix both sand and cement thoroughly to a uniform
colour.
5.5 Sprinkle sufficient quantity of water on the dry mix while
thoroughly mixing the dry mortar, which can be used
for 30 minutes.
5.6 Continue the mixing to bring the mortar to a stiff paste
of working consistency.
6.0 Construction of 230mm thick brick wall in English Bond

at the corner of a wall and check for horizontality and
verticality
6.1 Soak the bricks in water and air dry before their use.
6.2 Prepare C.M of specified proportion and keep ready for
use
6.3 Sketc.h the two threads perpendicular to each other
atspecified corner in line with the outer edges of wall.
6.4 Arrange the quoin header in line with the two
perpendicular threads
6.5 Arrange the queen closure adjacent to quoin header.
6.6 Continue one layer with headers on one face and
stretc.hers on the perpendicular face to the true line.
6.7 Continue the next layer with stretc.hers on headers and
headers on stretc.hers.
6.8 Check the verticality of the wall with the help of plumb
bob and horizontality with the help of level tube for
every three to four layers.
6.9 Place the bricks, with frog at the top.
6.10 Fill the vertical joint in each layer with mortar using
trowel.
7.0 Supervisory skills of Plastering of a wall

7.1 Prepare the surface by raking the joints and brushing
the efflorescence if any by brushing and scraping dust
and loose mortar.
7.2 Remove efflorescence if any by brushing and scraping.
7.3 Wash the surface thoroughly with water and keep the
surface wet before commencement of plastering.
7.4 Complete the ceiling plaster before commencement of
wall plaster
7.5 Fill all put log holes in advance of the plastering.
7.6 Start plastering from top and work down towards the
floor.
7.7 Apply 15cm x 15cm plaster of specified thickness first,
horizontally and vertically at not more than 2.0m
intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges.
7.8 Check the surfaces of gauges for truly in plane of the
finished plaster surface by using a plumb bob.
7.9 Apply the mortar on the wall between the gauges with a
trowel to a thickness slightly more than the specific
thickness.
7.10 Use a wooden straight edge to bring to the true surface
with small upward and sideways movement at a time
reaching across the gauges.
7.11 Use trowel to obtain final finish surface as a smooth
OR wooden float for sandy granular texture.
7.12 Avoid excessive use of trowel or over working the float.
8.0 Supervisory skills for construction of Cement Concrete

Flooring and for fixing of floor trap, gully trap and their
connections to drain.
a. Base Concrete
8.1 Use cement concrete of specified mix
8.2 Provide base concrete with the slopes towards floor
trap required for the flooring using tube level.
8.3 Provide a slope ranging from 1:48 to 1:60 for flooring in
varandah, courtyard, kitchen and bath.
8.4 Provide a slope of 1:30 for floors in water closet
portion.
8.5 Provide necessary drop of 6mm to 10mm in flooring in
bath, water closet and kitchen near floor traps to avoid
spread of water.
b. Finishing
8.6 Follow the finishing of the surface immediately after the
cessation of beating.
8.7 Allow the surface till moisture disappears from it.
8.8 Use of dry cement or cement mortar to absorb
excessive moisture not permitted.
8.9 Spread the thick slurry of fresh cement and water @
2kg of cement over an area of 1 square metre of
flooring, while flooring concrete is still green.
8.10 The cement slurry shall be properly processed and
finished smooth.
8.11 Finish the edge of sunk floor rounded with C.M 1:2 and
finish with a floating coat of neat cement.
8.12 Cure the surface for a minimum period of 10 days.
8.13 Lay the flooring in lavatories and bath rooms only after
fixing of water closets and squatting pans and floor
traps.
8.14 Plug the traps while laying and open after curing and
cleaning.
c. Fixing of traps and their connections to drain.
8.15 Identify the Floor trap and Gully trap

8.16 Identify the location of fixing the floor trap and gully trap
8.17 Connect the floor trap to the drain pipe.
8.18 Fix the joint using proper filler and adhesive material
such that the joint is water tight.
8.19 Fix gully trap on cement concrete foundation 65 mm x
65 mm and not less than 10 mm thick.
8.20 Prepare a mix of concrete 1:5:10 and jointing of gully
outlet to the branch drain is done
8.21 Tarred gasket soaked in thick cement slurry shall first
be placed round the spigot of the drain
8.22 The remainder of the socket is filled with stiff mixture of
cement mortar in the proportion of 1:1.
9.0 Placement of reinforcement for an Isolated Column

Footing and positioning of shuttering to the column
reinforcement.
9.1 The grill of column footing should be kept ready as per
design data.
9.2 Mark the centre lines in both directions on levelling
course / bedding concrete with the help of plumb bob
from the string stretc.hed over the marking pedestals.
9.3 Mark centre of the outer reinforcing rods of footing in
either direction.
9.4 Carefully place the grill such that centre line markings
of outermost reinforcing rods are exactly above the
centre lines marked on the bedding concrete.
9.5 Place the chairs/cover blocks of specified thickness
below the bottom layer of reinforcing rods.
9.6 Exercise care for rectangular column footing while
placing reinforcing mat such that bars in longer
direction are at bottom.
9.7 Place the column reinforcement with chairs or cover
blocks over the foundation mat.
9.8 Prepare the reinforcement as per the drawing.
9.9 Check for the verticality of column reinforcement with
plumb bob
9.10 Provide lateral support for the column reinforcement to
keep them in position.
9.11 Prepare the shuttering and apply waste oil inside
surface of the shuttering box and fastenings
9.12 Place the shuttering box around the column and fix the
fastenings.
9.13 Check for the verticality of shuttering with plumb bob
10.0 Placement of reinforcement for sun shade (with specific

attention of location)
10.1 Prepare the reinforcement as per design
10.2 Prepare the centering for sun shade
10.3 Place the grill for sun shade such that the main
reinforcement is in the top zone leaving the cover
10.4 Place the cement mortar cover blocks or chairs of
specified height below the main reinforcement to have
prescribed cover above the reinforcement
10.5 Observe for sufficient length of anchorage of main
reinforcement into the lintel or the beam etc..
11.0 Placement of reinforcement for stairs spanning

longitudinal case (with specific attention at the junction of
waist and landing slabs)
11.1 Read the reinforcement details from the bar bending
schedule
11.2 Prepare the shuttering for the stairs as per the design.
11.3 Bend the reinforcing bars to the shape and length
confirming to the bar bending schedule.
11.4 Place the bars at the specified spacing maintaining the
cover with the help of chairs or cover blocks.
11.5 Exercise care in the placement of reinforcement at the
junction of waist and loading slab.
11.6 Tie the distributors parallel to raisers at the specified
spacing
12.0 Placement of reinforcement for slab (with specific
attention of chairs) and placement of reinforcement for a
beam column junction (with specific attention to Earth
Quake resistance design)
12.1 Prepare the reinforcement as per design
12.2 Rest the reinforcement in slabs on bar chairs
12.3 Securely fix the bar to chairs so that it won’t move
when concrete is placed around it.
12.4 Locate reinforcing bars and mesh so that there is
enough room between the bars to place and compact
the concrete.
12.5 Anchor the reinforcement to improve the transfer of
tensile forces to the steel by bending or hooking or
lapping the bars.
12.6 Read the reinforcement details from the bar bending
schedule
12.7 Note down proper cover-clear cover, nominal cover or
effective cover to reinforcement.
12.8 Decide detailed location of opening/hole and supply
adequate details for reinforcements around the
openings.
12.9 Show enlarged details at corners, intersection of
beams and column junction
12.10 Avoid congestion of bars at points where members
intersect and make certain that all reinforcement is
properly placed.
12.11 In the case of bundled bars, Make lapped splice of
bundled bars by splicing one bar at a time
12.12 Stagger such individual splices within the bundle. Make
sure that hooked and bent up bars can be placed and
have adequate concrete protection.
Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No Experiment title Key competency
1 Marking for the earth work of a pillar. Mark the size of pillar with reference
Marking for the earth work for the to the centre lines.
junction of two walls Mark the centre line of main walls
from the markings on marking
pedastals.
2 Marking the centre line of a one Mark the centre line of cross wall
roomed building perpendicular to main wall
3 Marking for the earth work of a Check the accuracy by measuring
simple two roomed building length of two diagonals and their
equality.
4 Marking for the centre line of a one Transfer the first corner point on to the
room in a residential building with ground.
reference to the given point using
Total Station
5 Preparation of cement mortar with Dry mix both sand and cement
specified mix proportion by manual thorough to a uniform colour
mixing and volumetric proportioning.
6 Construction of 230mm thick brick Arrange the quoin header in line with
wall in English Bond at the corner of the two perpendicular threads
a Wall and check for horizontality
and verticality.
7 Supervisory skills of Plastering of a Complete the ceiling plaster before

wall. commencement of wall plaster
8 Supervisory skills for construction of The cement slurry shall be properly

Cement Concrete Flooring. processed and finished smooth. Fix
Supervisory skills of fixing of floor the joint using proper filler and
trap, gully trap and their connections adhesive material such that the joint is
to drain. water tight.
9 Placement of reinforcement in an Mark centre of the outer reinforcing
Isolated Column Footing with proper rods of footing in either direction.
cover. Positioning of shuttering to Place the shuttering box around the
the column reinforcement column and fix the fastenings
10 Placement of reinforcement for sun Place the grill for sun shade such that
shade (with specific attention of the main reinforcement is in
location) the top zone leaving the cover
11 Placement of reinforcement for stairs Exercise care in the placement of
spanning longitudinal case (with reinforcement of at the junction of
specific attention at the junction of waist and loading slab.
waist and landing slabs).
12 Placement of reinforcement for slab Locate reinforcing bars and mesh so
(with specific attention of chairs). that there is enough room between
Placement of reinforcement for a the bars to place and compact the
Beam column junction (with specific concrete.
attention to Earth quake resistance Decide detailed location of
design). opening/hole and supply adequate
details for reinforcements around the
openings.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Marking for the earth work of a pillar. Marking for the earth work for the
junction of two walls.
2. Marking the centre line of a one roomed building
3. Marking for the earth work of a simple two roomed building.
4. Marking for the centre line of a one room in a residential building with
reference to the given point using Total Station.
5. Preparation of cement mortar with specified mix proportion by manual mixing
and volumetric proportioning.
6. Construction of 230mm thick brick wall in English Bond at the corner of a Wall
and check for horizontality and verticality.
7. Supervisory skills of Plastering of a wall.
8. Supervisory skills for construction of Cement Concrete Flooring. Supervisory
skills of fixing of floor trap, gully trap and their connections to drain.
9. Placement of reinforcement in an Isolated Column Footing with proper
cover.Positioning of shuttering to the column reinforcement.
10. Placement of reinforcement for sun shade (with specific attention of location).
11. Placement of reinforcement for stairs spanning longitudinal case (with specific
attention at the junction of waist and landing slabs).
12. Placement of reinforcement for slab (with specific attention of chairs).
Placement of reinforcement for a Beam column junction (with specific
attention to Earth quake resistance design).
REFERENCE:
1. CPWD SPECIFICATIONS, Govt of India Vol I&II, 2009

2. Practical Civil engineering hand book, Kale and Shaw
3. Building Construction, S.P.Bindra & S.P.Arora, Dhanpat Rai publications
4. National Building Code, BIS publication
CAD PRACTICE – II
Course No. of
code period/week
CAD
C-510 06 90 40 60
PRACTICE-II
S. No. of COs
Major Topics
No. Periods Mapped
1. Culverts and Bridge Drawings 18 CO1
2. Public Health Engineering Drawings 18 CO2

3. Irrigation Engineering Drawings 21 CO3
4. Structural Engineering Drawings 21 CO4
5. MS Excel applications in Building Estimates 12 CO5
Total 90
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Gain the skills in drawing of different Engineering Structures

Course using CAD software
Objectives
2. Prepare the estimates for quantities of building components
using MS Excel.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1 C-510.1 Draw different views of culverts and bridges.

Course
Draw the Components of Public health Engineering
Outcomes CO 2 C-510.2 Structures
Draw the different views of Irrigation Engineering
CO 3 C-510.3 Structures
CO 4 C-510.4 Practice different Structural Engineering Drawings
Estimate the different quantities of building components
CO 5 C-510.5 using MS Excel.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Culverts and Bridge Drawings
Learning 1.1 Draws the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal
Outcomes sectional elevation of pipe culverts, R.C.C.- slab culvert and
identifies the component parts from the given set of
specifications.
1.2 Draws the sectional elevation, plan and cross section of two
span R.C.C. T-beam bridges from the given set of
specifications.
2.0 Public Health Engineering Drawings
2.1 Draws the sectional elevation, plan and cross-section of
public health engineering works: Septic Tank, RCC
Overhead tank (Square)
2.2 Draw the Layout of water supply and drainage
connections in residential buildings.
3.0 Irrigation Engineering structure Drawings
Earthen bunds –Homogeneous and Non
homogeneous
3.2 Tank surplus weir with splayed wing walls
3.3 Canal drop (notch type)
3.4 Tank sluice with tower head.
3.5 Canal regulator
4.0 Structural Engineering Drawings
4.1 Draw the sectional plan, elevation and cross section of built-
up beam showing the details of curtailment of plates and
connection details.
4.2 Draw the details of built-up column with lacing and batten
system showing the details of connections by welding (plan,
elevation with three systems of lacing/batten systems)
4.3 Draw the details of steel column base with details of gusset
plate. Plan, section parallel to web, section parallel to flange
showing the connections with welded joints.
5.0 MS Excel applications in Building Estimates
Prepare the detailed estimates for various buildings from the
given drawings, specifications and site conditions and report
using MS-word for:
5.1 Compound wall and Steps
5.2 Single Room with Verandah (Load bearing structure)
5.3 Single storied Residential building with one bed room (1
BHK) (Load bearing structure)
5.4 Single storied Residential building with two bed rooms(2
BHK) (Load bearing structure)
5.5 Two storied residential building (Framed structure)
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Culverts and Bridge Drawings
Preparation of Plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional
elevation of
a. Pipe Culvert (Single Pipe)
b. R.C.C. slab culvert with square returns
c. Two-span R.C.C. T-beam bridge with square walls.
2.0 Public Health Engineering Drawings
Preparation of Layouts of water supply & Sanitary lines in buildings
a. Sanitary block of a large building showing internal water supply and
sanitary fittings and plumbing fixtures (Plan & Section across each unit)
b. Water supply & sanitary connections to a residential building
c. Septic tank with details of connection to a residential building.
d. R.C.C overhead square tank (four columns with accessories).
3.0 Irrigation Engineering Drawings
Preparation of Plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional
elevation of
a. Earthen bunds –
a) Homogeneous b) Non-Homogeneous (Zoned embankment)
b. Tank surplus weir with splayed wing walls
c. Canal drop (notch type)
d. Tank sluice with tower head.
e. Canal regulator.
4.0 Structural Engineering Drawings
a) Draw the sectional plan, elevation and cross section of built-up
beamshowing the details of curtailment of plates and connection details.
b) Draw the details of built-up column with lacing and batten system
showing the details of connections by welding (plan, elevation with three
systems oflacing/batten systems)
c) Draw the details of steel column base with details of gusset plate.
Plan, section parallel to web, section parallel to flange showing the connections with
welded joints
5.0 MS Excel applications in Building Estimates
Prepare the detailed estimates for various buildings from the given drawings,
specifications and site conditions:
a) Compound wall and Steps
b) Single Room with Verandah (Load bearing structure)
c) Single storied Residential building with one bed room (1 BHK) (Load
bearing structure)
d) Single storied Residential building with two bed rooms (2 BHK) (Load
bearing structure)
e) Two storied residential building (Framed structure)
f) Reporting using MS-Word.
VI SEMESTER
VI SEMESTER
INDUSTRIALTRAINING
Marks for Marks for
Course
Course Title Duration Formative Summative
Code
C-601 Industrial Training 24 weeks 240 60
Time schedule
S.No Code TOPICS Duration
 Practical training in Industry
 Training Report Preparation
Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate,
Acknowledgements, Abstract, Contents
(introduction of Industry/Organization, Organization
Six
structure, Duties of different officers in the
1 C-601 Months
organization, List of works undertaken by
organization, Procedures adopted, M-book
recording at various stages of construction,
Procurement of Material, Labour & Equipment,
Skills Acquired, Conclusions, Charts, Diagrams,
Plans etc.., pertaining to organization, Literature.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Expose to real time working environment
Course 2. Enhance knowledge and skills already learnt in the
Objectives institution.
3. Acquire new skills of measuring, supervising and recording
civil engineering works.
4. Develop qualities like team & work culture, integrity,
responsibility and self-confidence.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
COURSE CO1 C601.1 Apply theory to practical work situations
OUT CO2 C601.2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits
COMES CO3 C601.3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-
confidence
CO4 C601.4 Write report in technical projects
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
The student shall be able to display the following skill sets
1) Planning & scheduling of works, material & man-power
2) Preparing the designs & drawings of structures and structural components
with respect to loads, strengths etc..,
3) Preparing& reading estimates for civil engineering works.
4) Drafting Skills (Like proposal for new works, repairs for existing works,
justification for proposals, Inspection /investigation reports, request for
man power /equipment / Budget)
5) Developing Inter-personal relationship skills such as working as a team
fora common cause. (Communication – Verbal, Nonverbal, written)
6) Supervising civil engineering works. (With respect to quality, progress rate,
material & processes)
7) Identifying raw materials/tools/equipment appropriate for the nature of
work and appreciate their importance, their source, mode of Transport
tosite etc.., (NOT For Final evaluation)
8) Recognizing and Practicing safety Measures in Construction Industry.
9) Preparing Reports pertaining to ongoing works.
Scheme of Formative Assessment and Summative Assessment for Industrial

Training
Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
1 12 weeks 1.The faculty Skill sets as given in the 120
2 20-22 concerned and scheme of assessment 120
weeks 2. Training
Mentor of the
industry
1. The faculty 1.Demonstration of any
member one of the skills listed in
30
3.Final concerned, the Scheme of
23-24
summative 2. HoD concerned assessment
weeks
Evaluation and 3. An 2.Training Report 20
external 3.Viva Voce 10
examiner
TOTAL 300
Weightage of marks for Assessment of skills
During first and second assessment of INDUSTRAL Training
Max Marks
Skill
Skill set Allotted For
set No
each skill set
1 Planning & Scheduling of works, material & 15
man power.
2 Reading Drawings & Preparing Designs of 30
various structural components.
3 Given drawing, Preparing Estimates 25
4 Supervising Civil Engg works with respect to 20
Quality, Progress rate, Material, Processes
5 Developing interpersonal relation (Spoken & 15
written communication)
6 Drafting skills 15
Total 120
Note: During assessment, the performance of the students shall be assessed in

those skills in which the student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per
the Weightage assigned as above. In case the student has undergone training in few
skills sets only, then the total marks obtained shall be raised to 120 marks for the
given assessment i.e., either assessment 1 or 2. However the performance of the
student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than three
skill sets.
Illustration: If the student has undergone training in only 4 skill sets (namely S.No.
1,2,4,5) and marks awarded during assessment is 50 out of 80 marks, then the
marks of 50 shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (50x120/80=75)
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN CIVIL
ENGINEERING PROGRAMME:
1. Duration of the training: 6 months (24 Weeks).

2. Eligibility: As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students may be trained in planning, Designing,
Estimating, Drafting, Scheduling and executing of Civil Engineering
works.
4. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial
training.
5. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training,
the student shall reappear for 6 months industrial training.
6. Formative assessment at industry shall be carried out by the Mentor
from the industry, where the student is undergoing training and the in
faculty in-charge (Guide) from the concerned section in the institution.
7. The Industrial training shall carry a Weightage of 300 marks and pass
mark is 50% in assessments at industry (first and second
assessment) and final summative assessment at institution put
together i.e., 150 marks out of 300 marks.
8. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment
at institution level, the student should reappear for final summative
assessment in the subsequent board examination.
9. Final summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee
including1. Head of the section (of concerned discipline ONLY), 2.
External examiner from an industry and 3. Faculty member who
assessed the student during Industrial Training as members
Roles and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the
students’ performance during industrial Training:
1. The faculty member shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.
2. Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the
industry during the training period, and shall check it is followed scrupulously.
3. Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the
assessment.
4. Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions
for improvement
5. Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per
stipulated schedule.
6. Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
7. Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill
set during final assessment at institution.
8. Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials
like photographs, articles, videos etc..
9. Shall act as co-examiner along with external examiner.
10. Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.
11. Shall maintain a diary indicating his observation with respect to the progress
of students learning in all three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and
Affective)
Guidelines to the training mentor in the industry:
1) Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
2) Shall assess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the
faculty member.
3) Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
4) Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training
period.
5) Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development
or any misbehavior as the case may be.
6) Every Teacher (including HoD if not holding any FAC) shall be assigned a
batch of students of 10 to 15 for industrial training irrespective of student’s
placements for training.
Department of Technical Education

Name of the institution
Industrial training assessment
PIN: Name of the student:
Skil Max Precisely Complet Complet Makes
l SKILL SET Marks complete es the es the attempt
Set Allotted s the task, task, ,
Sl.N For each task mistakes Mistakes Mistake
o paramet are are a few s are
er absent, many
but not
Precise
1 Planning & Scheduling of
works, material & man 5 5 3 2 1
power (15)
(i) Planning of the work 5 5 3 2 1
(ii) Scheduling of the work
(iii) preparing weekly/monthly 5 5 3 2 1
Material and Manpower
requirement, recording the
actuals
2 Reading Drawings &
Preparing Designs of
various structural
components (30) 15 15 10 9 6
(i) Reading Drawings, 15 15 10 9 6
preparing working drawing
(ii) Preparing Designs for
small elements
3 Given drawing, Preparing
Estimates (25)
(i) Preparing Data 10 10 7 6 3
(ii) Preparing Detailed cum 15 15 10 9 6
Abstract Estimates
4 Supervising Civil Engg
works with respect to
Quality, Progress rate, 10 10 7 6 3
Material, Processes (20) 10 10 7 6 3
(i) Supervising Quality in
work, material etc.
(ii) Supervising Progress of
work, precautions etc.
5 Developing interpersonal
relation (Spoken & written
communication) (15) 10 10 7 6 3
(i) Teamwork and 5 5 3 2 1
collaboration.
(ii) Communication skills
6 Drafting skills (15)
(i) Presentation skills.
(ii) Reporting skills 10 10 7 6 3
5 5 3 2 1
 Mistakes are with reference to Technique, Procedure & precautions, while

precision refers to technique, procedure, precautions, time & result
(Marks awarded in words:

................................................................................................ )
Signature of the Training In-charge Signature of the faculty incharge (Guide)

(Mentor) Name
Name Designation
Designation

Adi Mission Pdfs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adi Mission Pdfs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adi Mission Pdfs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CURRICULUM – 2020

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

ANDHRA PRADESH :: VIJAYAWADA

S.No Contents Page No.

Analysis of Curriculum C-16 (SWOT analysis) started in the month of June-2019.

The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed

The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2020 (C-20) is approved by BoG of

It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum

1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)

Max:20 Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT

a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.

B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/

a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in

vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in

14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

15. STRUCTURE OF EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER:

Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while

The sum of marks obtained in 3 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and

d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic

19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING&

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE

23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

C-20 Curriculum for DCE

Develop Civil Engineering professionals competent to face the global challenges in a

M1 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need based

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

1. Basic and discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

1. An ability to apply disciplines - specific knowledge to solve core and/or applied

SI. Scheme of evaluation

1.First Assessment at Assessment of Learning

2.Second Assessment of Learning

TOTAL MARKS 300

S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped

2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4